Home

COMPASS® for molbox™ Flow Calibration Software

1. 13 5 1 OVERVIEW 2 252 na Se se Po cetenccesesssccesstesececoscccsnataasdidcececasmacdesniacesccssmaczncnidsesedassiacapauarmeavanaan 13 541 EXAMPLE JL eme 13 Ed 14 5 1 1 2 SET UP A molbox AS THE REFERENCE 000 15 BEN THE TEST aks eoa ted ualde UA SEE EARN 16 542 EXAMPLE 18 5 1 2 1 SETUP lt VOLTAGE CURRENT gt OUTPUT TYPE ssss111see1issstirssserirssntrrssetrssseenrsenensen 18 51292 CREPERENCE ete unt E e 18 5 1 23 gt 0 0 0 ttt 18 Bd EXAMPLE need 19 5 1 3 1 DUTDEFINITION SETUBC ecrire sitae ient umane 19 5 1 3 2 DMM CONFIGURATION SETUP 19 RE eed ee Ee LE 20 JEXAMPLESd OG noe ole o de ee ee ee de CR dE 20 SETUP a oderat ep aut REG o A M EIE 20 5 1 4 2 TEST DEFINITION SETUP tinm melt ea eid ce intct 21 21 coe od 22 ee a a eee Ner fe 22 5454 DUT DEFINITION oec ere eR steer Poe o en rea 22 5 1 5 2 TEST DEFINITION te m ev E REB SS 23 51 53 TEST HARDWARE SETUPS 2 v
2. 76 DUT Definition Editor Read Tab 77 DUT Definition Editor Set Tab 79 Test Definition Editor Toolbar Features sss 83 Test Definition 6 0 84 Test Definition Editor Points Tab 5 87 Test Definition Editor Sequence Tab 88 Test Definition Editor Tare Tab 90 Test Definition Editor Control Tab Fields 92 Test Definition Editor Leak Test Tab 0 93 Test Definition Editor Purge Tab 94 Test Definition Editor Data Tab 95 Test Definition Editor Auxiliary Tab 96 System Configuration Screen 0 101 Hardware Configuration Toolbar 104 Hardware Definition Edit Reference Screen Fields 106 Edit DMM gt lt Frequency gt Pressure And Temperature Screen Fields 109 Hardware Definition Edit Power Supply Screen 5 112 Hardware Definition Edit Controller Screen 5
3. Figure 21 lt DUT Reference Comparison gt Run Screen 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 42 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 9 lt DUT Reference Comparison gt Run Screen Fields LABEL DESCRIPTION Red or Green molbox flow Ready Not Ready indicator see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Circular Indicator Manual Ready Not Ready Section The circle is green when molbox flow is ready and red when not ready Red or Green Square DUT in or out of tolerance indication The square is green only when the instantaneous Indicator flow error is within the tolerance specified in the DUT Definition see Section 8 5 5 Reference Reference flow converted from the molbox display units to the current lt DUT Reference Comparison gt run screen units If the DUT Definition specifies a density correction see Section 8 5 3 the reference flow value is the reference flow corrected for the DUT normal operating conditions Ref Flow DUT Cond in the Data Grid This allows the reference flow to represent the flow that would be present if the DUT were at its normal operating conditions Put another way reference flow corrected for the DUT normal operating conditions is what the DUT would indicate if it agreed perfectly with the reference To change the display unit of measure click the value and select the desired unit from the list The DUT flow converted to the current flow display units When a m
4. 488 Card National Instruments Default DUT 5232 Puit ce Figure 11 Example 5 System Configuration 5 154 RUN THE TEST Use Run Run Test to start a test sequence see Section 7 2 5 16 EXAMPLE 6 How do I set up to test at a single flow point for an extended period of time You may desire to use COMPASS and the molbox molbloc to capture mass flow data at one flow point over an extended period of time This test method could be useful for instance to determine the stability of a DUT over time at a single set point 5 1 6 1 DUT DEFINITION SETUP Select or create a DUT Definition that matches the characteristics of the DUT that you will be running see Section 8 5 1 6 2 TEST DEFINITION SETUP Select the Setup Test Points table and enter the test point at which you would like to acquire the data see Section 9 Select the Setup Test Sequence tab and enter the test sequence parameters In order to run a long term test you can enter up to 100 readings per flow point During the test complete point reading sequences including averaging time will be made one after another with only the calculations data storage and data plotting operations in between To make even more readings repeat the same point in the lt Points gt table If your DUT is a controller or you are using an other controller COMPASS has an option for two modes of flow regulation You c
5. ies 16 3 1 1 FILE EDIT 16 3 1 2 FILE GENERATE REPORT ttt 165 EDIT TEMPLATE RN ped ok nu 165 18 3 14 CREATE TEMPLATE OO ceci cda 166 16 2 1 5 7 SAVE ose e Lena ci 167 SAVE ceste 167 10 217 SAVE ALE d esee e 167 JO D RISEN 6 p ca C Lt Un 167 16 31 97 EILE CLOSE ALG ce ee pt D Lr MED ER DE M 167 16 3410 STEN ET IRIN TY alos ec nal tenn boc ees E dan 168 163 1 PRINT ALD tou oo Ee ad 168 1631 12 flo inset n 168 E 168 16 3 2 1 JeDHLIBNDORcGOSS 168 15 32 EDIT o Pe cae vere onl canes tab en bM Tart 168 156 2 8 v JEDIT 169 16 3 2 4_ M LEM ARM 169 1855 5 eorr eet eet Api s Me saei 169 16 3 26 EDIT FIND NEXT ttt ttt ttt 170 36 3 97 MEDI ISEEEGT 225 E 170 16 3 3 SIEORMAT ie ena cete decedit aceon clea etse hora qr S E e trn 170 16 3 3 1 FORMAT INSERT DATE TIME 170 16 3 3 2 FORMAT INSERT FIELD KEY cie cti cete trcs 170 16 3 3 3 FORMAT SELECT TEMPLATE ttt 171 16 3394 F
6. 5 143 Plot Properties Custom Plot Tab 144 Flow Unit Editor Panel enne nennen nns 155 Flow Unit Converter Panel nnns 157 Process Gas Editor Tool nns 160 Find Panel Etelds eed aca 170 Multi Cycle Data File Options Screen 172 COMPASS Report Editor Font Format Toolbar sse 174 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler 175 Data File Grid Run Screen Main 182 Data File Grid Run Screen Fields Columns 183 Flow Unit Conversion 196 Definition Of Terms In Flow Unit Conversion Formulas 197 Flow Unit Conversion Scaling Factors sssssssssssssseseeeeeeee entren 197 Supported Gas Molecular Weights sessi 198 Conversions From kg s To mole s For Various Gases sse 199 Conversion From mole s To pccm sssssssssseseseseeee eene 199 Pressure Unit Conversion Chart nennen 200 Troubleshooting deett ee dte 203 Page vii 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FIGURES Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figu
7. The report Editor includes a Test Data Field Insertion Tool This tool allows links to fields in COMPASS Date Files dat to be embedded into the report template The ability to insert Data File links at any location within a report template using any available text formatting is one of the most important features of the Report Editor Access this tool by pressing lt CTRL T gt the toolbar shortcut Insert Field Key or the menu option Format Insert Field Key see Section 16 3 3 2 The default directory locations for dat rtf and tpl files are determined by the Report Editor Options Paths selections see Section 16 3 4 4 Each file selection box within the report Editor defaults to one of these directories depending on the type of file required Unless changed by the user all report templates are stored in the template sub directory of the COMPASS root directory Reports automatically have the same name as the Data File that was merged with a report template but with the extension rtf By default they are stored in the same directory as the Data File see Section 18 3 The Current Template selection on the bottom status bar of the main display is always used to generate a report This selection can be changed by double clicking the text or by using Format Select Template The COMPASS Report Editor supports Windows drag and drop functionality All supported files of the Report Editor can be dragged to the ti
8. not pressed prior to closing the editor none of the updates will be stored action button Page 161 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 15 3 GAS BLENDS Press Create Gas Blend gt in the Process Gas Editor see Section 15 to define a blended gas Use the drop down list box to select the first gas in the blend Enter the percentage of the blended gas that the selected gas represents in the Add Percentage entry field Then press lt Add gt to add the gas percentage to the blend Continue to select gases and enter the appropriate percentages until 100 96 of the blended gas is defined Up to five gases can be used to define a gas blend Then press lt OK gt to update the Process Gas Editor with the newly defined blend Press Clear to erase all process gas information Use the control box X or the Esc key to close the display without making any changes A nominal gas conversion factor is calculated by taking the reciprocal of the weighted reciprocal sum of each of the component gas conversion factors The recommended surrogate is the recommended surrogate for the highest percentage gas or the first gas selected if the percentages are equal Create Gas Blend Lx Air 20 SF6 45 Add Percentage 35 Percent Remaining 35 Add Clear Figure 92 Create Gas Blend Panel 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 162 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual
9. Nominal flow set point in the set point unit of measure specified in the Test Definition see Sections 9 5 2 9 5 3 When the measured set point is not available the nominal set point is used to determine set point errors Raw Ref Q Unmanipulated molbox flow in the mass flow units specified on the Tools Options molbox tab see Section 11 2 If the flow reference is not a molbox this value is N A Do not use this value as the value of the reference flow Use Ref Q DUT Cond Ref Q DUT This is the value that should always be used for the reference flow If the DUT Definition Correction tab see Section 8 5 3 specifies no density correction the Ref Q DUT Conds is equal to Ref Q gt immediately below If the DUT Definition Correction tab does specify a density correction the reference flow value is corrected to express the flow that would be present at the DUT if the DUT were at its normal operating conditions This correction allows the reference flow and DUT indication to be compared even though the DUT is not at its normal operating conditions Reference flow in the DUT Definition s flow unit of measure Never includes a density correction Do not use this value as the reference flow use lt Ref Q DUT Cond gt above as it is valid in all cases DUT Q DUT flow flow measured by the DUT in the DUT Definition Range tab s flow unit of measure see Section 8 5 4 The value is determined from the average
10. Used as a shortcut to immediately view plots using the data from the test that just completed This choice is functionally equivalent to exiting the test and selecting Data Plot Data File see Section 12 4 Close the plot function using the control box X or press Esc to return to the Test Completes selections action button Delete File Used to delete the current test Data File Use this feature if the data taken will not be used When used a delete confirmation prompt must be answered prior to deleting the Data File When confirmed the file is deleted and the Test Complete window automatically closes action button Exit Test Exits the test The Test Complete pop up disappears and the main menu associated screen reappear The current test data remains active until another test is action button started 7 3 RUN molbox This run mode is used as a virtual interface to the molbox Flow pressure temperature and analog output information if available are continuously updated on the molbox Output run screen see Section 6 7 2 while the Control Toolbar see Section 6 6 is available for parameter changes auxiliary functions and data acquisition Since this run mode is molbox specific a molbox with a remote interface must be selected as the flow reference in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 for the mode to operate The Run molbox option is similar to running a
11. icurrent report template Prompt to create individual or multiple reports C Report only information specifically requested in the report template Figure 96 lt Multi Cycle Data File Options gt Panel Table 59 lt Multi Cycle Data File Options gt Screen Choices FEATURE DESCRIPTION Auto generate multiple reports of individual cycle data with the current report template radio button Prompt to create individual or multiple reports radio button Report only information specifically requested in the report template radio button Automatically creates an independent report for each data cycle stored in the selected Data File All field keys that have a specifically assigned data cycle are ignored Each report generated will be formatted based on the selected report template however the report will always contain information from only one cycle at a time For example a five cycle Data File will generate five individual reports Data files with multiple data cycles require the selection of which data cycles to include in the reports An individual report will be created for each cycle selected Only data from one cycle will be included in each report regardless of any specific cycle selections stored in the report template Uses the data cycle related field keys exactly as they were stored in the report template When this option is selected only one report is generated regardless of how
12. 2 59 7 2 3 TEST CONCLUSION ros ir eL LL AAR A 59 73 RUN molbox 2 8 60 7 3 1 1 1 1 FIGURE 36 RUN MODE DATA SELECTOR FORM sssssssssssssiessrnnsrinnssirnnrrensrens 2 61 Zub AIBUN DUI tc ee 61 82 ISETUPI 8 1 OVERVIEW c 8 2 CREATING DUT DEFINITIONS 8 3 aware aa rawi araa ninaa 8 4 DUT DEFINITION SELECTOR 8 5 DUT DEFINITION EDITOR 8 5 1 TOOLBAR 8 5 2 HEADER TAB 8 5 3 CORRECTION TAB 8 5 4 RANGE TAB 8 5 5 TOLERANCE TAB Pe 856 e I nd uma amen Li anti 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page ii COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 10 11 12 13 8 5 7 E T T A TE 75 8 5 8 READ TAB 859 81 9 1 81 9 2 CREATING TEST 81 9 3 EDITING TEST 2 4 82 9 4 TEST DEFINITION SELECTOR 9 5 TEST DEFINITION EDITOR 9 51 9 5 2 POINTS TABLE 9 5 3 POINTS TAB 9 5 4 SEQUENCE TAB 9 55 TARE 9 5 6 CONTROL TAB 9 5 7 LEAK TEST TAB 958 PURGE TAB 9 5 9 DATA TAB 9 5 10 AUXILIARY TAB gt 7 6 SETUP S
13. Current display flow unit of measure The value can be changed only in Run molbox mode New flow units can be created by selecting the lt Edit Units gt option at the top of the drop down list This selection displays the flow unit Editor see Section 14 Select from the list of supported pressure units of measure When in Run DUT mode and the DUT has a density correction the pressure units are controlled by the DUT Definition see Section 8 5 3 Select from the list of supported temperature units When in Run DUT mode and the DUT has a density correction the temperature units are controlled by the DUT Definition see Section 8 5 3 Page 37 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 6 6 8 FLOW CONTROL The flow control function is represented by the toolbar icon If a non manual flow control option is specified in Run DUT mode or the reference molbox has the MFC control option in Run molbox mode this function is enabled to control the flow or molbox output In Run DUT mode the flow can be changed by directly entering the target flow scrolling to the desired target flow using the jog function or activating one of the flow regulation modes When the target flow is changed an Activate Change button appears for final confirmation prior to taking action The lt DUT gt run screen will display the resulting new set point when the target is accepted see Section 6 7 3 Realize
14. Data files dat are the files created by COMPASS to store the data relating to a test run on a DUT using Run Test see Section 7 2 Data files can be viewed edited printed and made into custom reports all within COMPASS Data files have also been designed to be easily exported to third party applications such as spreadsheets or instrument management software 18 2 DATA FILE CREATION At the beginning of a test run see Section 7 2 a Data File dat is created This file contains all the details on the test reference information DUT information test information and test data is logged to it as the test runs If a test is aborted before test conclusion is reached the Tools Options Data File tab setting see Section 11 8 determines whether COMPASS queries the operator as to whether to keep or delete the partial Data File or the Data File is automatically deleted by COMPASS 18 3 NAMING AND STORING DATA FILES Data files are named and stored automatically The default directory for COMPASS Data Files is data DUT Dinfo dat The DUTIDinfo sub directory is created automatically by COMPASS using the DUT information selected on the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 11 8 By default the DUT serial number is used specified in the DUT Definition see Section 8 5 2 The DUT based sub directories are automatically created by COMPASS at the designated location The automated Data File name follows one o
15. Page 75 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 21 DUT Definition Editor Conditions Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Attitude Defines the orientation of the DUT during a test This is recorded as descriptive text in the Data File and can be used in reports The attitude is selected by using the attitude scroll bar scroll bar The DUT icon to the right of the fields moves to illustrate the current attitude selection Description The text representing the attitude is logged in the Data File Each attitude has a different default description however any text entered will be used optional text entry field Normal Exhaust Select the pressure conditions downstream of the DUT The choices include Condition lt Vacuum gt lt Atmosphere gt or Pressure When Pressure is selected a pressure value must be entered in the Exhaust Pressure field required drop down list selection Exhaust Enter the pressure value and select the unit of measure of the pressure just downstream Pressure of the DUT This field is enabled only when the pressure exhaust condition is selected conditional numeric entry field 8 5 8 READ TAB The DUT Definition Read tab defines how COMPASS acquires data from the DUT Whatever the data acquisition method DUT flow output data must be obtained in the output units specified on the Range tab DUT s that interface directly by R
16. 6 3 STATUS BAR 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 29 H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the main screen In all run modes COMPASS flashes information related to the current operation on this display While running tests two panels and a progress indicator also display with status information on the current test step and point The blue panel on the left displays the current test step or function Each point of a test sequence has five basic test steps 9 molbloc Change if specified for this point in Test Definition e Purge if specified for this molbloc change e Leak Test if specified for this molbloc change Set Flow to flow point specified Stability Test for flow to stabilize at the set point e Tare if specified for this point e Jog Flow if specified for this point O Dwell for dwell time at the set point Take Point for length of averaging time The red panel displays the current test point during a test The notation used is current cycle current point of total cycles total points per cycle Multiple readings per point information is not included in this display For example if a 2 cycle 10 point test is executed point of the 1 cycle displays as 1 3 of 2 10 Refer to these displays to determine the new current point when the Skip Back and Skip Forward buttons are used The progress indicator is a visual indication of the relationshi
17. Cycle 1 of 1 Date gt 12 Apr 96 Operator B Head Test Data File E Comp_box Data S ample dat DUT Reference Manufacturer GENERIC Manufacturer DH Instruments Model 201 afasvcaa Model molbox SN 9501044 SN 110 ID dhi generic ID Flow Range 0 000 to 1000 000 seem 21 1 C Range 5 sim Output Range 0 000 to 5 000 V Data Acquistion molbox Flow Control Manual Tolerance 1 XDUTFS Ref DUT DUT ZFS BF DUT BFZRdg BFZFS Flow Flow Dutput Error Error Flow Error Error sccm 21 1 C sccm 21 1 C V sccm 21 1 C 3 1000 2 200 0 0110 N 0 090 8 032 130 1 0 4034 105 30 100 4 0 5020 4 690 0 490 110 0 0 2021 0 0213 205 90 200 0 1 000 2 880 0 590 210 3 0 7107 0 1463 306 10 300 2 1 501 1 920 0 590 310 3 0 5604 0 1715 406 20 399 6 1 998 1 630 0 660 410 1 0 6562 0 2665 508 00 499 6 2 498 1 660 0 840 511 7 0 9285 0 4717 602 40 599 8 2 999 0 430 0 260 605 8 0 1380 0 0831 698 40 699 8 3 499 0 200 0 140 701 6 0 6557 0 4580 797 744 3998 nan nn anna 432 5129 2 Current Temnlate Mefarilt rtf Zz Figure 93 COMPASS Report Editor 16 3 1 FILE 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 164 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Detailed information on each of the items in the File menu is listed in this section Items that have an equivalent toolbar shortcut display the icon of the tool bar next to the section title Multiple files can be selected using many of the File
18. H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 6 7 RUN SCREENS COMPASS uses six different run screens and spy windows to display output information while in a run mode The Display menu and the lt Control Toolbar gt can be used to activate any of these run screens while in a run mode see Sections 11 9 6 6 Clicking and dragging the run screen border to the appropriate size can scale each of the screens Closing minimizing or maximizing any of the run screens has no affect on the run mode A test will continue to run even when all run screens are closed The Display menu includes cascade and tile options for common default displays The combination of these features makes the COMPASS user interface totally customizable 6 7 1 DUT REFERENCE COMPARISON RUN SCREEN This run screen contains a simple display of errors useful when comparing the DUT and reference The comparison run screen is considered to be the COMPASS program s main run screen The mouse pointer will change into a wand when the cursor is placed over any of the run screen fields that support unit changing Click the field to get a pop up menu of other unit of measure available The DUT flow unit output unit set unit and WDUTFS are the available choices Click the DUT or reference output values to change their display units Information on each of the lt DUT Reference Comparison gt run screen fields is provided in Table 9 2 DUT Reference Comparison Set Errc
19. drop down list selection Set point power supply drop down list selection Set point DMM drop down list selection Frequency Measurement drop down list selection Pressure Measurement drop down list selection Table 34 lt System Configuration gt Screen Fields DESCRIPTION This is the source of reference flow values in the COMPASS run modes The drop down list choices are created using the Hardware Definition Reference tab see Section 10 3 3 This is a required selection as all run modes include measurement of reference flow A molbox is the only reference flow device for which remote communications are supported All other reference devices require manual entry in run modes When a molbox reference is selected molbox specific features are selectable in other System Configuration fields This is the device used to read the output of DUTs whose Output Type is lt Voltage Current gt in the DUT Definition Read tab see Section 8 5 8 The drop down list choices are created using the Hardware Definition DMM tab see Section 10 3 4 If a molbox is selected as the Flow References Reference molbox gt is a choice in this list A selection in this category is required only to run lt Voltage Current gt output type DUTs This is the device used to send analog set point values to DUTs that are checked as flow controllers in the DUT Definition Range tab and whose lt Setpoint Type is lt Voltage Cu
20. 5232 Interface R5232 Port 5 R5232 Settings 208 71 No command setup Figure 59 Hardware Definition Reference Tab Edit Reference E3 Header Manufacturer DH Instruments Inc Bd Model molbox RFM SerialNumber 02 Identification Demo UNIT Calibration Date Interface 5232 No command setup 5232 Port 5 95232 Settings 2400 7 1 Save Exit Figure 60 Hardware Definition Edit Reference Panel Page 105 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc FEATURE Model drop down list selection Serial Number required text entry field Identification optional text entry field Calibration Date optional text entry field Uncertainty optional entry field Remote Interface drop down selection list 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 36 Hardware Definition Edit Reference Screen Fields DESCRIPTION Defines the manufacturer of the reference device If DH Instruments is selected the Model listbox is populated with the supported molbox references Other choice is also available Use this choice to set up reference devices other than DHI models When Others is selected a pop up appears for entry of the manufacturer name of the reference device A remote interface with COMPASS is not supported for non DHI flow references Defines the model of the reference device When the man
21. DUT output value DUT OUT DUT output in the DUT Definition Read tab s output unit of measure see Section 8 5 8 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 184 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H FEATURE DESCRIPTION DUT Set Measured DUT set point This value is present only when a the Test Definition Data tab specifies set point measurement see Section 9 5 9 DUT P Gas pressure at the DUT in the DUT Definition s normal operating pressure unit of measure see Section 8 5 3 A value is present only if DUT pressure logging was required DUTT Gas temperature at the DUT in the DUT Definition s normal operating temperature unit of measure see Section 8 5 3 A value is present only if DUT temperature logging was required Percent of span error calculated from the DUT and reference flows and the DUT s span Span and full scale errors are the same as long as the DUT s Min Flow gt value is 0 see Sections 8 5 4 19 4 Rdg Err Percent of reading error calculated from the DUT and reference flows see Sections 8 5 4 19 4 FS Set Err Percent of span error calculated from the reference flow the DUT span and the measured or nominal set point If the measured set point is not available the nominal value is used Span and full scale errors are the same as long as the DUT s Min Flows value is 0 see Sections 8 5 4 19 4 Rdg Set Err Percent of reading error based on the reference flow and the me
22. FEATURE DESCRIPTION Test molbox A molbloc change inserted into a Test Definition can occur in one of 3 ways change mode drop down list prompt for change A user prompt displays to change the mobloc It is up to box the user to make all necessary electrical and pneumatic connections prior to responding to the prompt This may involve simply changing the active molbloc channel or re connecting a new molbloc toggle active channle When a 2 channel molbox is the flow reference the active molbloc channel is automatically switched A to B or B to A No prompt is provided Using this option and a Test Definition valve driver change a fully automated two molbloc test can be executed If the reference is not a 1 channel molbox a prompt to change the molbloc is displayed Prior to running the test the flow hardware must be setup such that the 2 reference molblocs are on channels A and B of the reference molbox An electric valve s should be used to isolate the moblocs The required valve state to expose a new molbloc and isolate a molbloc should be added to the Test Definition along with a molbloc change e delay and re load Use this option only when the ability to automatically change a molbloc with external software and or hardware is available When selected a 20s delay occurs then the active channel molbloc is re loaded COMPASS will display a warning if the serial number of the new molbloc is the same as the serial number of the
23. Figure 28 lt Select molbloc gt Panel 7 2 1 3 SELECT DUT The DUT Definition selection tool is presented allowing browsing of DUT Definitions available and selection of the DUT to run see Section 8 If this step is turned OFF see Section 11 2 the screen is not shown and the last DUT Definition used or accessed is automatically selected DUTs are listed by manufacturer model serial number identification and record label The list is sorted according to the most recently selected sort order Use your keyboard s arrow keys or pointing device to highlight the desired DUT The highlighted DUT record label is listed at the bottom of the display To select a DUT from the DUT list double click on the desired listing or press lt OK gt while the listing is highlighted Click lt View Selection gt to display the current selection or lt Cancel gt to quit 46 DUT Selection Tool x cidem Seia Number Record Label DH Instruments iFM molbloc 1456 REM molbloc GENERIC G1 5113374 Example V DUT GENERIC 0 51 1971 1205 Example Rotameter Company B BB2000 1993 1994 R5232 DUT DH Instruments molbox 1 256 molbloc 1337 molbox molbloc GENERIC G 1 4414 2 Example m DUT 44 Bulbco Instruments F184 N A N A Example V MFM GENERIC 5 8 N N Manual DUT Label RFM molbloc Search by Model x 554 Search fer REM 7 Bm View Selection Cancel Figure 29 lt DUT Selection gt Tool The current selection is viewed using the
24. Flow measured in terms of quantity of gas per quantity of time Nearly all flow measurements including volumetrically based flow units such as sccm are mass flow measurements See also volume flow and actual flow See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Section for an extensive discussion of flow units of measure Microrange An optional molbox RFM feature which improves flow measurement resolution and accuracy under 10 96 of FS of the molbloc Includes a low differential RPT and valve to put the RPT into and out of service Normal DUT The gas pressure and temperature conditions under which a DUT is normally operated Operating The conditions for which it is calibrated Normal Operating Conditions must be Conditions Normal specified in DUT Definitions that include a gas density correction Operating Pressure and Temperature Perfect Mass Flow Volumetrically based mass flow units of measure that assume ideal gas behavior for all Units gases compressibility factor of 1 See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Section for an extensive discussion of flow units of measure Process Gas The gas for which a device under test is to be characterized or calibrated The gas that will actually flow in the device under test when it is used in a process A procedure used to assure that the old gas species has been completed removed from the test system when a new gas species is being flowed Purge can
25. If changes were necessary to establish communications these changes must be made in the device s Hardware Definition see Section 10 3 Reposition the main program toolbars Right click the Main Toolbar or the Control Toolbar to get a popup menu of options to reposition the toolbars see Sections 6 5 and 6 6 Determine the characters to strip from the response of a remote DUT or DMM Use Tools Remote Communications see Section 10 3 to query the device and observe its response string Use the same device for more than one task in the Hardware Definition e g DMM also measure frequency Set up the instrument in both Hardware Definitions and select it for both functions in the System Configuration see Section 10 Make sure the same remote interface selection is used in both setups Log data not already logged by COMPASS Use Setup Hardware lt Auxiliary gt see Section 10 3 7 to create the interface for the device that will be used to measure the desired output An example Auxiliary Data setup of the valve voltage measuring ability of the molbox was installed with COMPASS After the device has been setup select it in a Test Definition see Section 9 5 10 or select the device in initialization of Run DUT or Run molbox Log data without running a test or take data over an extended period of time Use Run Run DUT or Run molbox see Section 7 3 to begin data acquisition with the molbox and
26. Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual O Setflow point The flow test point is set The method used to set the flow is determined by the Flow Control selection in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 6 If flow setting is manual the user is prompted to set the flow to the flow point value If flow setting is automated flow is set automatically using either the DUT or the selected flow controller In manual flow control once OK has been pressed to confirm the flow is set test execution continues If a O flow set point is specified and the prompt for manual valve shut off option is selected in Tools Options Run Test see Section 11 6 a message displays requesting that the user operate the necessary valves to achieve 0 flow In this case no automatic flow control is used When the flow is set testing for stability begins see Section 7 1 In automated control if the stability test times out the Status column of the Data Grid and Data File displays s see Section 18 4 After completing the flow stability test test execution continues Tare molbox f the current test point requires a tare see Section 9 5 2 and the reference is a molbox the molbox internal valves are adjusted for taring and the lt Tare gt window displays If Wait for Enter to tare is checked in the Test Definition the user must click the lt Tare gt button to set the current tare The Tare Window does automatically clo
27. Initialization Commands will be issued during run mode initialization then the Read Commands will be repeatedly sent to obtain real time output from the DUT The RS232 Settings must be selected by clicking the field and making the necessary selections Information on commands required to read the DUT by RS 232 must be provided Review Section 13 3 for details on the requirements of RS 232 data acquisition This selection is normally used only when the DUT actually outputs directly by RS 232 However it can also be used in a variety of situations in which the DUT does not directly output in RS 232 but the device used to read the DUT has an RS 232 interface for example to read DUTs through a conversion module IEEE 488 DUT data is gathered using the IEEE 488 interface provided by the IEEE 488 card specified in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 The lt IEEE 488 Address gt must be entered before saving the DUT Information on the commands required to read the DUT by IEEE 488 must be provided Review Section 13 4 for details on the requirements of IEEE 488 data acquisition This selection is normally used only when the DUT actually outputs directly by IEEE 488 However it can also be used in a variety of situations in which the DUT does not directly output in IEEE 488 but the device used to read the DUT has an IEEE 488 interface Frequency The DUT output is a frequency that will be acquired using the Frequency Measurement de
28. Maintain Lists Initialize Run Test End Test Data File Display Disable flow regulation while averaging Force reference flow to zero when the set point is zero Prompt for manual valve isolation for zero set points Allow flow adjustment for leak tests and zero set points v Use DUT Error as DUT Set Error for zero set points Apply DUT Factor to manual entry reference f 5 0 DUTFS overrange limit Manual DLIT P and T Entry Method Enter at first point z Default absolute pressure fi 01 8 kPa x Default temperature 20 C bd Manually enter pressure and temperature in default units Figure 73 Options Run Test Tab Table 46 Options Run Test Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Disable flow regulation When checked flow regulation is canceled when averaging data prior to logging a while averaging point Flow regulation is not reset until a new set point is requested either by the user or as part of a test Use this option to reduce noise while averaging check box Typically changing the averaging time interval will serve the same purpose Force reference flow to When this option is checked the reference flow is always be logged as zero when zero when the set point the test sequence target flow is zero This feature over rides the actual reference is zero flow at zero set points to avoid non zero or negative flow values in the Data File
29. Reading or directly entered in a flow unit The value entered is used to determine the DUT measurement uncertainty when tests are run see Section 19 10 This field may be left blank if not used The choices available include None lt RS232 gt and lt IEEE 488 gt To set up the device for remote communications select the type of interface that is on the device When an interface type is selected the rest of the Remote Interface gt panel changes as appropriate to accommodate definition of the interface characteristics If the reference device model is Other the drop down list is not active The None selection for a device requires manual entry and manual control of reference flow during a test Remote communications are not supported for reference devices other than DHI molbloc molbox flow references Page 106 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE DESCRIPTION RS 232 If the Remote Interface selection is RS 232 the lt RS232 Settings panel Settings is shown When creating a new device Definition the settings are loaded with COMPASS default settings Port settings are listed baud rate parity data bits stop bits Clicking on any setting field causes the RS232 Settings Editor to appear see Section 13 3 1 Select the correct settings for the reference device from the drop down lists and click lt OK gt when ready conditional display panel IEEE 488 If the Remote Int
30. Tab Page 71 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc FEATURE Flow Range Unit required drop down list selection Flow Range Min Flow required numeric entry field Flow Range Max Flow required numeric entry field Resolution required list box selection Output Range Units required drop down list text entry field Output Range Min Output required numeric entry field Output Range Max Output required numeric entry field Output Range Resolution required drop down list selection Set Range Is the DUT a Controller check box 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 18 DUT Definition Editor Range Tab Fields DESCRIPTION Select the DUT flow unit of measure from the drop down list The final calculated DUT flow always displays in this unit The minimum and maximum flow must be entered in the selected unit If the desired flow unit is not on the list use the Edit Units option at the top of the drop down list to display the Flow Unit Editor see Section 14 All new units created automatically appear in the list of flow units of measure Enter the lowest DUT flow in the flow range unit of measure Typically this value is O In some special cases the minimum flow is non zero Regardless the value entered must correspond to the DUT s Min Output see below This is the expected flow when the DUT s Min Output occurs
31. Test Definition Editor Purge Tab Table 31 Test Definition Editor Purge Tab Fields DESCRIPTION Check this box to include a purge routine at the beginning of a test The flow rate at which to purge and purge time are set in other fields of this tab Check this box for a purge routine to be run after any molbloc change included in the test sequence The flow rate and purge time are set in other fields of this tab Determines the flow rate at which any purge routine included in the test will be executed Note that the unit is FS of the DUT being tested Determines the duration in seconds of any purge routine included in the test 9 5 9 DATA TAB The Test Definition Data tab is used to specify whether or not to log certain data items when tests are run The purpose of the Data tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 32 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 94 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE Read DUT Output check box Read DUT Set Point check box Read DUT Pressure check box Read DUT Temperature check box Tare Contral Leak Test Purge Read DUT Output Read DUT Set Point Iv Read DUT Pressure if not already required Read DUT Temperature if not already required Figure 55 Test Definition Editor Data Tab Table 32 Test Definition Editor Data Tab Fields DESCRIPTION When
32. Test Setup Page 25 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 5 1 7 3 RUN THE TEST Use Run Run Test to start the test sequence If you are using manual flow control COMPASS will prompt you to adjust the gas flow for the given test point Flow will be set automatically if your test is using the Other Controller see Section 9 5 6 Generally the prover is bypassed while setting the flow Once you have allowed sufficient time for flow pressure and temperature to stabilize you can initiate the test point COMPASS will display the Test Message Press Start to begin flow averaging It is important the COMPASS averaging time and the prover stroke be synchronized Now you can initiate the stroke of your piston or bell prover Once the prover system begins taking data press the COMPASS Start Avg button Just prior to the completion of data taking by the prover press the Stop Avg button in COMPASS The goal is for COMPASS to take data for as long a period as possible but only during the actual measurement stroke of the prover 5 1 8 EXAMPLE 8 How do I set up to calibrate in units of mass flow a device that intrinsically measures volume flow and outputs proportionally to volume flow Some devices for example bell provers piston provers soap film meters turbine meters intrinsically measure volume flow and have an output that is proportional to volume flow However the ob
33. in the lt Set Units gt with the lt Set Unit Variable gt to create the final set command This command is sent as needed to control the flow Up to 10 commands can be issued as part of the target flow process Communications Action Button This feature can be used only when the Output Type is RS 232 or IEEE 488 Test Press this button to send the lt Initialization Commands and a single target flow When the option is first selected a dialog box prompts for the desired target flow A Spy Windows will display with the command response information used see Section 6 7 7 This feature is designed to provide on the spot troubleshooting of the remote command setup If a command is not properly entered or the response format is not correct the problem should be visible in the spy window Use the Remote Communications option for further troubleshooting see Section 13 Page 117 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 10 3 7 AUXILIARY The Setup Hardware Auxiliary tab is used to setup instruments to read and log data other than the data normally used by COMPASS f a device has the capability to output information that you would like to include in the Data File but COMPASS would not normally acquire lt Auxiliary Data Devices gt can be used to read it This might for example be DUT specific information such as valve voltage or internal temperature The information read using is log
34. many data cycles are stored in the selected Data File This selection is useful when comparing data from different test cycles For example a report template and corresponding report can be created that displays the errors of cycles 1 through 5 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 172 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 16 3 3 5 FORMAT PAGE SETUP Page Setup is provided to change the margins of the active document By default all page margins 0 5 inches on new documents Use the T and arrow keys to modify the page margins Each key press corresponds to a 0 1 inch margin increment in the direction of the arrow A margin value can also be entered manually Margin changes are not reflected on the active document The margin change is evident only after printing the file Margins Top 5 4 Bottom fos 3 Left 24 Right fos 3 Cancel Figure 97 Page Setup Screen 16 3 4 OPTIONS The Options menu is the only main menu that does not depend on the active document The options in this menu toggle the display state of the program s toolbars The Path function to set default file paths is also located here 16 34 1 OPTIONS TOOLBAR The Toolbar refers to the main toolbar containing shortcuts to many of the file options Selecting this item toggles the display state of the toolbar Refer to the sub sections of Section 16 for specific information on the functions acc
35. menu options Specifically when selecting a dat file to generate a report or selecting a rtf or tpl file to edit a report or report template Use the Shift and arrow keys to highlight the desired files within the Windows file selection tool when making a multi file selection The function that generated the file selection will act on all files selected For example generating reports starts with the selection of dat files Selecting several dat files in the file box generates a separate report for each file selected It is a short cut to selecting each file one at a time 16311 FILE EDIT REPORT This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Edit Report is used to edit an existing report Selecting this feature displays a standard Windows file selection tool set to the directory containing the data sub directories in which reports are stored The selected report file opens in the Editor where it can be edited as desired Use the File Save feature or the toolbar shortcut to save the file 163 2 FILE GENERATE REPORT This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Generate Report is used to create new test reports from Data Files dat and a template file tpl The first step is to select a Data File using the standard Windows file selection tool As previously described at the beginning of this section a single or multiple Data Files can be selected The COMPASS Report Editor merges the selected D
36. molbox display units of measure Grid Tab see Section 11 3 Customize the test Data Grid run screen Maintain Lists Tab see Section 11 4 Delete items from COMPASS s automated entry drop down lists Initialize Test Tab see Section 11 5 Set user preferences for steps to include or suppress during test initialization Run Test Tab see Section 11 6 Set user preferences affecting the run test portion of test execution End Test Tab see Section 11 7 Set user preferences affecting the end test portion of test execution Data File Tab see Section 11 8 Set user preferences affecting the Data File dat into which the data from a test run is logged Display Tab see Section 11 9 Set user preferences affecting the default display for each COMPASS run mode 11 2 molbox TAB The Tools Options molbox tab is used to set molbox specific options to avoid prompts for features that are not used and to customize molbox settings The purpose of the molbox tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 42 When selections are complete click OK to save changes 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 121 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual E OPTIONS molbox Grid Maintain Lists Initialize Test Run Test End Test Data File Display FEATURE Allow selection of gases for which the molbloc is not calibrated check box Enable MFC swi
37. optional text entry field Individual DUT Definitions only Process Gas required drop down list selection 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 16 DUT Definition Editor Header Tab Fields DESCRIPTION There are two types of DUT Definitions e Individual DUT Definitions are intended to define a specific individual DUT They include a unique DUT serial number and identification value This type of DUT Definition does not require new entries during test initialization see Section 7 2 1 5 DUT Profile Definitions are intended to define a general DUT type They do not include serial number and identification values DUT profiles are useful when several DUTs of a specific type will be tested Instead of creating multiple DUTs all differing by serial number and or identification only use a DUT profile This type of DUT Definition requires that the DUT be identified during test initialization see Section 7 2 1 5 One definition type must be selected Default is Individual DUT The DUT manufacturer is selected from the drop down list box The manufacturer selected along with the lt Process Gas gt and lt Calibration Gas gt determine the default DUT gas conversion lt K Factor gt Therefore the manufacturer is a required field Gas conversion factors often called K factors are used when a DUT cannot be tested with the gas with which it is normally operated K factor definition
38. see Section 6 5 1 However if a test ends automatically after the last point there is no opportunity to repeat points when the last point has completed This options determines whether COMPASS will pause to allow points to be repeated after the last point is complete or automatically end the test without pause There are three choices e Enable repeat for fixed time delay The test will pause for a fixed time delay after the last flow point is complete During the delay the Back Run Toolbar gt button remains active allowing points to be repeated This choice gives the possibility of repeating points after the last point is complete but also causes the test to continue automatically without operator intervention Prompt to repeat final point Systematically pauses the test at the end of each test cycle and prompts the user as to whether the last test point should be repeated This selection guarantees that the operator will consider whether to repeat points but it also prevents the test from completing automatically No final point verification The test will automatically conclude after the last point There is no opportunity to repeat points after the last point is complete Use this choice to prevent any delays or interruptions in the test sequence If checked COMPASS always prompts for test notes to be entered at the end of the test Uncheck this option to avoid the test notes prompt In this case no test notes can be include
39. uei un RE YR EISE a ENDING AUN ICA RR KR A Dc 19 4 DUT ERRORS 19 5 DENSITY CORRECTIONS 19 6 TOLERANCE bei incissssecccsanta sccstuccnccnsbsstinndacunsctunsassiadsiusucdassvauecdessauediguasvandsdecuatecuseguanaitegauauatatiddeannbanuta 19 7 19 8 LINEAR Y 19 9 HYSTERESIS 19 10 REPEATABILITY 19 11 7 7 193 19 12 FLOW UNIT 194 19 13 PRESSURE UNIT 200 19 14 WATER 200 TROUBLESHOOTING DU ER 203 203 0 207 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT 7 7 211 Page v 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual TABLES Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 COMPASS Version C
40. 63 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 8 2 CREATING DUT DEFINITIONS Open the DUT Definition Editor using the Setup DUT menu option Use the New DUT toolbar icon to create a new DUT Definition Set up the DUT as desired then press the Save icon to store the DUT information Any conflicts that exist will cause an error message to display Resolve the conflicts before re saving The Restore icon is nonfunctional for new DUTs see Section 8 5 1 The feature only restores to the last saved state Since new DUTs have not been saved there is nothing to restore If a DUT Definition exists that is similar to the one that will be created use the lt gt toolbar feature to create a new DUT with the same characteristics see Section 8 5 1 Then make the edits specific to the new DUT Don t forget to change the Record Label prior to saving 8 3 EDITING DUT DEFINITIONS DUTs can be edited whenever COMPASS is not in an active run mode Use the Setup DUT menu option to display the DUT Definition Editor Simply changing information in the DUT Definition Editor places the Editor in the edit mode No specific option must be selected to begin editing a DUT Definition Use the Save toolbar button to store the edits or press the Restore button to return the DUT to its original state 8 4 DUT DEFINITION SELECTOR The DUT Definition Selector is most frequently used to selec
41. A type of DUT Definition that is intended to define a specific DUT including its serial number and ID Individual DUT Definitions can only be used to test one specific DUT See also DUT Profile Page 207 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Jog Adjust flow slightly at a flow point prior to taking DUT and reference readings at the point Jog is most often used when testing visual output devices such as rotameters to set the flow so that the DUT indication is on the nominal flow point prior to taking data at the point COMPASS Test Definitions allows jog before dwell to be included in the test procedure A factor representing the relationship between the process gas and a surrogate gas for a DUT Also called gas conversion factor See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual K Section for additional information Leak Check A process in which a pressure is set in the test system and then allowed to evolve freely for 60 seconds The decay rate of the pressure over time is used as an indication of the leak present in the system COMPASS Test Definitions can include a leak test at the start of the test See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Leak Test Section Manual Flow Indicates in a Test Definition that the flow will not be controlled in response to remote Control commands sent by COMPASS When running a test COMPASS will therefore prompt the user to set the flow at each point
42. Configuration will be used to measure the DUT output This example requires that a molbox1 with the MFC control optional installed be selected as the Reference in the Hardware Configuration Update my existing DUT and Test Files to work with this version of COMPASS Select Tools File Upgrade Wizard see Section 2 3 3 Select the type of file to upgrade either DUT or Test File In either case you will be prompted to select whether you would like to convert all files in a directory or an individual file Choose the target directory or the target file s to convert The old file name will automatically be saved as the Record Label of the new DUT or Test Definition Import COMPASS Data Files into Excel From within Excel select File Open locate and select the Data File that you would like to import Excel will open the Text Import Wizard Select the Delimited option and the Next button Choose the semicolon delimiter or other selected delimiter see Section 12 and complete the action by pressing the Finish button Be careful that you do not overwrite your COMPASS Data File with an Excel written file it will no longer be compatible with COMPASS 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 12 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 5 APPLICATION EXAMPLES 5 1 OVERVIEW This section contains several generic application examples that cover many common COMPASS setups Using these examples and the How Do I tips in Section
43. DMM Example f IEZE 488Card National Instruments J Default DUTRS232Put cont Figure 9 Example 4 System Configuration Page 21 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 5 144 RUN THE TEST Now that the COMPASS System Configuration includes the hardware necessary to run the test use Run Run Test to start a test sequence COMPASS calculates two 2 flow data fields that are associated with the rotameter test The field that contains the flow that is generated using the measured gas pressure and temperature and the Square Root Density Correction is called Ref Q DUT Cond This is the flow rate that is in the DUT s units and corrected to what the Reference flow would be at the DUT s normal operating conditions The other flow value that COMPASS calculates is the Ref Q This is the Reference flow displayed in the DUT s flow units without any type of gas density correction Ref Q DUT Cond should always be used as the actual flow through the DUT and in evaluating its performance The data field DUT Q is the calculated value of flow derived by scaling the DUT Output Range to the DUT Flow Range It is calculated at each point assuming a linear output This is the value that is used to calculate percent errors either as a percent full scale or of reading 5 1 5 EXAMPLE 5 How do set up to calibrate a DUT that outputs volume or actual flow units su
44. DUT see Section 8 5 3 If the scale is marked in float position units the DUT Definition output range should be in the same units see Section 8 5 4 In either case when a test is run the actual gas conditions at the rotameter temperature and absolute pressure will need to be measured and supplied to COMPASS 5 14 1 DUT DEFINITION SETUP Select the Setup DUT Header tab and select the DUT s process gas see Section 8 5 2 Select the Setup DUT Correction tab and select the Square Root Gas Density Correction Type see Section 8 5 3 You must also enter the Temperature and Absolute Pressure for the DUT s Normal Operating Conditions The molecular mass or the specific gravity and the compressibility of the process gas must also be entered into COMPASS in this location If the DUT process gas is a gas that is supported by molbox these gas properties will be entered for you and cannot be edited Select the Setup DUT Range tab and select or create the DUT s Flow Range units these must be units of flow such as accm or sccm not scale indication such as mm or inches and enter its Flow Range see Section 8 5 4 Enter the DUT s Output Range units and enter its Output Range these can be units such as mm or in DUT Editor E DUT record label Example Rotameter D Viewing DUT 1 6 411 x Edting DUT e Header Correction Range Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set Fl
45. Options Grid Tab Selections FEATURE DESCRIPTION Available Contains an alphabetically sorted list of the columns not currently included in the columns Data Grid run screen Individual elements can be dragged and dropped onto the list box lt Columns in grid gt field Alternatively multiple columns can be selected and moved by using combinations of the shift arrow and control keys along with the shift right button gt gt gt gt gt gt Columns in grid These are the columns of data that will display in the Data Grid run screen when a list box test is running With the exception of the lt Point gt column all data columns can be added removed or arranged in any order Individual elements can be removed by dragging and dropping a selected item into the lt Available Columns gt field Alternatively multiple columns can be selected and moved by using combinations of the shift arrow and control keys along with the shift left button lt lt lt lt lt Sort the display by selecting an item then using the UP or DOWN arrow keys while holding the CTRL button Scroll to display When checked the current data point is automatically displayed in the Data Grid current data run screen when COMPASS is in the Run Test mode If the grid is scrolled point between points and a new point is taken the grid will automatically scroll to the bottom to display the new point The plot is also updated to force the displ
46. Output Units Voltage Communications Test Extra Commands Save Exit Figure 7 Example 2 DMM Setup Access the System Configuration using the Setup System menu see Section 10 2 Select this DMM as the DUT Output DMMs Click Close to store the configuration and return to the main program Page 19 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 5 1 3 3 RUN THE TEST Now that the COMPASS System Configuration includes the hardware necessary to run the test use Run Run Test to start a test sequence see Section 7 2 There is no interface selection required when setting up the DUT interface at the end of the test initialization COMPASS will step through the test point sequence gathering data from the molbox and the DUT 5 14 EXAMPLE 4 How do set up to calibrate a rotameter Typical rotameters variable area flowmeters have scale indications that are either in mass flow units sccm or slm for example or float position units such as mm inches Since there is no electronic output of the rotameter s flow indication the user must enter this value manually when a test is run If the rotameter s scale is marked in flow units or unitless divisions the reference pressure and temperature should also be marked on the scale or be listed in manufacturer literature These values must be entered into the DUT Definition as the Normal Operating Conditions of the
47. Page 90 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 9 5 6 CONTROL TAB The Test Definition Control tab is used to specify how flow will be controlled to set the flow to the test point values as well as for purging In the case of automated flow control lt Flow Regulation gt and lt Jog gt functions are provided to allow adjustments of the flow if desired The purpose of the Control tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided Table 29 Points Sequence Tare ai Leak Test Purge Data Flow Control 14 anual Y Controller N ag How beroe dwell Regulate Flow To Regulation Delay 5 nm Figure 52 Test Definition Editor Control Tab Page 91 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 29 Test Definition Editor Control Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Flow Control Determines how flow will be controlled to set flow during tests The choices are drop down list Manual Flow will be set manually by the operator not by a device that COMPASS can control remotely As a test is run the operator will be prompted to set the flow to the target value at each point Use this choice when a manual flow control system or an automated controller with which COMPASS cannot communicate remotely is being used DUT Flow will be set by the DUT The DUT is a flow controller and has been set up as a controller in t
48. Section 8 5 3 or an actual flow unit temperature is logged in the Data File regardless of this selection Page 95 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 9 5 10 AUXILIARY TAB The Test Definition Auxiliary tab is really an extension of the Data tab The options on the tab determines if Auxiliary data will be logged and which devices will be used Edits to the list of Auxiliary devices will impact the list of devices saved in a Test Definition see Section 10 3 7 Tare Control Leak Test Purge Data Auxiliary Read Auxiliary Data 1 molbox RE RE 2 PPCK For Pressure ONIy Prs 3 molbox RE 4 Manual Edit List Figure 56 Test Definition Editor Data Tab Table 33 Test Definition Editor Auxiliary Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Read Auxiliary When checked the output of the auxiliary data devices listed is logged in the Data data file during tests See Setup Hardware Auxiliary for details on how to heck b setup an Auxiliary Data device The output can be either text or numeric and a check box label can be associated with the output Up to 10 devices can be used at a time and any single device can be used multiple times Use the Edit List button to modify the list of devices The information logged is not used in calculations however it can be used in reports and is visible on the lt Run DUT gt run screen and
49. Test Definition Editor Toolbars 2 2424244 20424404 83 Test Definition Editor Test Points 4 240004 0 84 Test Definition Editor Points 86 Test Definition Editor Sequence 88 Test Definition Editor Tare enne 90 Test Definition Editor Control 91 Test Definition Editor Leak Test 93 Test Definition Editor Purge 94 Test Definition Editor Data 95 Test Definition Editor Data 96 Auxiliary Data Device Selector sessi nnne nennen 97 System Configuration 7 100 Hardware Definition Reference 105 Hardware Definition Edit References 105 Hardware Definition DMM 108 Hardware Definition Edit DMM gt 108 Hardware Definition Power Supply 111 Hardware Definition Edit Power Supply 112 Hardware Definition Controller 114 H
50. To test these interfaces check the lt RS232 Poll option When active this feature causes COMPASS to poll the selected RS 232 port and automatically log any response Polling will occur only after a command has been sent If no command has been sent press the Send button to begin polling After a command has been issued the selection can be toggled without any other required actions 5 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS Interface Setup Interface ns232 5232 Settings Command Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt M Com Port Send Only n Port Settings 2400 71 5232 Poll Insert Special Character Command m ze Figure 88 Remote Communications Tool Page 151 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 152 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 14 Toots FLow UNIT EDITOR 14 1 OVERVIEW Flow unit of measure selection is used in COMPASS DUT Definitions see Section 8 In all lists that allow the selection of a flow unit of measure there is an lt Edit Units gt option at the top of the list When Edit Units is selected the Flow Unit Editor is displayed In addition to this shortcut a direct link to the flow unit editor is available by selecting Tools Flow Unit Editor Flow units can be created edited and removed using this tool COMPASS supports the creation of new flow units of measure by allowing the selection of a
51. Uncheck this option to avoid a valve operation prompt at zero flow set points When checked this feature causes the lt Flow Control gt form to display prior to a leak test and when setting zero flow to allow the flow to be adjusted Some DUTs have a very small natural leak when closed As a result if setting zero flow an apparent flow is achieved by the leak through the DUT This leak can be present only when there is a differential pressure on the DUT To remove the differential pressure the DUTs internal valves can be opened up all the way to allow pressure equilibrium This feature should only be used when true manual isolation of flow is present Use this feature to force the calculation of DUT Set Error to be the same as the DUT Error at zero set points This allows the offset of the DUT Set Error to be logged at zero By default this feature is not checked Tests with zero set points with or without jogging and flow regulation will still force the new error calculation provided that the test defined set point is zero When using the RUN DUT option the error calculation is changed only when the actual set point is 0 flow When checked COMPASS multiplies manually entered reference flow values by the DUT s K Factor Use this option only when the value entered is not already K Factor corrected If the DUT does not use K Factor or the reference does require manual entry no action is taken regardless of the state of the check
52. Unit Base Unit Ref T Ref P Multiplier Min Qutput Max Output Output UNIT INSTRUMENTS 1660 esting Noe ID 3slm Demo 0 3 slm amp 0 00C slm 0 C 101 325 kPa 1 0 54 0 5 Process Gas Test Gas K factor Density Corr Normal Prs Normal Temp Pro Gas Molecular Mass Pro Gas Compressibility Attitude t N2 N271 U N A N A N ZA N A Standard 40 kPa 2 8 4 N 4 0 000Voltage Current Voltage Current 0 Pha Device Time Stab Time Time Set Pt RawRefQ Ref Q DUT 5 s ZDUTFS Cond slm 0 001 INN 1 23 Feb 00 14 08 38 1 2814E 05 0 61480 D E 23 Feb 00 14 09 17 4 B m 2 5160E 05 1 2072 12 23 Feb 00 14 10 28 T T 80 00 4 9767 05 2 3879 2 23 Feb 00 14 11 03 7 0 6 0 100 0 6 1992E 05 2 8744 2 6 PEN 23 Feb 00 14 11 47 OK 8 0 6 0 20 00 1 2676E 05 0 60820 D E 221 23Feb 00 14 12 25 OK 8 0 6 0 40 00 2 5165 05 1 2074 Figure 77 Data File Viewer 12 3 Data Print Test Data Data Print Test Data is used to print unformatted Data Files see Section 16 to create reports from Data Files When Data Print Test Data is selected a standard Windows file browser appears set to the default Data File directory see Section 18 3 Selecting a file causes the standard Windows print function to open allowing the file to be printed with any printer that is set up Data Files may also be printed from within View Test Data by clicking on the printer icon 12 4
53. User s Manual H DUT Editor x DUT record label Example Turbine Meter 5 Viewing DUT 6 al 2 m Header Correction Range Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set Flow Range Output Range EE Minimum 0 00 Unit X Maximum 100 Minimum o 00 Mani Set Range TENERE EFI gym 2000 the DUT a flow controller Resolution oo 7 Unit Nv 71 Minimum Maximum 11 Figure 10 Example 5 DUT Definition Select the Setup DUT Test tab and select the Calibration Gas that you will be using to test the DUT see Section 8 5 6 Select the Setup DUT Read tab and select the DUT Data Output Type see Section 8 5 8 This is Manual if the DUT output cannot be read automatically 5 1 5 2 TEST DEFINITION SETUP There is nothing out of the ordinary about setting up a test to test a DUT that outputs volume or actual flow units see Section 9 5 1 5 3 TEST HARDWARE SETUP The installation of a DUT that measures in volume or actual flow units should be made following the manufacturer s recommendations for straight piping lengths etc Precise volume or actual flow measurements cannot be made without the knowledge of the actual temperature and absolute pressure of the gas at the DUT during the test This information can be read automatically by COMPASS if the necessary Hardware Definitions are included in the System Configuration see Sections 10 3 4 10 2 If
54. When multiple test cycles are used the final statistics values determine statistics related to all data acquired during the test and not a single cycle User notes entered at the end of the test see Section 7 2 3 18 4 1 DATA FILE FIELDS Table 63 identifies and provides information on the data fields logged by COMPASS for each point of a test run Any or all of the fields can be included in the Data Grid run screen see Section 6 7 5 Including or excluding columns or changing their order in the Data Grid run screen has no effect on the Data File fields content or order Table 63 Data File Grid Run Screen Fields Columns FEATURE DESCRIPTION The current test point in a test see Section 9 5 2 The format is Cycle Point Reading This is the only column value that cannot be moved It must always be the first data column The date the point was taken The current medium date format setup in the International section of the windows control panel is used to format this date value Time the point was taken The value is formatted as hh mm ss Page 183 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 55 for molbox User s Manual Character display representing the status of the point taken Many combinations of these values may exist for any given point The definitions of the characters are OK Flow was stable and within tolerance see Sections 8 5 5 9 5 4 T Error was beyond the DUT specified toleranc
55. and uncertainty are the responsibility of the DUT manufacturer see Section 15 1 and the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual K Section If the desired manufacturer is NOT in the list of manufacturers then the Process Gas Editor gt can be used to add this manufacturer and the allowable process gases and associated K factors see Section 15 The Tools menu contains a link to the lt Process Gas Editor gt Alternatively a new manufacturer can be entered manually by choosing the lt Add Manufacturers option at the beginning of the list Manually entered manufacturers are automatically added to the drop down list alphabetically Use the Tools Options Maintain Lists tab to delete unwanted manufacturers added in this fashion see Section 11 4 NOTE Manually added manufacturers do not contain K factor information as do manufacturers added with the lt Process Gas Editor gt As a result the lt K Factor gt field does not automatically refresh with each new lt Process Gas gt and lt Calibration Gas gt selection Manually added manufacturers are typically used with DUTs that do not use K factors The default Data File directory naming preference can use this entry to create the directory for Data Files created when this DUT is run see Section 11 8 The model number or name for the DUT can be selected from the drop down list or a new model can be entered manually Manually entered models are automatically added to the drop
56. any translation can be made Use dimensional analysis to determine the required multiplier to create the new flow unit Make sure the unit is appropriately named Page 155 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 14 3 UNIT CONVERTER A general unit conversion tool is available in the Tools Unit Converter menu This tool allows the conversion of pressure temperature and flow from one unit to another This tool is useful when defining ranges or when trying to analyze data in units not reported When using the tool enter numeric values with appropriate resolution The calculated values always display with resolution based on the resolution of the original input This can be confusing if a small quantity unit is converted to a large quantity unit For example if Pa Pascal pressure units are converted to MPa Mega Pascal entering 1 Pa will yield 0 0 MPa To see the actual value enter the Pa value with more resolution 1 00000 or 1e5 Table 56 describes the fields and function of the Unit Converter The resolution of any value entered in the Unit Converter to determines the resolution of the corresponding calculated value To obtain more resolution in the output use more resolution in the input Unit Conversions Ea Pressure Units Current Pressure 1 0000 Calculated Pressure EIE MPa Temperature Units Current Temperature c Calculated Temperature LEN F
57. be readjusted to get closer to the target value Setting this value to a time value that is too short relative to the response time of the flow system will result in unstable flow control 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 92 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 9 5 7 LEAK TEST TAB The Test Definition Leak Test tab is used to specify whether a leak test will be run at the beginning of the test see Section 7 1 and or after molbloc changes The leak test used is the SYSTEM leak test function see the molbox Operation and Maintenance manual Leak Test Section The purpose of the Leak Test tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 30 Points Sequence Tare Control fL 1 Purge Data System leak test Leak test after molbloc change Abort test on failure Figure 53 Test Definition Editor Leak Test Tab Table 30 Test Definition Editor Leak Test Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION System leak Check this box to include a leak test at the beginning of the test If a leak test is test run results are included in the test s Data File Use the lt Abort test on failure gt check box to cause the test to abort after a leak test failure Do not check this box if you want the test to continue after a failed leak test Leak test after Check this box for a leak test to be run after any molbloc change included in the test molbloc poi
58. become available in the appropriate lists when a molbox is selected as the flow reference The System Configuration screen s Hardware Definition selection categories as well as instructions on how to use them are covered in Table 34 If a molbox is selected as the lt Flow Reference gt Reference molbox will be an option in all analog power and measurement lists If the molbox does not include the MFC control option do not select Reference molbox from any of these lists COMPASS will generate an error during run mode initialization if Reference molbox is selected for an electrical function but the molbox does not have the MFC control option Only molbox1 can have an onboard MFC control option z System Config Reference COM4s x DUT Output DMM HP34401 1111 EX DMM Set point power supply Reference mobos v Setpoint DMM 1111 DMM Frequency Measurement Pressure Measurement Manual Temperature Measurement Manual IEEE 488 Card National Instruments Device Net Card ational Instruments hd Default DUT RS232 cons OK Cancel Figure 58 lt System Configuration gt Screen Use the delete or backspace key to remove a selection in any of the drop down lists 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 100 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE Flow Reference drop down list selection DUT Output DMM
59. calibration the flow is adjusted so that the DUT output is on a cardinal point If DUT output pressure and temperature entries are set up for manual entry COMPASS will prompt you to enter them at the appropriate times during the test Be sure to enter these values in the units requested These units can be changed using Tools Options Run Test tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 28 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 6 MAIN SCREEN 6 1 OVERVIEW The main screen contains the interface between the program setup and all of the data acquisition run screens When COMPASS is first started up the main screen displays without any child windows Only after a menu option is selected does the screen update to display the corresponding window The following features are available on the main screen e Main menu bar to access all COMPASS menus and functions see Section 6 2 e Status bar at the bottom of the screen that contains information on the current point in a test and the status of an operation see Section 6 3 Run mode display to indicate the current COMPASS run mode see Section 6 4 e Run toolbar that provides quick access to runtime program displays and functions see Section 6 5 e Control toolbar that is available on the left of the main screen only in Run DUT and Run molbox modes see Section 6 6 e Several individual run screens that are available when running to provide real time data acquisition info
60. change the position of the Selected Devices Double click a Selected Device to remove it from the list DK Cancel Figure 57 Auxiliary Data Device Selector Page 97 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 98 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 10 Setup SvsrEMI SETUP HARDWARE 10 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS s System Configuration specifies the data acquisition and control hardware that COMPASS uses to accomplish specific data acquisition and control tasks The System Configuration is created using Setup System to select Hardware Definitions for each specific task Hardware Definitions are created using Setup Hardware Hardware Definitions define each individual hardware component that is available to be included in the System Configuration They include information to identify the component and to allow COMPASS to communicate with it When COMPASS is in a run mode for data acquisition or control task it attempts to use the hardware specified in the System Configuration If COMPASS cannot communicate with a hardware item an error occurs To correct this error the Hardware Definition for that item must be adjusted or a different Hardware Definition must be selected to include in the System Configuration The System Configuration Hardware Definition approach allows all the hardware available to COMPASS to be set up at one time in a
61. checked the DUT output is read during the test and logged in the Data File If not checked no prompts for DUT output will occur regardless of the DUT lt Output Type gt see Section 8 5 4 Note that no DUT flow will be determined therefore no flow errors will be available on the lt DUT Ref Comparison gt window This impacts reporting and plotting functions as well Uncheck this option only when DUT flow information is not desired When checked the DUT lt Measured Set Point gt is read and logged during the test This applies only to DUTs that are set up as a controller using lt Voltage Current gt lt Set Point Type gt see Sections 8 5 4 8 5 9 All set errors will be based on this measured value If the value is not checked set errors are based on the nominal test set point lf a remote When checked DUT pressure is read and logged during a test pressure device is set up in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 the pressure is logged automatically Otherwise manual entry of pressure is required If the DUT uses a density correction see Section 8 5 3 or an actual flow unit pressure is logged in the Data File regardless of this selection When checked DUT temperature is read and logged during a test If a remote temperature device is set up in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 the temperature is logged automatically Otherwise manual entry of temperature is required If the DUT uses a density correction see
62. e eta eit e np dun 25 30 stare molboxs Panel ete e 34 Toggle molbox drivers 36 Flow Conditions 36 lt U its gt 37 Flow Controls Panel note aae ade te deae v ada d 38 Single Point Average gt 40 Auto Point Average gt 41 DUT Reference Comparison Run 42 molbox Output Run Screen 000000000 nennen enne nennen nnne enne 44 lt DUT Outputs RUM Screen cine ce Eee tn ascetur e LE 45 Average Flow Data Run Screen ssssssssssssssssseee enne enne nennen nnns 46 Data Grid Run 5 48 Data Plots Run Screen 48 Spy Windows 20 eene 49 Select molbloc 53 Selection Tool en re e Fete ene M e RR Fe d Ea nna 53 DUT Selector In DUT Definition Editor sess 54 Select Tests 0 54 Test Selector In Test Definition Editor essen 55 Setup DUT ID Interface Panel nennen nnne nnne nennen neis 56 Manual DUT Data Entry 59 Test Complete Paneli
63. flow unit The DUT flow is calculated by first determining the percentage of the current output value relative to the DUT output span and then applying this percentage to the DUT flow span see Sections 8 5 4 8 5 8 for information on DUT output and flow spans This calculation is used regardless of the state of the DUT s Density Correction selection see Section 8 5 3 The density correction is applied to the reference flow see Section 19 5 Oo 1 x Da Proportion of the DUT span output based on the measured DUT output Ou Current DUT output value DUT minimum output defined by the DUT Definition Da DUT output span as determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum outputs in the DUT Definition DUT flow range span as determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum flow output values in the DUT Definition DUT minimum flow output defined in the DUT Definition Calculated DUT flow in the DUT s flow range units 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 187 55 for molbox User s Manual 19 3 DUT SET POINTS DUT set points are determined in almost the exact opposite manner as the DUT flow described in Section 19 2 The percentage of the DUT flow range relative to the span is used to determine the DUT output see Sections 8 5 4 8 5 8 for information on DUT output and flow spans This percentage is then applied to th
64. flow unit is saved The toolbar at the top of the editor provides option buttons to save an edited flow unit create a new flow unit restore an edited flow unit or delete an existing flow unit The icon representations of these buttons are common to other COMPASS editors When creating a new flow unit of measure always start by selecting a Base Unit If a standard volumetrically based mass flow unit is selected sccm slm etc entries for the Reference Temperature and Reference Pressure are provided Change the dimensions of a flow unit by creating a User Defined Unit then applying a multiplier to change the unit Table 55 provides information on the fields and functions of the Flow Unit Editor The flow units kg s mg s and mols s should never be deleted or modified COMPASS must use the flow units in their raw form to read flow data from the molbox See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Section for additional information on flow unit types and units of measure Flow Unit Setup 3 x x Flow Unit NN User defined flow unit Base Unit ms Reference Temperature NA g Reference Pressure NA Unit Multiplier 60 Figure 89 Flow Unit Editor gt Panel 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 154 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE Flow Unit drop down list box User defined flow unit check box Base Unit drop
65. frequency pressure or temperature device specifies the unit of measure in which the device output is returned These setups only store one set of commands for the units selected The lt Initialization Commands and or Read Commands specified are the commands for reading the device output in the specified output units COMPASS always reads in these units and performs the necessary calculations to convert to the units required by the DUT or Test Definition when necessary Initialization Click this button to display the lt Remote Command Editor gt form see Section Commands 13 2 1 Enter the desired commands then close the form These commands are issued during the initialization process if required by the selected device Each device may or may not require a specific initialization Refer to the device s remote interface manual to determine whether initialization commands are necessary Some devices may require a unit of measure and range selection before being used If this is the case and the device has the necessary commands to complete this task enter the commands in the remote command Editor action button Read Click this button to display the Remote Command Editor gt form see Section Commands 13 2 2 Enter the desired read commands then close the form These commands are continuously sent to the device in all run modes if selected in the System Configuration and required by the DUT or Test Definition Up t
66. function In many cases multi command sets not needed COMPASS s highly versatile command structuring support and the near universality of RS 232 and or IEEE 488 interfaces on today s computers and test instruments make it possible to use just about any test instrument with remote communications capability with COMPASS There are two main interface types set up in COMPASS Read interfaces are used when COMPASS must acquire data from a device such as a digital multimeter used to read a DUT s output Set interfaces are used to send flow setting commands directly to a flow controlling device or a programmable power supply Each of these main interface types usually include two command sets a the initialization to prepare to the device to set or read properly not needed in all cases but indispensable in some and b the actual read or set instructions Read interfaces must always be set up so that the device responds in a specific preplanned measurement unit set interfaces must be structured to include a variable which is the numerical value of the set target since the target value changes at different points in a test Most devices that support remote interfacing use a common text command and response format Typically commands are word fragments that resemble the function of the command Responses to numerical query commands frequently output as a direct numerical value or a condensed string with the number embedded Some instruments requi
67. gt pop up appears to allow changing interface settings of DUT communications parameters if the DUT uses an RS 232 or IEEE 488 interface see Section 7 2 1 5 check box Unchecking this selection only has an affect if the DUT Definition is a DUT Profile i e not an Individual DUT type see Section 8 5 2 DUT Profiles require Setup DUT ID Interface for identification of the DUT being run Select enter user If checked the user is prompted to enter his her name or select it from the name drop down user name list see Section 7 2 1 6 This name appears under user in the test Data File and in reports If unchecked the most recently used name is automatically selected as the user for the current test Unchecking this prompt is useful for single user systems and can even be done after the first run of the day for a specific operator check box Page 127 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 11 6 RUN TEST TAB The Tools Options Run Test tab is used to set user preferences affecting the run test part of test execution see Section 7 2 2 Various aspects of run test behavior can be changed using this feature The purpose of the Run Test tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 46 The Manual P and T Entry Method panel is detailed in Table 47 When selections are complete click OK to save changes molbox Grid
68. in DUT Definitions DUT Definition The record in the DUT database in which COMPASS stores DUT information Defines the DUTs that are tested by COMPASS DUT Profile A type of DUT Definition that is intended to define a tyoe of DUT This is a generic definition that does not include serial number or ID Can be used to test any DUT of a specific type See also Individual DUT DUT Tolerance The performance limit of a DUT expressed in terms of maximum allowable disagreement with the flow reference DUT tolerance may be expressed in flow units as of DUT FS as a of reading or as a combination A waiting period at a flow point between the time the flow has been set and stabilized and the start of data acquisition to take the DUT and reference readings at the flow point The disagreement between the DUT indication and the flow measured by the reference at a flow point The error is always calculated using DUT reference Abbreviation of full scale The full scale value is the maximum value or the span of a measurement range Limits and specifications are often expressed as FS Hardware Definition The record in the hardware database of a specific hardware item available for use by COMPASS The Hardware Definition defines the piece of hardware including manufacturer serial number ID and interfacing details Hardware Definitions are selected to put together the System Configuration that COMPASS uses to run tests Individual DUT
69. is a more advanced report feature that should only be used after the report generation process is thoroughly understood It is a much simpler task to edit an existing template and save that template with a different file name see Section 16 5 1 5 Try editing one of the sample templates provided with COMPASS before creating a new report from scratch 16 3 15 FILE SAVE This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Save acts on the current top file in the Report Editor If the current top file has previously been named the name of the file appears in the title bar of the text window Choosing Save in this case saves the current contents of the window to the current file name without further prompts Files that have not previously been saved display lt Untitled gt in their window caption Saving these files generates a prompt for the entry of the path and file name of the file to save By default the file path in the Options Path preference determines the file path see Section 16 3 4 4 If you wish to save the file in another location do so realizing that the COMPASS Report Editor will no longer know the location of the file unless the default path is also changed to reflect the new location 16 3 16 FILE SAVE AS Save As is used to save the current top file with a different name essentially making a copy of the file The option always displays a file selection box allowing the entry of a new file name a
70. is an application designed for Windows 32 bit operating systems This includes Windows 95 98 and NT Although any computer running one of these operating systems has the basic requirements to run COMPASS it is recommended that the following minimum configuration be used e Windows 95 98 or NT e 200 MHz Pentium processor e 32MBRAM e 10 MB free hard disk space 2 3 INSTALLING COMPASS FOR molbox Insert the COMPASS for molbox CD into the CD drive If the auto run feature is enabled on the PC the setup application runs automatically If the setup program does not run after 10 seconds press the Windows Start button and select Run e In the Run dialog box type d setup or f setup depending on the drive letter of the CD drive of the installation disk Select COMPASS for molbox from the list of applications and follow the installation prompts to install the program 2 3 L111 OR 9 Insert the COMPASS for molbox CD into the CD drive e Use the Add Remove Programs feature in the Windows Control Panel Press the Windows Start button and select Settings followed by Control Panel e Double click the Add Remove Programs icon and click the Install button Follow the prompts to install COMPASS Select COMPASS for molbox from the list of applications and follow the installation prompts to install the program 2 3 2 UPGRADING FROM VERSIONS LOWER THAN 4 00 During the installation process choose the directory of any exis
71. is not necessary simply uncheck all options and press OK to close the display and complete the initialization After initialization COMPASS automatically displays the lt molbox Output gt and Average run screens see Sections 6 7 2 6 7 4 If any support device was selected for output the DUT Output window can be accessed to view the output of the devices Although no DUT is specifically setup with this run mode the support device data still displays on the DUT Output window 5 Run Mode Data Selector lt Data amp usiiary Read DUT utut Read Set Cancel Read Pressure ERN Figure 36 Run Mode Data Selector Form Some Control Toolbar options will not be available for every molbox reference In particular molboxes that do not have the MFC control option cannot use the Flow Control feature molboxes running embedded software lower than Ver 4 00 cannot use the lt Purge gt or Leak Test functions PAN Using any of the Control Toolbar automatic data logging options can result in very large data files These are files with significantly greater than 1000 data pointe COMPASS was not intended to manipulate such files Lower performance PC s will experience significant delays in generating reports and plots of such data files Therefore it is not recommended to use the plotting and reporting functions with very large data files Instead export the data file to a spread sheet app
72. lt RS232 gt and lt IEEE 488 gt To set up the device for remote communications select the interface that is on the device When an interface type is selected the rest of the lt Remote Interface gt and lt Command Information gt panels change as appropriate to accommodate definition of the interface characteristics A remote interface selection is required COMPASS generates an error when None is selected See Section 13 for information on COMPASS remote communications If the remote interface selection is RS 232 the lt RS232 Settings information is shown When creating a new device the settings are loaded with COMPASS default settings Port settings are listed baud rate parity data bits stop bits Clicking on any setting field causes the lt RS232 Settings Editor to appear see Section 13 3 1 Select the correct settings for the device and click OK when ready If the remote interface selection is IEEE 488 the lt IEEE 488 Address gt entry field is shown When creating a new Definition the IEEE 488 address is set to the default address 10 The address can be edited directly in the entry field Page 109 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE DESCRIPTION Output Units For a DMM indicates whether the Read Commands are for reading voltage V or current A DMMs save both voltage and current commands in a single drop down r selection list DMM profile For a
73. numerical set point in the Set Units with the Set Unit Variable to create the final set command This command is sent as needed to control the flow when tests are run Up to 10 commands can be issued as part of the set flow process Page 113 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE DESCRIPTION Communications This feature can be used only when the lt Output Type gt is RS 232 or IEEE 488 Test Press this button to send the set lt Initialization Commands gt and a single target flow action button When the option is first selected a dialog box prompts for the desired target flow A lt Spy Window gt will display with the command response information used see Section 6 7 7 This feature is designed to provide on the spot troubleshooting of the remote command setup If a command is not properly entered or the response format is not correct the problem should be visible in the spy window Use the Remote Communications tool for further troubleshooting see Section 13 10 3 6 FLOW CONTROLLER TAB The Setup Hardware Controller tab is used to manage the Hardware Definitions of flow controllers that are included in the Test Definition Control tab Controller drop down list See Section 10 2 The Controller tab provides a list of the available flow controllers displays complete information on the selected controller allows the controller to be edited or a n
74. of the window Press lt Select gt to select the current DUT or press lt Cancel gt to return to the DUT Definition Editor The DUT Definition Editor has a scroll feature allowing DUTs to be selected by scrolling see Section 8 5 1 The ordering of the scrolled DUTs is determined by the last sort order in the DUT Selector 97 edited DUT Definition displays in blue text in the DUT Selector 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 64 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 46 DUT Selection Tool molbloc 1456 RFM molbloc 5 1 1782 Example V DUT Use Flow Controlle RO G1 1971 1205 Example Rotameter BB2000 1993 1994 5232 DUT DH Instruments molbox 1 256 molbloc 1337 molbox molbloc GENERIC 4414 XJ772 Example m4 DUT 44 Bulbco Instruments F184 N N Example V MFM GENERIC 5 8 Manual V DUT Record Label Use Flow Controller Search by Serial Number Geach Search fos 7 st Figure 37 DUT Selection Tool 8 5 DUT DEFINITION EDITOR All DUT Definitions are created or edited using the DUT Definition Editor The Editor also acts as a viewer in other COMPASS functions When editing a DUT verify that each Editor tab contains the proper information This will help to avoid conflicts when using the DUT Definition in a COMPASS run mode Refer to Sections 8 5 1 through 8 5 9 for detailed information on the features and entry fields of the DUT Definition
75. original molbloc Apply water ratio The water ratio selection effects the flow of sonic nozzles only when Air is used as drop down list the calibration gas In all other situations the water ratio selection is ignored Refer box to the molbox operation and maintenance manual for details on the water ratio The choices are e Set to 0 COMPASS automatically sets the water ratio in the molbox to 0 This option is recommended only if a water ratio value is not used in the molbox e Use active molbox value The water ratio value in the molbox is used COMPASS does not change this value e Prompt for new value The Calculate Water Ratio form displays and allows a new water ration to be determined based on the entered ambient pressure ambient temperature and ambient humidity Sonic nozzle The value entered represents the leak rate limit of a molblocS based leak test leak rate limt The number represents the maximum percentage change in the starting upstream Start molbloc pressure over the 60s leak test interval A leak test executed with a numeric entry reference other than a molblocS ignores this selection Default absolute Determines the molbox pressure unit of measure to use in Run DUT and Run pressure unit Test run modes when the DUT does not require a density correction see Section 8 5 3 If the DUT does use a density correction the molbox pressure unit is set to drop down list the DUT s normal o
76. remainder of the data acquisition options are enabled To take a point simply choose the appropriate icon Points can be taken individually averaged individually automatically and averaged automatically When the run mode is ended or a new data file is created all of the lt End Test gt and lt Data File gt options see Sections 0 and 11 8 are enforced Page 39 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual When a data file is created in Run DUT and Run molbox run modes data points can be taken without the constraints of a test The resultant data file is identical to files generated with the Run Test option Therefore reports and plots can be created from the data file Using any of the lt Control Toolbar gt automatic data logging options can result in very large data files These are files with significantly greater than 1000 data points COMPASS was not intended to manipulate such files Lower performance PC s will experience significant delays in generating reporte and plots of such data files Therefore it is not recommended to use the plotting and reporting functions with very large data files Instead export the data file to a spread sheet application for further analysis Table 8 describes each of the data acquisition toolbar options in detail Table 8 lt Control Toolbar gt Data Acquisition Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Create Data File Press this button to create a new data file
77. s communications for troubleshooting communications problems and determining the appropriate 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 150 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual commands to send prior to entering command information into any of the Command Editors If a command issued to a device does not give the desired results refer to the device documentation for information Tools Remote Communications allows the desired interface type to be selected and interface parameters to be specified IEEE 488 communication assumes the computer is using the IEEE 488 card selected in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 Enter the command to be sent in the command field Clicking Send causes the command to be sent using the current Interface Setup Results and return strings are displayed in the Last Command Reply box These return strings are logged as read and unmodified by COMPASS The communications time out is fixed at 10 seconds A time out is indicated by displaying lt COMPASS Time Out gt If the command does not have a response or the target communications device does not normally respond to commands click the Send Only check box or COMPASS will expect a response and time out if none is received Commands sent are automatically added to the drop down Command list the list is cleared each time COMPASS is rebooted Some RS 232 instruments automatically output data without requiring a command response pair
78. test without a DUT and a fixed sequence All operations available in the test are available on the lt Control Toolbar gt Use the toolbar to change molbox settings purge leak check and tare as desired Use the data acquisition lt Control Toolbar gt options to create a test data file and log test data see Section 6 6 10 Provided that a molbox is properly interfaced with the PC and is selected in the System Configuration as the flow reference the only initialization step for this run mode is to select the data acquisition options to use in addition to the molbox A dialog display Figure 36 similar to the lt Data gt and lt Auxiliary gt options of the Test Definition allows selection of what data to log see Sections 9 5 9 and 9 5 10 Pressure temperature and auxiliary data can be logged if desired The pressure and temperature devices to use must be specified in the System Configuration If no device is selected the Control Toolbar gt Enter Flow Data option will be available for manual entry of the pressure and or temperature outputs The output of the selected support devices can be logged to the data file in the 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 60 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H same fashion as a test if any of the lt Control Toolbar gt data acquisition options are used When a point is taken all averaging and manual entry options follow the same rules as when a test is executed If support instrument data
79. the lt DUT gt run screen A fixed 2s delay occurs after each jog step This prevents repeated jog steps from piling up in the buffer and causing erratic behavior The jog function is the only flow control feature that does not require confirmation using the lt Activate Change gt button Use the jog function when testing or testing DUTs for which you would like to adjust the flow so the DUT indicates a cardinal point action button 6 6 9 ENTER FLOW DATA The flow entry function is represented by the toolbar icon V This function is available in Run DUT mode for DUTs that cannot be read remotely so their output must be entered manually The entry could be the DUT output current pressure or current temperature The value entered is used to calculate the DUT flow so that error information is available on the DUT Reference Comparison run screen The values entered remain constant until a new value is entered All entries must in the units specified next to the entry label Failure to enter values in the current units will result in erroneous DUT information 6 6 10 DATA ACQUISITION TOOLS In Run molbox and Run DUT run modes data can be acquired based on the selection of the data acquisition options on the lt Control Toolbar gt The first requirement is to open a data file by using the Create data file function After the file is selected the data grid will display in place of the lt Average Data gt window and the
80. the DUT Definition Editor are considered part of the toolbar The toolbar not only identifies which Definition is active but also provides tools to create delete save restore identify and select DUT Definitions Table 15 identifies the toolbar features and their functions DUT Editor E DUT record label 5232 Set Test ViewingDUT 9 10 341 Js Editing DUT e Figure 38 DUT Definition Editor Toolbar Table 15 DUT Definition Editor Toolbar Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION DUT record label This field is analogous to a file name The text entered should make the DUT easily distinguishable from other DUTs Up to 40 characters can be entered the label required text entry In some cases it may be useful to set up a single DUT more than one time for example field if the DUT supports multiple gases In this case a proper use of this field would be to include the mention of the calibration or process gas as part of the record label PAN Do not use the following characters in the DUT record label V lt gt comma or tab character These charactere will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 11 8 Viewing DUT Identifies the current relative sort position of the DUT in the Editor As the sort order changes this field also changes se
81. the fields come up populated with the information on that device When editing is complete click lt OK gt to save changes The molbox MFC control option acts as a Power Supply however it does not need to be set up under the Power Supply tab In the System Configuration when a molbox is selected as the lt Flow Reference gt lt Reference molbox gt is automatically included as a choice in the lt Setpoint Power Supply field see Section 10 2 Reference DMM Power Supply Frequency Pressure Temperature Flow Controller IEEE 488 List 1 r Information Manufacturer Hewlett Packard 000 Model SerialNumber 12000 Identification Calibration Date esM x Dy d DJ Interface R5232 Interface Set Units l Voltage Mode x 95232 Port 1 Initialization Commands X 5232 Settings 2400 E 7 1 Set Commands 5vour44 Figure 63 Hardware Definition Power Supply Tab Page 111 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Edit Power Supply Header Manufacturer Hewlett Packard 0707070007 Model SerialNumber 32 Identification 00 CaibtionDae 0000 Interface Set Units 5232 rive 5232 Port 1 Initialization Commands 5232 Settings 24008 7 1 Set Commands Communications Test Figure 64 Hardware Definition lt Edit Power Supply gt Panel Table 38 Hardware Definition
82. the flow in the normal operating conditions so any actual flow unit conversion must assume that these are the actual conditions Gas density corrections always use the reference flow converted to mg s The density correction ratio is applied to this value to get the corrected DUT flow in mg s The flow is then converted from mg s to the flow unit to define the DUT s corrected flow under it s normal operating conditions The equations below detail the two density correction types VARIABLE DESCRIPTION Gas density The subscript op specifies under normal operating pressure and temperature and now specifies the current conditions Molecular mass of the gas in g mol Absolute gas pressure in Pascal Q cond2 Reference mass flow in the DUT s normal operating conditions determined using the square root density correction This value must be converted from the reference mass flow unit to the DUTs flow unit Q cond1 Reference mass flow in the DUT s normal operating conditions determined using the proportional density correction This value must be converted from the reference mass flow unit to the DUTs flow unit 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 190 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 19 6 TOLERANCE The determination of whether a point is in or out of tolerance depends on the type of tolerance selected and the DUT and reference flows Tolerance values may be specified in multiple
83. to open the Hardware Definition screen see Section 10 3 3 Select the Reference tab and check to see if the desired molbox is already in the list If so verify that the remote settings are correct and close the display Otherwise press New to create a new reference see Section 10 3 3 Select DH Instruments as the manufacturer and molbox1 or RFM as the model reference Then enter all other support information For this example the molbox will use an IEEE 488 interface The IEEE 488 address of the molbox can be determined using the molbox s front panel Special key see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual In this example 10 is used Press lt OK gt to save this Reference Definition Page 15 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Edit Reference Header Manufacturer DH Instruments Inc Model Serial Number Identification Calibration Date Interface R5232 71 No command setup RS232Pot 1 RS232 Settings 2400 E 7 1 Save Exit Figure 3 Example 1 molbox1 Reference Setup Now that the molbox is set up it must be selected in the System Configuration Select Setup System from the main menu see Section 10 2 This form is the only place the hardware to be used by COMPASS is specified Setup Hardware creates Hardware Definitions which are lists of supported devices that can be selected to create the current System Configuration Select the mol
84. to the reference flow to correct the reference flow to the DUT s normal operating conditions The DUT flow is still determined by the output to flow relationship setup on the Range tab Refer to the calculations in Section 19 5 for detail on how the density correction is applied None No density correction is applied Entry in all other fields of this folder is disabled This is the normal selection for thermal mass flow controllers and meters MFCs MFMs This should be the selection for any DUT for which it is not explicitly known that a proportional or square root gas density correction is appropriate Proportional The ratio of the current gas density to the normal operating gas density is used to determine the reference flow in the DUT s normal operating conditions This type of correction is also used to determine actual or volumetric flow Turbine meters that output volume flow typically use this type of correction All fields in this tab require an entry when proportional is selected Square Root The square root of the ratio of the current gas density to the normal operating density is used to determine the reference flow in the DUT s normal operating conditions Variable area style flow meters rotameters typically use this type of correction All fields on this tab require an entry when square root is selected The normal operating pressure of the DUT This value is provided by the DUT manufacturer It may be marked on th
85. value is converted to DUTFS for reporting The calculation described below determines the value in the DUT s flow unit of measure The measurement uncertainty equation is described below A full description and analysis of each of the measurement uncertainty components is beyond the scope of this manual see ISO TAG 4WQGS3 Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty Measurement COMPASS determines measurement uncertainty for each test cycle individually as well as for all test data combined The complete test data determination is found in the final statistics section of the data file 2 2 E U U 2 5 resolution 4 std DUT EstEi 2 193 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual VARIABLE DESCRIPTION Calculated DUT measurement uncertainty expressed as a value in DUT flow units using a coverage factor of 2 The value is reported as DUTFS by dividing by the DUT s span and multiplying by 100 Standard estimate of error for a first order linear regression This ESETE value combines linearity hysteresis and repeatability The value is the standard deviation of the error from a linear fit Specified DUT resolution This value is determined by the resolution selection in the DUT Definition resolution U p Uncertainty of the reference as specified in the reference hardware 2 definition The value is converted to the DUT s flow unit of measure for the calculation 1
86. 116 Hardware Definition Edit Controller Screen 5 117 Auxiliary Definition Edit Controller Screen 5 119 Options molbox Tab 122 Options Grid Tab 125 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page vi COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Options Maintain Lists Tab 126 Options Initialize Test Tab 127 Options Run Test Tab 128 Options Run Test Tab Manual DUT P and T Entry Method Fields 130 Options End Test Tab 131 Options Data File Tab 132 Options Display 0 135 Data 140 Plot Properties General Tab 141 Plot Properties Best Fit Tab
87. 16 DATA REPORT EDITOR 16 1 OVERVIEW The purpose of the COMPASS Report Editor is to generate test reports from Data Files dat view the reports edit and print them The Report Editor is a separate application installed when COMPASS is installed The COMPASS Report Editor can be accessed in three ways using the Data Report Editor menu option pressing the lt Generate Report gt button in the Test Complete screen after a test has concluded see Section 7 2 3 from outside COMPASS by clicking the associated icon in the COMPASS for molbox program group In all cases the report editor runs as a stand alone application and can be opened or closed at any time without affecting COMPASS 16 2 REPORT PRINCIPLES The COMPASS Report Editor is used to create templates rtf tpl files that are merged with Date Files dat see Section 16 to generate a report Several report templates can be created to have custom reports to support a variety of report styles All basic word processing features are included to allow custom formatting cut and paste ability changing font types and point size inserting objects etc Several reports and templates can be viewed edited saved or printed within the report editor at the same time Only the top most file displayed within the COMPASS Report Editor is acted by the tool bar and menu selections unless the selection specifically refers to AI The Option functions are not file specific
88. 2 lt 5 SPECIAL CHARACTER Use the Insert Special Character gt button the event a nonprintable ASCII character is a required part of the remote command When activated the ASCII Characters window displays Select Hex to select the character using the hexadecimal value or Decimal to select based on the decimal value Most non printable characters will display as a square printable characters will display as their actual ASCII values Scroll to the desired character then press the Insert button The cursor will turn into a pencil that should be used to point to the location in which the character should be inserted Move the cursor to the proper position in the command string then click the mouse button ASCII Characters x C Hex Decimal Value Character 1 Insert Close Figure 86 Insert Special Character Panel 13 2433 COMMAND TERMINATOR Defines how the instrument terminates command strings The selections available from the drop down list are carriage return CR and carriage return line feed CR lt LF gt The majority of instruments that support an RS 232 or IEEE 488 interface use carriage return line feed as the command terminator Refer to the instrument documentation for details 13 3 RS 232 INTERFACE RS 232 is one of the most widely used interface standards At least one RS 232 port is built into every IBM compatible computer The int
89. 4 1 will greatly simplify the learning process to get atest started Although each example may not include explicit instructions on all test steps there are three required steps that must always be followed before a test can be run Create or select a DUT Definition O Create or select a Test Definition Setup the Hardware Configuration to support the DUT and Test Definitions Each of the examples in Sections 5 1 1 to 5 1 6 uses generic DUT command information Refer to the actual DUT documentation when trying to run a test following any of these examples 5 1 1 EXAMPLE 1 How do use molbox1 reference to automatically calibrate a DUT that has a range of 0 to 50 sccm and uses an RS485 or digital interface Most manufacturers that use RS485 and digital interfaces also supply a converter box that transforms the communications interface into RS 232 If this converter is available set up the DUT Definition with an RS 232 as its lt Output Type gt on the DUT Definition Read tab Without this converter box COMPASS cannot communicate with this type of DUT For this example assume the Test Definition Test was previously set up for DUT control and a sequence of test points that fit the requirements of the DUT has been set up see Section 9 The DUT in this example outputs in the format N 24 55 as 24 55 corresponding to 12 28 sccm when passed the command 02H 01RFX The 02H is a non printable ASCII contr
90. 8 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 6 66 1 CHANGE RELOAD molbloc This feature is represented by the toolbar icon When using molbox1 as a reference this tool displays a pop up panel allowing a new molbloc channel to be selected A B or A B If the selected channel does not contain a valid molbloc an error message displays and the molbox flow displays Error until the molbloc channel is changed back to a valid channel For all other molbox references this feature reloads the current molbloc channel This feature is not available when the reference is not a molbox 6 6 2 TARE molbox The tare molbox feature is represented by the toolbar icon af See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Tare Section for complete information and recommendations on molbox pressure transducer taring This function executes the molbox tare function When pressed a message displays allowing the selection of the tare pressure upstream or downstream After this selection the reference molbox s internal valves are actuated to set up the tare configuration The current pressure measured by the molbox pressure transducers is displayed on the Tare molbox panel When the pressure is stable the circular ready indicator will change to green and the tare button is enabled Press lt Tare gt to activate the current value The Status Bar displays Tare Complete gt after the tare is set The Tare molbox gt pane
91. 9 12 FLOW UNIT CONVERSIONS COMPASS performs all internal flow conversion to and from kg s There are three types of unit conversion mass to mass mass to volume and mass to perfect Each type of conversion may require a scaling factor to convert time volume and mass dimensions as required by the unit In other cases gas specific properties are required for the conversion A mass to mass conversion requires a simple scaling factor Mass to volume conversions always convert to sccm or ccm at the required pressure and temperature then a scaling factor is used to convert to the final unit For example sccm to slm conversions require multiplication by 0 001 Mass to perfect unit conversions first convert to mol s then to pccm A scaling factor is applied as need to convert from pccm to other perfect units Use Tools Unit Converter to determine flow unit conversions in various gases Table 64 describes the basic equations to perform each conversion 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 194 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 65 to Table 69 define the variables and conversion constants required to convert flow units Use the conversion factors as necessary to begin with sccm ccm pccm mol s or kg s Then use the appropriate formula to convert to kg s then from kg s to sccm ccm pccm or mol s Use a scaling factor as necessary to convert to the final flow unit from sccm ccm pccm mol s or kg s User defined units follow th
92. A standard windows filebox allows the selection of the data file name and location In Run molbox run mode the lt Root i DUT data directory gt is used as the default file location However any read write directory location is valid Run DUT files use the same default naming convention as tests see Section 11 8 The file created is identical to files generated during tests Only 1 file can be active at a time If a file is already open when this option is selected the file is first closed before the new file is created Use an lt lnitialization gt preference to determine whether or not COMPASS automatically prompts for the data file during the initialization phase of the Run molbox gt and Run DUT gt run modes Log a single data Logs the instantaneous output of all devices to the data file This is identical in function point as using a 0 averaging time in a test Any non automated devices must have their output entered in the Enter Flow Data window If an auxiliary device is not setup 7 to auto poll see Section 10 3 7 the device will be read prior to logging the point Average and take Averages all devices for the specified averaging time then logs the averaged results as 1 point test point This is identical to averaging data during a test Both automatic and manual averages can be used to average the data see Section 9 5 4 An automatic average is based purely on a time specified by the user Manual aver
93. ASS for molbox User s Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF 5 2 l TABLES 2 Vi FIGURE S USER ABOUT THIS MANUAL niii ilex ki ixkII win uk uis e ux lie XII 1 INTRODUCTION C 1 1 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW sa o nn mra ci r snstncenpedasdcnsedansincesescraieicraincopasdcnisuntauncadvaandiuns 1 2 GETTING STARTED 1 1 eeeeceeeeee ennemi nana anna naa IRR RR RR DES NRR RR 7 1 2 1 OVERVIEW me 2 2 SYSTEM REQUIRE E NT O a S ia Gu an 2 3 INSTALLING COMPASS FOR mMolboX 6 2 3 2 UPGRADING FROM VERSIONS LOWER THAN 4 00 2 3 3 TOOLS FILE UPGRADE 2 2 4 RUNNING THE PROGRAM 0000 0 25 UNINSTALLING 3 OPERATING PRINCGIPEES ices eds eae eee dee Seeded Re 3 1 OVERVIEW ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 1 1 BASICS SUMMARY 4 QUIGK TIPS E A E A A E E E ce A E 9 4 1 FHOW ERE 9 5 APPLICATION 5
94. ASS run screens With the exception of the lt Spy gt window feature all of the items listed in this table are also available using the Display menu see Section 11 9 Each of the toolbar buttons forces the corresponding run screen to the top of the display Table 3 Tools Available On The Display Toolbar ICON DESCRIPTION DUT Referenc e Comparison A Molbox Output ay DUT Output DUT Data Plot 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Display the lt DUT Reference Comparison gt run screen This display provides convenient real time error information calculated from the DUT and reference flows see Section 6 7 1 Display the lt molbox gt run screen This display contains real time updates of all of the basic molbloc molbox conditions and output information see Section 6 7 2 Display the lt DUT gt run screen The DUT output flow and set point information display on this run screen see Section 6 7 3 Display the lt Average Data gt run screen The average flow and output information are updated on this run screen each time an averaging cycle is completed see Section 6 7 4 This feature is not available in Run Test mode In this case average results are logged in the data grid Display the data grid with the data logged for the current test The information displayed in the grid is customizable using the Tools Options Grid tab see Sections 6 7 5 and 0 Display the plot tool loaded with data from the c
95. B The Setup Hardware Power Supply tab is used to manage the power supply Definitions that are included in the System Configuration lt Set point power supply gt drop down list see Section 10 2 The Power Supply tab provides a list of the power supplies available displays complete information on the selected power supply allows the power supply to be edited or a new power supply to be created To select a power supply Hardware Definition to view single click on the power supply name and serial number in the lt List gt display panel upper left hand corner To edit an existing power supply double click on the power supply listing or click on the lt Edit gt toolbar function with the desired power supply highlighted Double clicking the power supply listing clicking on the lt Edit gt toolbar function or clicking on the lt New gt new toolbar function causes the lt Edit Reference Device gt or lt Add New Reference Device gt pop up to appear These pop ups are identical but differentiated by name to make it clear which task is currently being performed The lt Edit Power Supply gt or lt Add Power Supply gt pop ups allow a reference device to be set up from scratch or edited from an existing one The purpose of the power supply Definition fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 38 When creating a new Definition all the fields come up blank When editing an existing Definition
96. Base Unit then providing the ability to change the reference pressure and temperature when applicable Fixed volumetrically based mass flow units as well as volume or actual flow units are available Volume or actual flow units require real time data acquisition of gas pressure and temperature measured at the inlet or outlet of DUT The actual measurement location is dependent on the DUT User defined units can be created by applying a multiplier to the final flow unit to change the dimension of the unit For example kg s can be changed to kg h by using a multiplier of 3 600 Use dimensional analysis to determine the multiplier value for example kg kg 60s 60m 5 sm h kg _ 3600kg 5 h See the molbox Operations and Maintenance Manual UNIT Section for extensive information on flow units of measure Flow unit of measure conversions used by COMPASS are defined in Section 19 3 Page 153 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 14 2 FLOW UNIT EDITOR The Flow Unit Editor is accessed by selecting Edit Units in a any flow unit of measure drop down list When the Flow Unit Editor first displays it is in view mode This means that any flow units be viewed by selecting the unit from the Flow Unit list If any part of a unit is modified or the New or Copy options are selected the editor changes to edit mode n this state existing units cannot be viewed until the
97. COMPASS for molbox Flow Calibration Software User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc All rights reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of DH Instruments Inc 4765 East Beautiful Lane Phoenix AZ 85044 5318 USA DH Instruments makes sincere efforts to the ensure accuracy and quality of its published materials however no warranty expressed or implied is provided DH Instruments disclaims any responsibility or liability for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of the information in this manual or products described in it Mention of any product does not constitute an endorsement by DH Instruments of that product This manual was originally composed in English and subsequently translated into other languages The fidelity of the translations cannot be guaranteed In case of conflict between the English version and other language versions the English version takes precedence DH Instruments DH DHI molbox molbloc and COMPASS are trademarks registered and otherwise of DH Instruments Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation 030918 550087h Printed in the USA 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMP
98. Command Raw Response gt COMPASS Uses Do not auto scroll lists on new commands Table 13 for details on information displayed by spy windows Figure 27 Spy Window Screen Selecting text in any column automatically highlights the corresponding text in the other columns If the text width exceeds the column width a tooltip message will display with the full text of the column if the mouse is held over the selection Pay close attention to the instrument interface in the spy window caption If the interface displayed does not correspond to the actual instrument interface there is a configuration problem in COMPASS Use Setup Hardware to make interface changes to an instrument and Setup System to specify instruments to be used see Sections 10 3 10 2 Table 13 Spy Windows Information FRAME LABEL DESCRIPTION Do not auto scroll When checked use the scroll bars of any field to view commands previously sent lists on new spy window will not auto scroll with each new command f this option is not commands checked every new command scrolls all three columns of the spy window Command The exact command sent by COMPASS over the instrument interface The command terminator is the only portion of the command that is typically not visible For set commands make sure the command and set value are properly formatted see Section 13 2 3 Raw Response The unmanipulated r
99. DUT and other support devices Select the Create data file option on the Run Toolbars Then use the data acquisition options to log discrete data points or take points over time see Section 6 5 Page 11 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Customize the test report created by COMPASS to my own requirements Modify the report template to reflect your requirements see Section 16 3 1 3 It is best to select an existing template then use the Save As option to create a copy of the template under a different name Then edit the template as required to get the desired report output Remove items from drop down lists Certain COMPASS drop down lists are built automatically from operator entries Items can be removed from these lists if desired Use the Tools Options Maintain Lists tab see Section 11 4 Use the molbox1 MFC control option to control flow and an external DMM to measure the DUT output Set up a DUT Definition with a lt Voltage Current gt Output Type see Section 8 5 8 Set up the DMM in the Hardware Definition and specify the remote commands necessary to read the output see Section 10 3 4 In Setup System select the DMM in the System Configuration as the DUT Output DMM On the same form select the Reference molbox gt item as the Set Point Power Supply see Section 10 2 When a test is run or Run DUT is selected the DMM specified in the System
100. DUT Definition Read and Set tabs see Sections 8 5 8 8 5 9 as well as to the Hardware Definition DMM Power Supply Frequency Pressure Temperature and Flow Controller tabs see Section 10 3 13 2 1 INITIALIZATION COMMANDS Initialization commands are used to set a remote device to a known state This can include setting a specific unit of measure range information gas selection clearing error buffers etc All commands entered are sent just one time during the initialization phase of Run DUT and Run Test run mode execution see Sections 7 2 7 4 Responses to initialization commands are not used in any way by COMPASS Therefore there is no requirement to specify set or read information See Section 13 2 4 for information on Command Editor features DUT Initialization Commands x Remote Command No Response Insert Special Character OK Cancel Interface Properties Command Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt Maximum Response time out 8 Figure 83 lt Initialization Commands Editor Panel 13 2 2 READ COMMANDS Read commands are used to obtain an output from a remote device When COMPASS is in a run mode that uses the device the read commands are constantly sent in order to provide real time updating The faster the instrument responds the faster the refresh rate on the run screens see Section 6 7 For this reason it is best to use the small
101. DUT serial number and identification if desired then click the lt Read Interface gt RS 232 settings display to display the RS 232 setup window Make the necessary RS 232 selections and press OK see Section 7 2 1 5 The selected settings are automatically copied to the Set Interface Press lt OK gt on the Setup DUT s gt screen to start the test COMPASS will step through the test point sequence gathering data from the reference and the DUT see Section 7 2 2 Setup DUT Identification x Serial Number 77209584 Identification 11 Read Interface 1 3600 N 8 1 95232 Set Interface 1 3600 N 8 1 5232 Figure 5 Example 1 DUT Interface Setup The COM2 port of the molbox can be used instead of a communications port on the PC by selecting lt Ref Com2 gt found at the end of the lt COM Port gt list This selection is valid for any RS 232 device except the molbox itself RS232 Settings Port Settings 5 2400 7 1 Data Bits Stop Bits Figure 6 Example 1 RS 232 Setup with Ref Com2 Page 17 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 5 1 2 EXAMPLE 2 Assuming the molbox1 from Example 1 is set up and it has the MFC control option How do calibrate a DUT that outputs 0 to 5 V corresponding to 0 to 1 sim This example demonstrates the setup requirements of a common analog output DUT The only setup required to use the molbo
102. Data Plot Data File Data Plot Data File is used to generate error plots of DUT and reference flow information stored in Data Files dat The plots generated may be viewed and or printed This function is useful to quickly analyze data The plots may also be selected for inclusion in COMPASS reports see Section 16 Calculations used to produce data plots are documented in Section 19 4 When Data Plot Data File is selected a standard Windows file browser appears set to the directory that holds the Data Files Selecting a file causes the lt Plot gt screen to appear loaded with an error plot generated using the data from the Data File 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 138 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual e E SOFTWARE Comp_box Special Data T esting 2000_035_005 dat Ol x amp 96 DUTFS Error vs Reference Flow Cy 1 Tol Tol 1 00 0 75 0 50 0 25 0 00 0 25 0 50 0 75 1 00 DUTFS Error 0 5 1 0 15 2 0 2 5 3 0 Reference Flow slm 0 00C Figure 78 Data Plot Data File Screen The name and directory path of the Data File currently being plotted is shown at the top of the plot screen A plot toolbar is provided to select new Data Files print the current plot change the type of plot and access common plot properties The toolbar features are summarized below P Allows selection using a standard Windows file browser of a different Data File to be plotted D
103. E 488 If the DUT does not require a specific initialization this field is not used Refer to the DUT s remote interface manual to determine whether initialization commands are necessary Possible initialization commands include setting unit of measure gas or range If initialization commands are needed enter them in the remote command Editor All commands entered will appear in appropriate list box Consider that initialization commands may also be included on the DUT Definition Read tab if the DUT uses the same interface for reading and setting See Section 13 for information on COMPASS remote communications Set Commands These are the commands needed to set a DUT whose Set Point Type is RS 232 or IEEE 488 conditional drop Click the Edit button to display the Remote Command Editor gt form see Section 13 2 down list action Enter the desired set commands then close the form Up to 10 commands can be included button All commands entered will appear in the appropriate list box Refer to the DUT manual for details on how the DUT interface functions Set commands typically require the Set Unit Variable to specify where the numerical target flow information should be located in the command string Enter the command string then drag and drop or type the Set Unit Variable text into the appropriate location in the command string COMPASS substitutes the current numerical set point in the Set Units for the Set Unit Vari
104. Editor The DUT Definition Editor is made up of multiple sections lt Toolbar gt see Section 8 5 1 Includes tools to identify and select DUT Definitions and icons to create save copy and delete Definitions Header Tab see Section 8 5 2 Contains general DUT identifying information and the Profile or Individual type choice Correction Tab see Section 8 5 3 Specifies whether a gas density correction should be made for the DUT and the DUT s standard operating gas pressure and temperature conditions Range Tab see Section 8 5 4 Defines the DUT s flow and measurement output unit and range Specifies if the DUT is a flow controller Tolerance Tab see Section 8 5 5 Specifies the DUT s measurement tolerance type and quantifies the tolerance Test Tab see Section 8 5 6 Identifies the default Test Definition to be used when the DUT is selected in Run Test mode Conditions Tab see Section 8 5 7 Records conditions under which the DUT is tested orientation downstream pressure Read Tab see Section 8 5 8 Defines the DUT s output type and commands to be used Sets resolution to use when running tests Set Tab see Section 8 5 9 If the DUT is a flow controller defines the set point type and range and commands to be used in the case of RS 232 or IEEE 488 DUTs Page 65 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 8 5 1 TOOLBAR All fields above the tabs on
105. Enabled option at the bottom of the Settings display Check the RS 232 cable to make sure that all pins are properly connected Especially pin 5 ground However rare RS 232 do go bad This problem is associated with intermittent communications Verify that other RS 232 devices function properly while being continuously polled Edit the report template and re insert the desired field using the Field Insertion Tool 16 3 1 3 16 3 3 2 Edit DUTs and tests using Setup DUT and Setup Test while COMPASS is idle 7 1 8 5 9 5 Use the DUT Definition Editor to remove any invalid characters in the DUT Definition serial number or ID field Make sure these characters are not entered during the Setup DUT s step of test initialization 8 5 2 7 2 1 5 Use Windows Explorer to verify the Data File directory selection on Tools Options Data File tab is valid 11 8 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION Data Files are not being stored to the right directory The front panel of my DUT displays more resolution than the main run screen of COMPASS When running COMPASS the front panel of the molbox only displays mass flow in units like kg sec mg sec or mol sec Data Files are stored under the Data File name and the directory path specified You may not be looking in the correct directory path The output resolution selection in the DUT Definition is less tha
106. Entry lt Calibration Gas gt to N2 A new value can be entered for every lt Calibration Gas gt gas selected The values entered are used to improve the control accuracy when the flow controller is used during Run DUT and Run Test run modes Remote Interface Drop Down The choices available are lt RS232 gt lt IEEE 488 gt and lt Voltage Current gt Selection To set up the flow controller for remote communications select the appropriate interface When an interface type is selected the rest of the lt Remote Interface gt and command information panels change as appropriate to accommodate definition of the interface characteristics lt RS232 gt and lt IEEE 488 gt selections require set command information Use lt Voltage Current gt when the flow controller requires an analog power supply to set the flow If this is the selection V mV A or mA must be the flow controller lt Set Units gt RS 232 Settings Conditional Display If the remote interface selection is RS 232 the lt RS232 Settings gt Panel information is shown When creating a new flow controller Definition the settings are loaded with COMPASS default settings Port settings are listed baud rate parity data bits stop bits Clicking on any setting field causes the lt RS232 Settings gt Editor to appear Select the correct settings for the device from the drop down list and click lt OK gt see Section 13 3 1 IEEE 488 Conditional Entry If the remote interf
107. Flow Units Curent Gas 2 NITROGEN Pressure Temperature Current Flow Calculated Flow kg s scem 0 00 Exit om Figure 90 Unit Converter 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 156 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE Current Pressure numeric entry field drop down list box Calculated Pressure display field drop down list box Current Temperature numeric entry field drop down list box Calculated Temperature display field drop down list box Current Gas drop down list box Pressure optional numeric entry field Temperature optional numeric entry field Current Flow numeric entry field drop down list box Calculated Flow display field drop down list box Table 56 lt Flow Unit Converter gt Panel Fields DESCRIPTION The numeric pressure value in the units that will be converted The converted pressure value in the selected pressure units The numeric temperature value in the units that will be converted The converted temperature value in the selected temperature units The gas for which the flow unit conversion will take place The complete list of COMPASS supported calibration gases is available for selection Ignore this field if you are not converting a volume or actual flow unit Volume or actual flow unit conversions require instantaneous pr
108. ION Labels the device manufacturer Write in a manufacturer name Defines the device model Write in a model name Defines the device serial number Write in a serial number Provides a device identification Write in a device identification if desired The field can be used for internal device tracking or any other information desired The value entered will be included in run test Data Files and can be included in reports Do not use the following charactere V 2 lt gt a comma or tab character These charactere will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 11 8 This field is available to keep track of a calibration date The value entered may be the calibration due date or the last calibration date as preferred No special formatting is expected or checked in this field however entering the date in a consistent format including the full year month and day is recommended The value entered is logged in the run test Data Files and can be included in reports Select the resolution to apply to the device output All data logged and displayed for the device will be specified with the selected resolution Select the resolution that is appropriate for the device Resolution is typically specified as 1 more digit than the device tolerance The choices available are
109. M Port selection should Page 149 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual represent the physical connection of the device and an RS 232 port on the host computer or the currently configured reference device Use the Ref Com2 gt selection found at the end of the COM Port drop down list to access the currently configured reference COM2 port rather than a standard communications port on the host PC Ref Com2 gt is usually COM2 of a molbox flow reference If the reference device does not have a valid COM2 COMPASS will generate an error when trying to access the port No special command setup is required to use the Ref Com2 option Select this option just as any other COM port selection COMPASS will set up the reference device COM port and modify the commands as needed to send and receive commands using this interface RS232 Settings Port Settings Com Port 1 1 2400 E 7 1 r Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits 2400 J 1 J Figure 87 RS232 Settings Panel 13 4 IEEE 488 INTERFACE IEEE 488 also known as GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus is a popular instrument interface protocol This interface allows a single IEEE 488 controller card to simultaneously interface with up to 15 instruments Each instrument must be set to an independent IEEE 488 address from 1 to 30 The controller card also has an address
110. ORMAT MULTIPLE CYCLES ecce ect st dee o 172 16 3 3 5 FORMAT PAGE SETUP asina a Bcc 173 173 15 941 22545512 eA n Lu eU LLL EMAIL 173 16 3 4 2 OPTIONS FONT FORMAT BAR ettet ttti 173 16 3 4 3 OPTIONS IBUBERISS coim gt 175 10244 OPTIONS IBATHIG 542 450 eta tec cad esa aes 175 1635 WINDOW e LL UR 176 Sz io ene 176 16 4 REPORT EDITOR AUTOMATION 176 16 41 DRAG AND stad uice E LA 176 177 16 4 3 DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE scssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssesssssssesssssesssssueessssneesssssueesssseessssneenses 177 171 HELP ELE E ec Meus 179 OVERVIEW ditatus tuna ra dx fe 179 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page iv COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 18 19 20 21 22 DATA FILES munii rm 181 181 18 2 DATA FILE CREATION 2 7 181 18 8 NAMING AND STORING DATA 7 181 18 4 DATA FILE STRUCTURE 18 4 1 DATA FILE FIELDS CALCULATIONS TEE 191 LOVER VIEW 1922 19 3 DUT SET POINTS
111. PAN All 5DUTFS errors are based on the flow span Full scale and span are equivalent as long as the Min Flow value is zero If a non zero value is entered there will be a discrepancy between the actual full scale error and the DUTFS value determined by COMPASS If true full scale error is desired always enter O as the Min Flow value Enter the maximum DUT flow in the flow range unit of measure This is the expected flow when the DUT s lt Max Output gt occurs Sets the resolution with which the calculated DUT flow data will be logged and displayed Select the desired resolution from the drop down list This option should be used to adjust the resolution to a level that is appropriate for the performance of the DUT Typically resolution is set to one order of magnitude greater than the DUT tolerance By default the reference resolution is set to be 1 order of magnitude greater than the resolution selected in this field Select the DUT output unit from the drop down list If the unit is not on the list type the unit into the list box If the output range unit is the flow range unit the min max output fields are automatically set to the min max flow range fields If the DUT s lt Output Type gt on the Read tab is lt Voltage Current gt the output unit must be V mV A or mA If the DUT s data acquisition mode is Frequency the output unit must be Hz kHz MHz or s Enter the lowest output output corresponding to the Min F
112. Page 107 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual does not need to be set up under these tabs In the System Configuration when a molbox is selected as the lt Flow Reference gt lt Reference molbox gt is automatically included as a choice in the lt DUT Output lt Setpoint and lt Setpoint Power Supply fields see Section 10 2 Reference Frequency Pressure Temperature Flow Controller Auxiliary HP34401 1111 DMM 34785 Ex molboxl Example V Analog Output 2 Heu EXDMM 5 Figure 61 Hardware Definition DMM Tab Hewlett Packard HP34401 1111 20010110 0 000 Interface IEEE 488 Figure 62 Hardware Definition Edit DMM gt Panel 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 108 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 37 lt Edit DMM gt lt Frequency gt lt Pressure gt And lt Temperature gt Screen Fields FEATURE Manufacturer required text entry field Model required text entry field Serial Number required text entry field Identification optional text entry field Calibration Date optional text entry field Output Resolution required list box selection Remote Interface drop down selection list RS 232 Settings conditional display panel IEEE 488 Address conditional entry field DESCRIPT
113. RELOAD molbloc ws 94 6 6 2 TARE molbox ws 94 6 6 3 PURGE FUNCTION 35 6 6 4 LEAK TEST uie EK I 6 6 5 MODIFY molbox VALVE DRIVERS 96 6 6 6 FLOW CONDITIONS 36 6 6 7 UNITS SELECTION 37 6 6 8 FLOW CONTROL 98 6 6 9 ENTER FLOW wD 6 6 10 DATA ACQUISITION TOOLS 99 67 J BUNSCOREENS 552 E a ne E ae 42 6 7 1 DUT REFERENCE COMPARISON RUN SCREEN wee 42 6 7 2 molbox OUTPUT RUN wee 3 6 7 3 DUT OUTPUT RUN SCREEN wee 4d 6 7 4 AVERAGE DATA RUN SCREEN 46 6 7 5 DATA GRID RUN SCREEN 47 6 7 6 DATA PLOT RUN SCREEN 48 6 7 7 SPY WINDONWLGS 5 5 48 7 MODES scc ceri Ra 51 OVERVIEW 51 72 RUN RUN S 7 51 7 2 1 TEST INITIALIZATION 9 51 7 2 1 1 INITIALIZE 2 52 7 2 1 2 SELECT STARTING molbloc 2 52 42 1 3 SELECT DUT 2 53 7 04 4 SELECT 2 54 7 2 1 5 SETUP DUT ID INTERFAGE rentrer 2 55 7 2 1 6 USERID ee 2 57 7 2 2 RUN TEST 57 7 2 2 1 MANUAL ENTRY DATA ACQUISITION
114. ROPERTIES 12421 GENERAL 12 4 2 SUBSETS 1942 3 12 4 2 4 CUSTOM PLOT REMOTE 13 2 7 146 2 146 13 2 2 HEAD 60 05 146 1323 SET 60 147 13 244 EDITOR FEATURES 522 148 13 2 41__ lt LEADING CHARACTERS TO 1 gt 148 Page iii 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 13 2 4 2 INSERT SPECIAL CHARACTER 13 2 4 3 COMMAND 1 2 4 1 00 08 0 1 0000 0 13 3 RS 232 INTERFACE 13 3 1 RS 232 SETUP 13 4 IEEE 488 INTERFACE 13 5 DEVICENET INTERFACE 13 6 TOOLS REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS 7 14 TOOLS FLOW UNIT EDITOR 1341 OVERVIEW aam auci ciis recae ui tetto acted 14 2 oEEOW UNIT EDITOR doo deducto 0 Dc 4458 UNIT CONVERTER 15 TOOLS PROCESS GAS EDITOR 154 15 2 15 3 0 cut ER 16 DATA REPORT 16 4 16 2 REPORT 16 3 MENU 16 33
115. S 232 or IEEE 488 require a remote command setup All other non manual DUT data acquisition selections require that the appropriate data acquisition instrument s be available to COMPASS by selection in the lt System Configuration gt see Section 10 2 Table 22 provides information on the individual Read tab fields Header Correction Range Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set DUT Data Acquistion Output Type n22 Communications Test RS232Sengs Initialization Commands FUNIT sm Edit Read Commands na 23 Figure 45 DUT Definition Editor Read Tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 76 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 22 DUT Definition Editor Read Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Output Type Specifies what form of data will be acquired from the DUT The available selections are required drop Voltage Current The DUT outputs an electrical signal that will be acquired by the down list DUT Output gt specified in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 The selection output units must be V mV A or mA when this selection is used COMPASS automatically makes the necessary conversions from the DMM s output unit typically V or A to the DUT s output unit No command information is required as commands are provided in the DMM Hardware Definition see Section 10 3 4 RS 232 DUT data is gathered directly over the DUT s RS 232 interface The
116. STRUCTURE The Data File structure includes headings and labels that make it easy to read and follow The information in the Data File is divided into sections Each section with the exception of the first section is preceded with a blank line followed by a single line describing the section The Data File sections are described in Table 62 The data in a Data File may be delimited by commas tabs or semi colons see Section 11 8 The default choice is semicolon data delimiters The COMPASS functions that use dat files adapt automatically to the delimiting value used by the Data File When using a third party application be sure to choose the appropriate delimiter prior to importing the data The data file delimiter must not be a character that is used in any entry field or delimiting will be incorrect Table 62 Data File Grid Run Screen Main Sections SECTION DESCRIPTION Run Information No Gives test data start time and operator name Section Title DUT Includes the information on the DUT that was tested from the DUT definition see Section 8 Reference Includes information on the flow reference included in the Hardware Definition at the time the test was run see Sections 10 2 10 3 2 Output Device Includes information on the DMM or frequency counter used to measure the DUT output during test execution see Sections 10 2 10 3 4 These fields are set to N A if the DUT did not use this type of data acquisition Se
117. Set point Reading and DUTFS errors express the difference between the DUT flow and the reference flow or the DUT span The Reading Set Point and DUTFS Set Point options express the difference between the reference flow and the set point or the DUT span 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 188 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Reading errors are undefined near zero reference flows Set point errors are determined using the measured DUT set point whenever possible If a measured value is not available the nominal value is used as the set point 100 Q UTspan Qour Qs Q Re f E Rdg x 0 Re f ref A ut E purrs _Set Qu 9 100 DUTspan Q ref Q set _ see x 100 set VARIABLE DESCRIPTION Current DUT flow Current reference flow Qdurspan DUT flow range span as determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum flow output values in the DUT Definition 19 5 DENSITY CORRECTIONS COMPASS includes two gas density correction options to assist in testing of gas density dependent devices under conditions different from their normal operating pressure and temperature conditions The two correction types are square root and proportional The gas density correction consider only gas density and no other pressure or temperature based DUT corrections For example gas viscosity changes with pressure and temperature and th
118. TFS Insert Points Sequence Tare Control Leak Test Purge Data 1 po 12 Test Point Unit Gear 2 10 13 fours H 3 Jan 14 S M Auto Fill 4 J100 15 5 16 Starting Point 8 17 z 7 18 Ending Point fioo 8 13 E 2i Step Value 77 10 21 Ascending Descending Points 1 22 Figure 32 lt Test Selector gt In Test Definition Editor 7 2 1 5 SETUP DUT ID INTERFACE The setup DUT ID Interface screen is presented This screen is intended to allow input of DUT identification and communication details if necessary There are some cases in which this display is not presented regardless of the options selected This occurs when the selected DUT Definition is Individual DUT see Section 8 5 2 and neither RS 232 nor IEEE 488 are specified to read or set the DUT The display will always occur regardless of the state of the initialization option if the DUT Definition is a DUT Profile Entry of the serial number and identification information is required in this case See Section 6 for information on Individual vs Profile DUT Definitions and the DUT read and set types A Do not use the following characters in the DUT serial number or identification fields V lt gt a comma or tab character These characters will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory The setup DUT ID Interface screen s appearanc
119. This option is most often used when a shut off valve is used to assure zero flow at check box the zero point Uncheck this option to use the actual molbox flow as the reference flow even when the target flow is zero The only criterion for logging zero as the reference flow is a zero set point No limits are placed on the actual flow compared to the set point If a zero set point is encountered and the flow is not properly set the reference flow is still logged as zero A molblocS flow is not defined at O flow In this case N A will display as the reference flow however O is still logged in the data file when this option is selected 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 128 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE DESCRIPTION Prompt for manual valve isolation for zero set points check box Allow flow adjustments for leak tests and zero set points check box Use DUT Error as DUT Set Error for zero set points check box Apply DUT K Factor to manual entry reference check box DUT overrange limit numeric entry field default 15 Checking this option causes COMPASS to pause test execution and prompt for manual valve operation when a zero flow set point is encountered in the test sequence A prompt to open the valves occurs after the flow is averaged for that set point Use this feature if a manual valve is included in the test system and used to assure zero flow at the zero set point
120. URE DESCRIPTION Calibration Gas This is the gas that is actually flowed through the reference and the DUT when the DUT is tested The value entered is used to determine the default lt K Factor gt see required drop immediately below All molbox supported gases are selectable as calibration gases down list selection If a density correction is selected in the DUT Definition Correction tab the calibration gas is automatically set to the process gas and cannot be changed K Factor This is the DUT s gas conversion factor from the calibration gas to the process gas for the particular manufacturer selected DUTs that specify a density correction in the DUT Definition Correction tab do not use this field The value is automatically updated if the lt Manufacturer gt was set up using the lt Process Gas Editor gt and conversion information is supported for the test gases see Section 15 conditional numeric entry field cas correction factors K factors are supplied by DUT manufacturers to allow calibration of the DUT with a gas other than the process gas Using incorrect gas correction factors or failing to properly estimate the uncertainty on gas corrections factors may lead to erroneous data molbloc molbox does not use gas correction factors For additional information see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Sections concerning K and K factors Default Test Specifies the Test Definition see Section 9 tha
121. User s Manual 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW Welcome to COMPASS for molbox the complete flow calibration software package for users of DHI molbloc molbox flow transfer standards COMPASS for molbox is designed to supply the missing link needed to get from individual automated hardware components to an automated calibration system and from owning a great flow standard to performing a wide variety of special calibrations and tests Using COMPASS for molbox you can create any number of calibration test scenarios define characteristics of various devices under test DUT run tests analyze test data and generate reports without ever leaving the program or you can export test data for analysis using other applications COMPASS s flexible approach makes it easily adaptable to a wide variety of hardware and allows you to adjust the level of automation for many different tasks and Hardware Definitions from manual entry flow meters to fully automated mass flow controller calibrations Please fill in and return the User Registration form located in this manual immediately following the Table of Contents Page 1 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 2 2 2 1 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual GETTING STARTED OVERVIEW This section explains how to install COMPASS for molbox on your computer 2 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS COMPASS for molbox
122. YSTEM SETUP HARDWARE 99 10 1 OVERVIEW 10 2 SETUP SYSTEM 103 SETUP HARDWARE 10 3 1 TOOLBAR 10 3 2 HARDWARE DEFINITION EDITOR 10 3 3 REFERENCE TAB nnnc 104 10 3 4 DMM FREQUENCY PRESSURE TEMPERATURE 107 410 35 POWER SUPPLY TAB oer em obti secede ae aso cea D see i 111 118 10227 1098 LU dee 119 TOOLS 121 11 1 OVERVIEW eee ee M Ns RR erect 121 14 2 molbox 121 IEEE eE 124 11 4 MAINTAIN LISTS 126 11 5 INITIALIZE 127 11 6 RUN TEST TAB 128 11 7 END TEST TAB e 130 11 8 FILE iecur ole succes decr cette 132 11 9 DISPLAY TAB AND DISPLAY MENU 0 ccccseecessseeceessseeeeseseeeenseeeeeessneeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeseeneeeseneees 134 DATA EN 12 1 OVERVIEW wisi 12 2 Data View Data File 12 3 Data Print Test Data erer erara aaa a arae rama ra ennemi innen nnns 12 4 Data Plot Data File 12 4 3 P
123. a Files dat see Section 18 4 The choices are comma tab or semicolon The semicolon delimiter is the default The choice can be useful to assure compatibility wnen COMPASS Data Files will be exported to another program The COMPASS internal data and report functions automatically detect and handle which delimiter was used in the Data File so the choice can be changed occasionally without affecting COMPASS operation Be sure that the selected delimiter is not used as a character in any entry field or file delimiting will be incorrect Defines the root directory to use when creating new DUT based sub directories and copying Data Files The selected directory can be on network or on an internal hard drive Any directory selection can be used provided there is enough room to store test Data Files and that the location is not write protected Use the Browse button next to the entry field to select a new or existing directory using a directory browsing tool COMPASS generates default file names for Data Files dat it creates when a test is run It also creates and uses default directories for the Data Files based on the DUT Definition on which the test was run see Section 18 3 This DUT dependent data directories are created as sub directories of the lt Root Data File directory gt This feature automatically sorts Data Files in DUT dependent directories so that they can easily be retrieved when desired The lt Directory Name gt o
124. a non molbox is used as the flow reference only the DUT display fields are active and all reference fields display as N A Table 12 provides information on each field of the lt Average Data gt run screen The mouse pointer changes into a wand when the cursor is placed over any of the fields that support unit of measure changing Click the field to get a pop up menu of other display unit options The DUT flow unit output unit set unit and DUTFS are the available choices Click the DUT or reference fields to change their display unite Average Flow Data Reference DUT Output Input Min Flow Max Flow STD Figure 24 lt Average Flow Data gt Run Screen 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 46 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 12 lt Average Flow Data gt Run Screen Fields LABEL DESCRIPTION Red Green Circular molbox flow Ready Not Ready indicator see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Display Manual Ready Not Ready Section The circle is red when any molbox flow reading during the averaging cycle was not ready and green when all molbox flow readings were ready Reference Flow Average flow measured by the reference over the last averaging cycle To change the display unit of measure click the value and select the desired unit from the drop down list If the DUT Definition Correction tab specifies a density correction the reference flow value is corrected to express the flow tha
125. a slope of 1 DUT Output vs The DUT output in the DUT s output units is plotted against the reference Reference Flow flow in the DUT s flow units This plot is used to get quick visual representation of the DUT output to flow relationship Reference Flow vs The reference flow in the DUT s flow units is plotted against the DUT output DUT Output in the DUT s output units This plot is the inverse of the DUT Output vs Reference Flow plot option This plot is used to get quick visual representation of the flow to DUT output relationship DUTFS Error vs The DUT error as a percent of full scale at each flow point is plotted against Reference Flow the reference flow Reading Error vs The DUT error as a percent of reading at each flow point is plotted against Reference Flow the reference flow DUT Flow vs The DUT flow is plotted against each test point taken This type of plot is Points typically used when the Data File specifies multiple readings point Reference Flow vs The reference flow is plotted against each test point taken This type of plot Points is typically used when the Data File specifies multiple readings point DUTFS vs Points The DUT full scale error is plotted against each test point taken This type of plot is typically used when the Data File specifies multiple readings point Reference Flow vs The reference flow is plotted against the DUT set point When the Data File Set Point co
126. ab and click News to create a new DMM see Section 10 3 4 Enter the basic DMM setup information at the top of the form This particular DMM supports both RS 232 and IEEE 488 interfaces In this example IEEE 488 is used If RS 232 were chosen it is possible to use the Ref Com2 gt option to use the COM2 port of the reference molbox to communicate with the DMM Select Voltage V from the Output Units field Then press the Read gt button This displays the remote command Editor Enter MEAS VOLT DC in the command field then press lt OK gt to store the setting and return to the DMM Editor Now is a good time to find the command to read current so there is no need to re configure this DMM in the future Select Current A from the Output Units field then again press the Read Command button Enter MEAS CURRENT DC in the first field then press OK This is the command to read current in Amps should it be needed later There are no leading characters to strip and the command terminator is carriage return line feed Press OK to save this DMM This Hardware Definition provides COMPASS with the necessary information to use a DUT that outputs in V mV and or mA Add DMM Lx Header Manufacturer Hewlett Packard Model JaPa ooo Serial Number 65078912 Identification Calibration Date Interface IEEE 488 E IEEE 488 Addres Initialization Commands fi 0 Read Commands
127. ab to allow this see Section 9 5 6 There is nothing out of the ordinary about setting up a test for this example see Section 9 5 1 8 3 TEST HARDWARE SETUP The flow meter installation should be made following the manufacturer s recommendations The gas pressure and temperature should be measured as close to the DUT as possible To correct for the effects of changes in gas density at different flow conditions the gas temperature and pressure at the DUT must be known during the test This information must be manually entered into COMPASS if it can t be obtained electronically The setup of manual entry of pressure and temperature is a two part process The Setup System Pressure Measurement and Temperature Measurement should both read lt Manual gt when manual entry is to be used see Section 10 2 Use the Tools Options Run Test tab to specify whether temperature and pressure will be entered at the first point each point or by use default value see Section 11 6 To set up automatic pressure and temperature measurement first create the Hardware Definitions of the measuring devices using the Setup Hardware Temperature and or Pressure tabs see Section 10 3 4 Next they must be selected for use by COMPASS using the Setup System Temperature and or Pressure pull down menus see Section 10 2 5 1 84 SET UP DATA GRID To display appropriate data in the Data Grid during the test use th
128. able to create the final set command The set point command s is sent each time a new flow increment or set point is initiated in a COMPASS run mode See Section 13 for information on COMPASS remote communications Communications This feature is used to test communication with a DUT whose Set Point Type is RS 232 or Test IEEE 488 Press this button to send the lt Initialization Commands and Set Commands to the DUT A Spy Windows will display with the command response information used see Section 6 7 7 This feature is designed to provide on the spot troubleshooting of the remote commands setup If a command is not properly entered or the response format is not correct the problem should be visible in the spy window Use the Remote Communications tool for further troubleshooting see Section 13 6 action button Page 79 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 80 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 9 Setup TEST 9 1 OVERVIEW Test Definitions are used to define a specific test procedure including a sequence of flow points and a large number of operational details In COMPASS Run Test mode a DUT to be tested is selected an then the Test Definition to be executed is specified A pointer to a default Test Definition for a DUT is included in the DUT Definition Test tab see Section 8 5 6 Access the Test Definition Edit
129. ace selection is IEEE 488 the IEEE 488 Address Field Address gt entry field is shown When creating a new reference device the IEEE 488 address is set to the default address 10 The address can be edited directly in the entry field Initialization Action Button Click this button to display the lt Remote Command Editor gt form see Commands Section 13 6 Enter the desired commands then close the form These commands are issued during the initialization process if required by the selected flow controller Each device may or may not require a specific initialization Refer to the device s remote interface manual to determine the necessity of initialization commands Some devices may require a unit range and or gas selection before being used If this is the case and the device has the necessary commands to complete the task enter the commands in the remote command Editor The response of these commands is not used by COMPASS Set Commands Action Button Click this button to display the lt Remote Command Editor gt form see Section 13 2 3 Enter the desired set commands then close the form Set commands typically require the lt Set Unit Variable gt to specify where the numerical target flow information should be located in the command string Enter the command string then drag and drop or type the lt Set Unit Variable gt text into the appropriate location in the command string COMPASS substitutes the current numerical set point
130. acters to strip Press OK to save the command setup and return to the DUT Definition Editor 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 14 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H DUT Read Commands Lx Log Response Leading characters to strip Remote Command No Response 0 2 Interface Properties Insert Special Character Command Terminator ER LF m OK Maximum Response time out 5 8 Cancel Figure 2 Example 1 DUT Read Command Setup Setting up the Set Point Type is similar to setting up the DUT Output Type On the Set tab first select RS 232 as the Set Point Types then enter the RS 232 settings for the DUT 9600 E 7 1 Then click the Edit button next to the Set Commands list to display the remote command setup form Insert the 02H control code as previously described Now enter the DUT Set command 01STD next to the control code Instead of for the numerical set value either type or drag and drop the Set Unit Variable at the end of the set command This tells COMPASS where to place the numerical flow target value Save this DUT using the Save toolbar icon The RS 232 communications port has not been entered This selection occurs as one of the last steps in test initialization Setup DUT s Data Acquisition see Section 7 2 1 5 5 1 12 SET UP A molbox AS THE REFERENCE Use Setup Hardware
131. ade Wizard is required to incorporate the DUT File information into the new database format The Upgrade Wizard assumes that all DUT s both control and measure flow Since this is not true in the case of MFM Mass Flow Meters it may be necessary to edit the DUT s after the upgrade process Test Files Use the Upgrade Just like DUT Files Test Files are no longer maintained as Wizard see a directory of individual files Instead COMPASS uses a Section 2 3 3 single database to store all test records The file Upgrade Wizard is required to incorporate the Test File information into the new database format COMPASS for molbox versions 4 00 and higher do not contain DUT data acquisition information This information is now contained in the DUT Definition The upgraded tests will contain all other compatible information There is no distinction between validation tests tsv and adjustment tests tsa These files are treated the same Reports Only rtf format Only reports specifically saved as rtf files are compatible see Section 16 with the new report Editor If a specific report is desired regenerate it using the original Data File and report template with the desired format see Section 16 Templates No compatibility Report templates from older COMPASS versions are not supported The new Data File format contains substantially more data and requires several more report template features The new Report Editor can be
132. ages allow the user to M tell COMPASS when to start and stop averaging When the Control Toolbar is located horizontally in COMPASS top or bottom of display the averaging mode is specified at the top of the drop down menu next to the average data icon Use the Change Averaging Setup option to select the type of averaging to use If the Control Toolbar is located vertically within COMPASS the Single Point Average Setup Figure 19 automatically displays providing the option to change settings Single Point Average Setup Average flow for 51 0 Manual start stop averaging Figure 19 lt Single Point Average Setup gt 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 40 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual DESCRIPTION FEATURE Log 1 point at fixed intervals Average and log points at fixed intervals Abort data acquisition 1 Logs an instantaneous data point at fixed time intervals When the icon is pressed an input box displays to allow entry of the time interval Then COMPASS will automatically log a data point and repeatedly log data points until the Abort Data Acquisition button is pressed or the run mode is closed Taking data in this way can be convenient when trying to monitor slowly evolving processes i e the effect of temperature on a DUT Realize that taking data at short time intervals can result in a very large data file me output of all manual entry devices must be ente
133. al program to uninstall COMPASS All installation files and registry updates are removed Data directories created by running COMPASS are not removed by uninstalling It is up to the user to manually remove these data directories The application removal program always displays a message indicating COMPASS was not completely removed when executed after new Data Files have been created Any file management tool such as Windows Explorer can be used to remove these data directories Page 5 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 6 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 3 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS for molbox is an application program intended to automate the test and calibration process to the extent supported by the available calibration hardware and appropriate for the DUT being tested COMPASS supports automated operation of DHI molbloc molbox transfer standards but can also be used with any type of flow measurement system from any manufacturer This feature allows COMPASS to be used systematically to provide consistent data formats and report generation for all of your flow calibrations COMPASS sets up and maintains setup requirements on devices under test DUTs see Section 8 and testing procedures see Section 9 to associate with DUTs This information is recalled to run tests Tests are run using the hardware that has been configured see Sectio
134. all text is used to copy the information to later paste it in another application or open document The selected text can also be deleted to clear an entire document of all text 16 3 3 FORMAT 16 3 31 FORMAT INSERT DATE TIME Insert Date Time adds the current system date and time to the active document according to the format specified in the Regional Settings of the Windows Control Panel The text is always entered at the current text insertion point 16 3 3 FORMAT INSERT FIELD KEY This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Z Insert Field Key displays the Field Insertion Tool which is used to embed links to COMPASS Data Files into report templates The toolbar icon displayed above or CTRL T are shortcuts to displaying this tool 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 170 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual embed a link using the field insertion tool place the cursor the report template at the desired location of the link Press CTRL T to invoke the Data Field Insertion Tool The tool appears over the top of the open report template The Data File fields available are sorted into field categories Select a lt Field Category gt by clicking on the desired category Then select a lt Field Name gt by clicking on the desired field name The scroll bars may be used to move up and down in the category and name lists Once the field name has been selected click the lt Insert g
135. alue entered specifies the number of leading characters to strip from the device response This is used to allow COMPASS to properly interpret the output when the response does not start with the output value This field can include any combination of delimiters and numerical space values For example a device might return the string Mass Flow 4 343 slm The actual output value for this example appears at position 11 Therefore ten leading characters need to be stripped prior to processing the string Alternatively if the colon following Pressure will always appear prior to the flow value could be entered as the leading character to strip In some cases both a delimiter and a number of characters to strip may be required For example if a remote device returns Range 1 4 34 volts NR 4 431 slm the number of characters in the volts output can change making it impossible to use a fixed length value for the number of spaces to remove to access the flow value To avoid this problem enter the text lt 4 gt as the leading characters to strip value This tells COMPASS to move to the second comma then increment four spaces to read the flow output value Only non numeric text can be used as a delimiter in the leading characters to strip field All numerical entries are assumed to represent the corresponding numerical value 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 148 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 13 24
136. am Instantaneous downstream pressure This value is corrected by of the Pressure current tare value Upstream Instantaneous upstream pressure This value is corrected by of the current Pressure tare value 6 6 3 PURGE FUNCTION See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Purge Section for a complete description and recommendations concerning use of the molbox purge function The molbox purge function is represented by the toolbar icon Use this function to purge the molbox of residual gases when flowing a new gas Before activating this function make sure a flow has been set When activated a prompt allows the entry of the desired purging time typically 30s should is sufficient However the actual purging time is dependent on the calibration gas and the volume of the system 6 6 4 LEAK TEST The molbox leak test function is represented by the toolbar icon See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Leak Test Section for a complete description of the molbox leak check functions and instructions on their use COMPASS uses the molbox System Leak Test The leak test takes 60s During this time the molbox embedded software monitors the pressure changes It then outputs a leak status based on the results Page 35 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 6 6 5 MODIFY molbox VALVE DRIVERS 12 This feature is represented by the toolbar icon The state of the
137. an select for COMPASS to make periodic flow control updates and you can close the control loop on either the reference flow or the DUT output see Section 9 5 6 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 24 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 5 1 7 5 1 6 3 RUN THE TEST Use Run Run Test to start the test sequence see Section 7 2 5 1 6 4 PLOT THE DATA Once the test is complete you can use the Plot options to product a plot of either Reference flow or DUT output versus point number see Section 12 4 EXAMPLE 7 How do I set up to use COMPASS to compare molbox molbloc flow to that of a piston prover or bell prover The flow output of the molbloc can be connected to the input of a piston prover or bell prover and then their flow indications can be compared This example assumes that the prover s flow indication is in mass flow units such as kg sec or volumetrically based mass flow units such as sccm This implies that the prover accessories include density correction hardware and software Volume or actual flow units such as accm or cf are NIT mass flow units When running this type of test take extra care to assure that the plumbing used for interconnection is leak free and that the inlet pressure to the molbloc is within its calibration limits 5 17 1 DUT DEFINITION SETUP Select the Setup DUT Header tab and select the DUT s process gas see Section 8 5 2 In this type of comparison the cali
138. and enter a name that easily identifies the current screen configuration All saved displays are available for instantaneous use by selecting the Display Select Custom Display menu Since not all run screens are available in each run mode it is best to select default displays created during the run mode This will insure that the default display selected will arrange the run screens as expected E OPTIONS molbox Grid Maintain Lists Initialize Test Run Test End Test Data File Display Default Run Display Run COMPASS Default Run DUT Run Dut Display Run Test Delta Only E Remove Display Selection Figure 76 Options Display Tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 134 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 50 Options Display Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Run molbox Select the default Run molbox run mode display from the list Realize that only the lt molbox Output gt and the lt Averaging gt run screens are available for display in this run mode Run screens other than these will not display regardless of the display mode selected drop down list box Run DUT Select the default Run DUT run mode display from the list Realize that only the lt molbox Output gt lt DUT Output gt lt Comparison Screen gt and the lt Averaging gt run screens are available for display in this run mode Run screens o
139. anual entry DUT is used the last output entry value displays until a new entry is made The errors are therefore meaningless between entries To change the display unit of measure click the value and select the desired unit from the list Error Rdg DUT percent of reading error see Section 19 4 Error DUTFS DUT percent of full scale error see Section 19 4 Set Error Rdg DUT percent of reading set point error If the measured set point is not available the nominal value is used see Section 19 3 Set Error DUTFS DUT percent of full scale set point error If the measured set point is not available the nominal value is used see Section 19 3 6 7 molbox OUTPUT RUN SCREEN If a molbox is set up as the active flow reference the molbox output run screen is an available choice The run screen displays a real time update of molbox output information The information in this run screen is direct from the molbox with no manipulation or calculations applied In fact no DUT specific information displays in this Run Screen The molbox Output run screen can be very useful for troubleshooting In Run molbox mode the molbox Output run screen displays flow in the unit of measure selected on the Units panel In all other run modes this flow is in the current molbox output unit Table 10 provides information on each field of the molbox Output run screen Always use the COMPASS lt mol
140. ardware Definition Edit Controller nn 115 Hardware Definition Auxiliary Data Devices 2 2 24 118 Hardware Definition Interface 120 Options molbox er ete peter e epe 122 Options Grid eiae tte etiem eee cd de reet iani ae e 124 Options Maintain Lists 126 Options Initialize Test 127 Options Run Test 3 20 0400 0000 128 Options End Test Tab 131 Options Data File Tab 132 Options Display 0 134 e ebat fadle edet 138 Data Plot Data File Screen 139 Plot Properties General 141 Plot Properties Subsets 142 Plot Properties Best Fit Tab 00000 142 Plot Properties Custom Plot 143 lt Initialization Commands Editor gt 146 Read Commands Editors 147 Set Commands Editor gt 148 Insert Special
141. asured or nominal set point If the measured set point is not available the nominal value is used see Section 8 5 4 19 4 SD DUT Q Standard deviation of the DUT flow over the averaging period This value is set to N A when less than two points are logged during the average DUT Pts The number of DUT measurements taken during the averaging period This number may not be the same from point to point and may not be equal to the lt Ref Pts value Systematic delays with the System Configuration and basic instrument response time make it possible for some instruments to communicate faster than others see Section 10 2 Minimum reference flow measured during the averaging period Max Ref Q Maximum reference flow measured during the averaging period SD Ref Q Standard deviation of the reference flow during the averaging period it Ref Pts The number of reference flow points measured during the averaging period This number may not be the same from point to point and may not be equal to the it DUT Pts value Systematic delays with the System Configuration and basic instrument response time make it possible for some instruments to communicate faster than others see Section 10 2 molbloc upstream pressure as measured by the molbox molbloc downstream pressure as measured by the molbox molbloc differential pressure across the molbloc as measured by the molbox If a molbox RFM with an active micro range is the refe
142. ata File tab see Section 11 8 Calibration Date Optional Text Entry The value entered should represent the next required calibration date for the device No special formatting is expected or checked in this field however entering the date in a consistent format including the full year month and day is recommended The value entered is logged in the run test Data Files and can be included in reports Set Range Required Drop Select the flow controller set point unit from the drop down list If the Set Units Down List Selection unit is not in the list type the unit into the list box If the current flow units are selected in the list the min max set point fields are automatically set to the min max flow range fields If the flow controller interface is lt Voltage Current gt the set point unit must be V mV A or mA Set Range Required Numeric Enter the lowest set point set point corresponding to the Min Min Set Entry Field Flow of the flow controller in the set point units specified immediately above If the set point units are the current flow units the Min Flows value is copied here and cannot be changed Set Range Required Numeric Enter the highest set point set point corresponding to the Max Max Set Entry Field Flow of the flow controller in the set point units specified above If the set point units are flow units the Max Flow value is copied here and cannot be changed Flow Range Unit Req
143. ata File s with the current template to generate the report s All formatting characteristics of the field key that are present in the report template are maintained during report generation The final report is automatically saved and loaded into the report Editor At this point the report file can be acted on like any other document within the report Editor Prior to using this option make sure the desired report template is selected by noting the name of the file on the bottom status bars Current Template field If no template displays or you wish to change the template use Format Select Template to select the desired template see Section 16 5 5 5 16 3 13 FILE EDIT TEMPLATE This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Edit Template is used to edit an existing template This can be used either to Page 165 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual change an existing template or to create a new template similar to an old template For example if an existing template contains a standard header footer and formatting it may be simpler to create a new template by editing an existing template and saving it to a new name rather than to start a new template from scratch The first step is to select the template file to edit using the Windows file selection tool that displays after this option is selected The selected template displays in the Report Editor Edit all constan
144. ata devices Up to 10 individual spy windows can display Page 32 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 6 6 CONTROL TOOLBAR This toolbar appears on the left of the main screen in Run molbox and Run DUT run modes Since Test Definitions control many of the control toolbar functions the toolbar is not available in Run Test mode Each of the tools provides a link to many of the feature supported in the Test Definition and by molbox Some toolbar selections trigger a new pop up with more selections specific to a single function These extended tool windows can be placed on any part of the screen but they cannot be scaled or tiled like the other run screens During tests the lt Tare gt lt Jog Flow gt and lt Enter Flow Datay gt panels are used to facilitate their respective functions Use the information in Sections 6 6 1 to 6 6 9 for specific information on how these tools function Right click the toolbar to display a popup menu of options to reposition the toolbar toolbar can reside on any side of the main program window Use the Toolbar menu to access the toolbar functions without a mouse Many toolbar functions contain shortcuts that can be accessed quickly from a keyboard Not all options are available in all run modes In Run DUT mode the DUT Definition controls many values preventing changes In some cases entire toolbar functions are disabled based on the DUT Definition Page 33 199
145. ated using this plot selection X Axis Data Select the data that will display along the X axis The text of the list box selection followed by units when appropriate will appear along the bottom of the plot Press the button next to the drop down list to change the text to associated with lt X Axis Data gt Y Axis Data Select the data that will display along the Y axis The text of the list box selection followed by units when appropriate will appear along the vertical axis of the plot Press the button next to the drop down list to change the text to associated with Y Axis Data gt 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 144 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 13 REMOTE INTERFACING 13 1 OVERVIEW The ability to communicate quickly and simply with a wide variety of instruments is one of the most important features of COMPASS Without this capability the benefits of automation could not be fully realized as data acquisition and control functions would still have to be performed manually This section provides information on COMPASS s facilities for interfacing with remote instruments This includes how commands are sent to instruments the formatting of responses troubleshooting tips and overall interface timing COMPASS supports remote communications over RS 232 and IEEE 488 interfaces In general initialization set and read command sets with up to 10 discrete commands per set can be issued to complete a desired
146. atically save any changed files preventing the need to make a selection for each file The prompt displays only after a changed file is encountered and more than one file is currently open 16 3 L10 FILE PRINT This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Print is used to print the current to any printer set up on the PC in use A printer setup window displays prior to printing allowing a printer to be selected and set up before printing The COMPASS Report Editor prints the document exactly as it is displayed within the Report Editor unless a printer specific issue overrides a document feature 16 3 11 FILE PRINT ALL Print All displays one printer setup dialog and prints all open documents according to the printer settings This feature is provided as a short cut to selecting the File Print option for each open file see Section 16 3 1 10 16 3 1 12 FILE EXIT Selecting Exit closes the report Editor 16 3 2 EDIT The Edit menu provides common word processor editing functions Many of these functions have several possible shortcuts The toolbar and short cut keystrokes provide direct access to many editing features All edit functions act on the current document only A right mouse click in any open document accesses a mini edit menu with the basic edit options 16321 EDIT UNDO This feature is represented by the toolbar icon E Undo is provided to undo the most recent e
147. atures and their functions Test Editor Tx Test record label est Bom x Viewing Test 8 24 1 gt Editing Test EN Figure 47 Test Definition Editor Toolbar Table 24 Test Definition Editor Toolbar Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Test record label This field is analogous to a file name The text entered should make the test easily distinguishable from other tests Up to 40 characters can be used in the field required text entry field PAN Do not use the following characters lt gt a or tab character These characters will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 11 8 Viewing Test Identifies the current relative sort position of the test in the Editor As the sort order changes this field also changes see Section 9 4 The notation is Current Test label Definition Total number of Test Definitions Editing Test Identifies the sort identification of a test that is being edited This field does not display when no edits have been made As the sort order changes this field also changes label see Section 9 4 Saves changes to an edited Test Definition This field is not available when no edits have been made Any test conflicts result in error messages when saving These conflicts A must be reso
148. available selections A selection on any of these tabs updates the display only Interface is not properly buffered by the operating system The RS 232 cable is not properly grounded The PC s RS 232 port is going bad The report template in use has a corrupted field COMPASS displays test and DUT Definitions in their respective Editors for viewing purposes only during test initialization and while a test is running An invalid character appears in the DUT serial number or ID field V 2 1 gt lor These characters cannot be used in file or directory naming in Windows The target directory for Data Files has restricted access or does not exist COMPASS always defaults to the root directory without generating an error when trying to create test Data Files Page 204 Make sure the gas supply is sufficient for the current test and that the flow controller has the proper performance Use the Setup Test Control tab to change the regulation limit in the test 9 5 6 Only the System Configuration is used to make a selection of hardware to be used by COMPASS The desired 488 reference DMM etc should all be selected in the System Configuration 10 2 This issue is typically associated with the Windows NT operating Systems f this is the case open Control Panel then select Ports Select the effected RS 232 port from the list then choose Settings Change the state of the FIFO
149. ay of the current point in the current test cycle even if the plot has been customized to not display the current cycle check box Uncheck this box to avoid automatic forced updating of the Data Grid and Plot run screens Page 125 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 11 4 MAINTAIN LISTS TAB The Tools Options Maintain Lists tab is used to delete unwanted items from the various lists that COMPASS adds to automatically To delete an item from a list select the item from the drop down list and click the corresponding Del button Details on the lists affected by the Maintain Lists tab fields are provided in Table 44 When list item deletions are complete click OK to save changes OPTIONS Lx molbox Grid Maintain Lists Initialize Test Run Test End Test Data File DUT Manufacturers 000000 1 1 DUT Models oC Process Gases MEE _ Output Units o _ Set Units gl _ Test Users 7 NEN Edit Flow Units Figure 71 Options Maintain Lists Tab Table 44 Options Maintain Lists Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION DUT Affects DUT manufacturers added in the lt DUT Definition Editor Manufacturers see Section 8 5 2 Manufacturers not manually added can be removed and drop down list box edited using the Process Gas Editor see Section 15 DUT Models Affects DUT models added in the lt DUT Definition Editor gt se
150. be included in COMPASS test definitions at the start of a test and or when a molbloc has been changed See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Purge Section Ready Not Ready Indication from a molbox of when flow is stable within the stability limit and below the flow Reynolds number limit A Ready condition is required in a test sequence for the test to continue and readings to be taken See also Stability Limit See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Ready Not Ready Section Reference Flow The device that will be used by COMPASS as the source of reference flow values when running a test the flow standard in the test the value of flow measured by the reference flow device Return to Start Execute the flow point sequence in reverse order Reference Pressure Transducer The pressure transducers used in molbox1 and molbox RFM are referred to as RPTs The difference between the minimum and the maximum DUT input or output Often referred to as full scale but more meaningful than full scale for DUTs whose minimum flow or output is not zero Stability Rate of change of flow in flow unit second 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 208 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Stability Limit A limit expressed in units of flow per second e g sccm second The stability limit is used as the molbox Ready Not Ready criterion Ready lt gt if rate is less than stability limit Not Ready gt 1 lt or gt lt i
151. box There are occasions in Test Definitions in which the target flow must be a flow value that exceeds the defined flow range of the DUT This option defines the maximum acceptable DUT overrange as a FS of the DUT flow range Entering a value that is too small can prevent the actual flow from being set when less accurate DUTs are used while a value that is too large may cause errors from the instrument controlling the flow This limit can be significant when flow regulation is active and COMPASS is actively controlling the flow see Section 9 5 6 For example if the DUT s Max Flow gt entry is 5 slm but 5 5 slm is required due to the current regulation setup an overrange limit of 5 will not allow flow to be properly regulated Alternatively if flow regulation is active but the flow supply is not adequate COMPASS will continue to increase the set command in an attempt to reach the desired flow If the supply is inadequate to reach the target flow the target flow will never be achieved and COMPASS will eventually send set point commands well beyond the upper limit of the DUT in an attempt to reach the target flow The DUT overrange limit prevents infinitely high set point commands in this situation The Manual DUT P and T Entry Method panel selections are used when running a DUT Definition whose Correction tab specifies a density correction see Section 8 5 3 and no gas pressure or temperature measuring devices are specified i
152. box User s Manual H 6 5 RUN TOOLBAR This toolbar is only active after one of the Run menu choices has been made Depending on the type of run mode some of the toolbar options may be disabled Unlike the control toolbar the run toolbar always displays at the top of the screen regardless of the current run state To use a tool click on the tool icon Right click the toolbar to display a popup menu of options to reposition the toolbar The toolbar can reside on any side of the main program window Use the Toolbar menu to access the toolbar functions without a mouse Many toolbar functions contain shortcuts that can be accessed quickly from a keyboard 65 1 RUN TOOLS Table 2 describes the run toolbar features not related to run screens Table 2 Tools Available On The Run Toolbar ICON DESCRIPTION Step Back Causes the current test point to be interrupted and the test point sequence to step back to the most recent set flow step Subsequent clicks cause the test to H step back one point for each click This tool is used to repeat points when needed The tool is enabled only in Run Test mode Step Forward Causes the current test point to be interrupted and the test point sequence to step forward to the next step in a point sequence This feature is available up to Step of the highest point executed see Section 6 3 The limitation is to ensure that data is logged at each point Most often this tool is used to
153. box MFC switchbox control and measurement channels The format is Set Channel Measurement Channels This field has no value if the molbox does not have the MFC control option and an MFC switch box is not in use Use the flow control icon in Run molbox mode to change the current channel K Factor 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Active DUT gas conversion value in use by the molbox In Run molbox mode this value can be changed using the flow conditions toolbar icon see Section 6 6 5 In all other run modes the active DUT determines the K factor In this case the value cannot be changed See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual K Factor Section for details on the use of K factors Page 44 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H LABEL DESCRIPTION Active molbox calibration gas In Run molbox mode this value can be changed using the flow conditions toolbar icon see Section 6 6 5 In all other run modes the active DUT determines the calibration gas In this case the value cannot be changed Stability Setting Active Ready Not Ready stability criterion in the molbox In Run Test mode this value is fixed by the Test Definition in use In all other run modes the stability setting can be changed using the flow conditions toolbar icon see Section 6 6 5 See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Ready Not Ready Section for additional information molbloc The serial number and molbo
154. box Output gt run screen instead of the molbox front panel to view real time molbox output information This display updates the raw output information from the molbox in Run DUT and Run Test modes In Run molbox mode the current unit of measure selected on the lt Control Toolbar gt is displayed instead of the raw values When molblocS does not have a valid back pressure ratio BPR the displayed flor is N A Page 43 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual molbox Output Output Figure 22 lt molbox Output gt Run Screen Table 10 lt molbox Output gt Run Screen Fields LABEL DESCRIPTION Red Green Circle Molbox flow Ready Not Ready indicator see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Ready Not Ready Section The circle is green when molbox flow is ready and red when not ready Instantaneous molbox flow rate of change in unit of flow per second Molbloc flow This value is the direct unmanipulated output of the molbox in all run modes except Run molbox In Run molbox the flow unit can be selected and the molbox output is converted to the currently selected flow unit In all operating modes except Run molbox the flow units available for this display are limited to the basic mass flow mass time units These are the base units COMPASS uses for its calculations Reynolds Number Reynolds number of the flow through the molbloc as calculated
155. box in the Flow Reference list Since the molbox will use an IEEE 488 interface make sure an IEEE 488 Card selection is made To streamline the setup the Default DUT RS232 Port can also be selected All other selections have no impact when running this example System Configuration items are only used as required by the test that is run When the System Configuration is complete there is no reason to change it unless a new DUT to be tested requires a different System Configuration Click the Close button to store the current System Configuration and return to the main program Reference saree ean tm DUTOupuDMM Reference Z Set point power supply Reference mobox 5 Set point DMM Reference mbox Frequency Measurement Pressure Measurement Temperature Measurement IEEE 488Cad ationalinstuments 2 Defaut DUT RS232 Pot feom Ges Figure 4 Example 1 System Configuration 5 1 1 3 RUN THE TEST Use Run Run Test to execute a test see Section 7 2 COMPASS will verify the interface of the reference molbox and determine which features it supports Select the desired DUT and Test1 in the test initialization see Section 7 2 1 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 16 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Next the lt Setup DUT gt screen displays for the final setup of the DUT serial number identification for DUT Profiles only and RS 232 settings Enter the
156. bration gas should be the same as the process gas Piston provers and or bell provers do not usually have gas conversion or K factors Select the Setup DUT Correction tab and ensure that None has been selected for the Gas Density Correction Type see Section 8 5 3 Select the Setup DUT Range tab and select or create the DUT s Flow Range and Output Range units these will be in units of mass flow such as sccm slm kg sec etc Enter the DUT s Flow Range and Output Range see Section 8 5 4 Select the Setup DUT Test tab and select the calibration gas see Section 8 5 6 5 17 2 TEST DEFINITION SETUP Select Setup Test Sequence tab and enter the test sequence parameters Set the Stability time and Dwell time to 0 seconds and Averaging Time to manual this will allow you to control and ensure that the prover is within its test stroke while the molbox is reading and averaging data see Section 9 5 4 Test Editor Testrecordlabel Default Manual Control i 5 X Viewing Test 4 Te gt l Points 4DUTFS TEE Points Sequence Tare Control Leak Test Purge Data a Stabiliy ZDUTFS to 0 PREN 3 50 14 Stability Time out s ep E E Tare molbox at selected points 71 8 100 17 8 fo Timed 7 7 18 Averaging Time 5 epee 8 41 LO 9 20 Readings Pt 1 10 2 Test Cycles 1 22 1 Figure 12 Example 7
157. bsequent tests will only require a selection of the desired DUT and Test Definitions The Run Test section of this manual has a more detailed explanation of the requirements to run a test in COMPASS see Section 7 2 Several COMPASS examples and frequently asked questions are in the Quick Tips section of this manual see Sections 4 5 These sections are also very useful in getting started When first running COMPASS make the minimum number of changes and modifications until you are familiar with the program The default values in all setup screens are designed for the most common COMPASS uses This will help to avoid confusion and setup conflicts as you develop experience in using COMPASS Select Setup DUT to create a DUT Definition see Section 8 2 A DUT that outputs an electrical signal such as V mV or mA will most likely be read using a digital multimeter DMM or the molbox analog option The DMM must be set up in the Hardware Definition before it will be available in the System Configuration see Section 10 3 4 The molbox analog option does not require any additional setup Whenever the flow reference is a molbox1 the analog option is automatically available in the System Configuration Select Setup Test to create a test script that describes flow points and other aspects of the testing procedure see Section 9 Select Setup Hardware to update the Hardware Definition of specific components available for us
158. by the molbox Upstream Pressure Pressure read by the molbox upstream pressure transducer Downstream Pressure Pressure read by the downstream molbox pressure transducer Differential Pressure The pressure drop across the molbloc that is currently being used by the molbox to calculate flow The differential pressure is the difference between the molbox upstream and downstream RPTs in molbox RFM it may be the measurement made by the microrange RPT The molbox determines the differential pressure and outputs it to COMPASS BPR is the back pressure ratio downstream pressure upstream pressure This field is present only when the reference is a molblocS The value displayed is either the measured ratio or N A when the value is not measured The molbox front panel BPR setting determines whether or not BPR is measured or if the 2 molbox RPTs are averaged Refer to the molbox operation and maintenance manual for Temperature Molbloc temperature as measured by the molbox from the average of the molbloc upstream and downstream PRT s Set Active molbox flow set point This value is used only in Run molbox mode if the molbox is equipped with the MFC control option Change the setting using the flow control toolbar icon see Section 6 6 8 Output Active molbox output As with the Set this value is used only in Run molbox mode if the molbox is equipped with the MFC control option Switchbox Mol
159. cation to initiate the DDE link Poke Data File names separated by a pipe character into the IbIDDE source to generate reports Poke refers to the technique of setting data in a DDE source using a DDE destination application Page 177 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual NOTES 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 178 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 17 HELP 17 1 OVERVIEW Help accesses COMPASS on line help Show Help opens the Help function to the Welcome screen from which Help functions can be accessed Search Help opens the Help function to a standard keyword search tool What s This help is available on all displays that contain a question mark in the top right hand corner control box To access this help first click the question mark This changes the cursor into a question mark that can be clicked on any field desired Information specific to the clicked field will display The What s This help mechanism is a quick and convenient way to learn more about COMPASS without directly accessing the manual What s This help is not designed to jump to other help locations To jump to specific help locations use the Show Help selection from the main Help menu Page 179 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual NOTES 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 180 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 18 DATA FILES 18 1 OVERVIEW
160. ch as ccm cfh or accm acfh Volume or actual flow units of measure are NOT mass flow units Very few flow measurements are made in these units even though the unit used may refer to volume there are important differences between volume or actual units and volumetrically based mass flow units such as sccm Before using volume or actual flow units be absolutely sure that this is in fact what you want See the Unit Section of the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual for complete information on different flow unit types COMPASS axxxx units correspond to volume or actual flow units in molbox Measuring actual or volume flow requires the actual pressure and temperature of the gas at the DUT to be known when a test is run Current gas pressure and temperature data is indispensable to the determination of flow in volumetric or actual flow units COMPASS supports different ways of acquiring gas pressure and temperature data including automatic data acquisition and manual entry 5 1 5 1 DUT DEFINITION SETUP Select the Setup DUT Header tab and specify the DUT s process gas see Section 8 5 2 Select the Setup DUT Range tab and select or create the DUT s Flow Range units these will be in units of flow such as accm or acfh and enter its Flow Range see Section 8 5 4 Enter the DUT s Output Range units and enter its Output Range 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 22 COMPASS for molbox
161. ctable starting and stopping at each point Averaging only occurs when reference and DUT output readings can be taken remotely As many readings as possible are taken during the averaging period The time value must be between 0 and 999s The number of repeated independent averages taken at each point Points are not reset or re tested for stability between averages Leave this value at one unless you want more than one complete averaged data values at each flow point COMPASS can run up to 10 test cycles in one test A test cycle includes setting and taking data at each of the flow points in the Points table When more than one test cycle is specified system leak testing and purging occurs only at the beginning of the first cycle Data from multiple cycles is included in a single Data File 9 5 5 TARE TAB The Test Definition Tare tab is used to specify how a new tare value should be activated and whether to tare at the molbloc upstream or downstream pressure The flow points at which the molbox should be tared are specified in the lt Points gt Table see Section 9 5 2 Taring is only applicable when a molbox is set up as the flow reference and it is set up to communicate remotely See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Tare Section for complete information and recommendations on taring molboxes Taring at every flow point yields the best data and should be considered if test execution time is not an issue The purpos
162. ction 8 5 2 The goal of the application is to allow users to add and maintain a list of DUT manufacturers with specific gas conversion factors often called K factors based on process gases and gas blends The gas conversion factor allows a DUT designed for a specific process gas to be calibrated with a different calibration gas Refer to the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual K Section for more details on gas conversion factors The Process Gas Editor is automatically installed with COMPASS The program can be run directly from the COMPASS program group or by using the Tools Process Gas Editor menu short cut All DUT manufacturer information created with the Process Gas Editor is stored and accessed by the COMPASS main program The information is used to automatically display gas conversion factors appropriate for the DUT manufacturer process gas and calibration gas selected in a DUT Definition DUT manufacturers that do not use or require K factors do not need the Process Gas Editor Instead select the New Manufacturer option in the Manufacturer list of the DUT Definition Header tab see Section 8 5 2 Manufacturers created in this way do not automatically display gas conversion factors When the program is active select a manufacturer from the list or use the Add button to create a new manufacturer Select an existing gas by using the Gas information for current manufacturer field The gas name symbol surr
163. d action button Del action button Rename action button Gas information for current manufacturer drop down list box Create Gas Blend action button Symbol text entry field Gas Name text entry field 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Select the name of the DUT manufacturer whose list of process gases is being updated This field can alo be used to create rename or delete DUT manufacturers Once the manufacturer has been selected all other fields and action buttons on the Process Gas Editor act on the information for the selected manufacturer Start defining the process gases for this manufacturer by typing the chemical symbol for the desired gas in the Process Gas Symbol field When the gas symbol is entered the Editor automatically fills in the other fields with whatever information is already available about the gas just entered The user may modify any of the fields When all the data is acceptable click the lt Record gt button Adds a new manufacturer to the list All items added will be available in the lt DUT Definition Editor gt in the COMPASS main program see Section 8 5 Use this button to remove the currently selected manufacturer from the list If a DUT with the deleted manufacturer already exists it will continue to function normally The side effect is that it will add the manufacturer back to the list but without automatic gas conversion factor support This is similar to using the Ad
164. d Manufacturer gt option in the DUT Definition Editor Displays a pop up window that allows the currently selected manufacturer name to be changed A list of stored gas information for the current manufacturer When a new item is selected the remaining fields of the Process Gas Editor are updated with the information specific to the selected gas Press this button to create a blended gas see Section 15 3 An abbreviated version of the Gas Name To create a new gas always start by entering the symbol first The full text name of the process gas Page 160 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE DESCRIPTION K Factor to N2 The gas conversion factor from the process gas to N2 numeric entry field K Factor to surrogate The gas conversion factor from the process gas to the selected surrogate gas numeric entry field Surrogate name A full text name of the surrogate gas text entry field Record Record the changes to the displayed process gas information When Record is pressed a new gas can be added or edited prior to saving the file Failure to press action button record will undo all changes made Delete Remove the current process gas from the DUT manufacturer The lt Gas information for current manufacturer gt selection determines which gas will be removed action button Save File Permanently saves all changes recorded in the Process Gas Editor If this button is
165. d identification value This type of DUT Definition does not require new entries during test initialization see Section 7 2 1 5 e DUT Profile Definitions are intended to define a general DUT type They do not include serial number and identification values DUT profiles are useful when several DUTs of the same type will be tested Instead of creating multiple DUTs all differing by serial number and or identification only use a DUT profile This type of DUT Definition requires that the DUT be identified during test initialization see Section 7 2 1 5 Access the DUT Definition Editor using the Setup DUT menu option When selected the last accessed DUT Definition displays in the DUT Definition Editor While in the Editor use the toolbar options to create edit view and delete DUTs see Section 8 5 1 Only one DUT can be edited at a time however other DUTs can be viewed prior to completing the changes on the DUT being edited The DUT scroll bar and the DUT Selector are available to make new DUT selections A flashing indicator displays the ID number of the DUT currently being edited This ID will change as the DUT sort order changes The edited DUT always displays in blue text in the DUT Selector see Section 8 4 Use these editing signals to locate the DUT if necessary DUT Definitions can be edited only when COMPASS is not in an active run mode If run mode is active all DUT fields and selection functions are disabled Page
166. d in the test s Data File Check this option to automatically create a report at the end of complete tests The report is generated using the last report template used The Test Complete options still display at the end of the test This option is enabled only when the Auto generate report after complete test gt option is enabled When this option is checked COMPASS will generate and print a report using the last selected report template Page 131 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 11 8 DATA FILE TAB The Tools Options Data File tab is used to set user preferences affecting the Data File dat which records the data from a test run see Section 18 The purpose of the Data File tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 49 When selections are complete click OK to save changes OPTIONS E3 Grid Maintain Lists Initialize Test Run Test End Test Data File Use long data file name format Write protect all complete data files Auto delete data files from incomplete tests Data file delimmiter Semi Colon v Root Data file directory JESSOFTWARE Comp_box Special Data Em Data file sub directory named by sei ial Number X Figure 75 Options Data File Tab Table 49 Options Data File Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Use long data file name format Check this option
167. default directory action button and file name These can be rewritten if desired View Test Data Used to review raw test data immediately following test completion without exiting the test completely This selection causes the Data File viewer to appear with the dat file from the test that has just completed open This is functionally equivalent to selecting Data View Data File with the Data File from the test that has just completed see Section 12 2 Close the Data File viewer using the control box X or press Esc to return to the Test Complete selections action button Generate Report Used as a shortcut to generate a test report immediately following test completion The COMPASS Report Editor merges the Data File with the last used report template to generate a report Multiple individual reports can automatically be created with the selected template if the proper report Editor options are selected see Section 16 3 3 4 The report Editor displays each report generated This is functionally equivalent to running the COMPASS Report Editor as a standalone application and selecting the File Generate Report option see Section 16 3 1 2 action button Re Run Test Used to re run the exact same test under the exact same conditions without initialization prompts or selections This feature does not overwrite the current Data action button File it creates a new Data File Plot Test Data
168. diting operation within the Report Editor Undo support in the COMPASS Report Editor does not provide the ability to undo several previous steps Only the most recent step per open document is maintained in the undo buffer As a result the first time Undo is activated the most recent step is undone The next time it is activated it will Redo this step because that is what is required to undo the last action This is essentially a toggle between undo and redo 16 3 22 EDIT CUT This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Cut deletes the current selection and copies it to the Windows clipboard 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 168 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual This information be pasted into other applications or other locations within the COMPASS Report Editor 16 3 23 EDIT COPY This feature is represented by the toolbar icon EST Copy copies the current selection to the Windows clipboard without first deleting it information can be pasted into other applications or other locations within the COMPASS Report Editor 163 24 EDIT PASTE This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Paste copies the contents of the Windows clipboard to the current cursor location in the document 16 3 25 EDIT FIND This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Find provides the ability search for specific text within a report or report template En
169. down list alphabetically Use the Tools Options Maintain Lists tab to delete unwanted models from the list see Section 11 4 DUT Definitions that contain a deleted model are still valid The default Data File directory naming preference can use this entry to create the data directory for Date Files created when this DUT is run see Section 11 8 Write in the DUT serial number DUT Profiles do not include a serial number during the creation of the DUT The default Data File directory naming preference can use this entry to create the data directory for Date Files created when this DUT is run see Section 11 8 Write a DUT identification if desired This field can be used for internal tracking of DUTs or to record other information Any combination of information can be entered into the ID field The value entered will be included in the test Data Files and can be included in reports The default Data File directory naming preference can use this entry to create the data directory for date files created when this DUT is run see Section 11 8 Profile Type DUT Definitions do not include a device ID The process gas is the gas with which the DUT is intended to operate in its actual application This is a required field since it is used to determine the default gas conversion factor for the DUT see Section 15 1 If a gas is not included in the drop down list the gas can be added in two ways 1 If the selected Manufacturer wa
170. down list box Reference Temperature numeric entry field drop down list box Reference Pressure numeric entry field drop down list box Unit Multiplier check box Table 55 lt Flow Unit Editor gt Panel Fields DESCRIPTION When the editor is in view mode the list of currently supported flow units is in the drop down list The settings for each flow unit appear in the corresponding portions of the flow unit editor When the editor is in edit mode the field is disabled when the lt User Defined Flow Unit gt option is not checked In this case COMPASS displays the default flow unit name based on the current lt Base Unit gt If a user defined unit is being set up the name of the user defined unit should be entered in this field No two flow units can share the same Flow Unit value When checked the lt Unit Multiplier gt value is active and the lt Flow Unit gt field represents the manually entered flow unit name If this option is not checked COMPASS uses the default flow unit name based on the lt Base Unit gt Flow units be renamed by checking this option and leaving the lt Unit Multiplier gt equal to 1 This enables the lt Flow Units gt field for input A list of standard mass and volume or actual flow units are selectable in this list All user defined flow units are derived from these units Volumetrically based mass flow units such as sim and sccm require reference pressu
171. down list should be used to determine how the required entry gas constant information is entered the event the Process Gas is also a density correction COMPASS supported Calibration Gas all gas specific entries are disabled and is used COMPASS will automatically calculate the gas density based on the pressure and temperature data entered The choices are e Molecular Mass g mol The entry field should contain the molecular mass in g mol units COMPASS automatically enters this value when the process gas is also a supported calibration gas Specific Gravity The entry field should contain the dimensionless specific gravity value for the process gas This value is the ratio of the gas density in standard conditions to the density of air in standard conditions Density kg m The entry field should contain the density of the gas the specified normal operating pressure and temperature conditions COMPASS will not modify this value when applying the density correction In the previous cases COMPASS must calculate the density using the entered information prior to applying the density correction Refer to Section 19 5 for calculation details concerning this parameter A In all cases make absolutely sure that the gas constant value entered is in the proper units and corresponds to the current lt Process Gas gt Failure to due so will result in erroneous data Process Gas Specifies the com
172. dows file browser appears with the default directory set to the root Data File directory see Section 18 3 Selecting a Data File causes that file to be opened and displayed in the COMPASS Data Viewer screen Data Viewer provides no formatting It displays only there are no options to edit and or save Data Files using this feature The name and directory path of the Data File currently being viewed are shown at the top of the window While viewing a Data File a toolbar on the top left of the display is available for new file selection printing and displaying the test data in a grid format The function of each toolbar option is described below Used to pick a different Data File to view This function is disabled when the Data File is being viewed from the lt Test Complete gt screen see Section 7 2 3 Used to print the Data File that is being viewed using the standard Windows print function and the current default printer EE Toggles the display of the Data Grid run screen see Section 6 7 5 If the Data File is incomplete this option is disabled Page 137 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual COMPASS for molbox ver 4 00 0 20000223 1 4 07 54 Reference Manufacturer Model SN ID CalD ate Flow Unit molbloc SN molboc Range DH Instruments Inc molbox1 111 Demo N A kg s 1310 30 00 slm DUT Manufacturer Model SN ID Label Min Flow Max Flow Flow
173. e The text will display on the Run DUT window when the device is selected and is also listed as a column header in the data grid The text entered text entry is logged in the data file and is available in reports Auto poll Check this box to continuously read the auxiliary device when activated When output this option is not checked the device is read only to log data check box Log output as Instrument outputs that are non numeric in nature should use this option This text prevents COMPASS from attempting to convert the output into a number When this option is not checked the output is converted into a number and averaged check box just like any other automated device output 10 3 8 INTERFACE TAB The Setup Hardware Interface tab is used to set up the IEEE 488 and DeviceNet card s that the computer running COMPASS can use for communication The panel allows the address of a selected interface card to be entered COMPASS supports Capital Equipment Corporation CEC and National Instruments IEEE 488 cards and SST and National Instruments DeviceNet cards Select the actual interface card to use in the System Configuration Setup System see Section 10 2 The Card Type pull down provides the choice of interface card manufacturer Clicking on the Card Address field causes an address entry pop up to be displayed Only one address per card type is supported This field represents the address of the
174. e Tools Options Grid tab see Section 6 7 5 and select the appropriate column headings For tests using gas density corrections the proper reference flow value to use is Ref Q DUT Cond reference flow at DUT conditions It is the adjusted reference flow value after making corrections for the effect of density changes on the DUT This is the value of the flow that would be going through the DUT if it were currently at its normal operating conditions In other words this is the flow value that would produce the current DUT output if the DUT were at its normal operating conditions Page 27 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Ref Q in the data grid is the reference flow expressed in the DUT flow units without any Gas Density Correction applied This is the true value of the flow that is currently going through the DUT This value is interesting because it shows the magnitude of the correction being applied due to the difference between current gas pressure and temperature conditions and the DUT s normal operating conditions Req Q should NOT be used as the reference flow value in this example When Gas Density Correction is being applied the Ref Q DUT Cond value is equal to the Ref Q value Therefore Ref Q DUT Cond can be used as the reference flow for all tests in both the Data Grid and Report Editor 5 1 8 5 RUN THE TEST Generally in this type of
175. e see Section 9 5 2 Lists the flow points tare points purge points and molbloc change points included in the test procedure Test points can be edited in the table or using the autofill feature under the Points tab Points Tab see Section 9 5 3 Provides a short cut method for filling in the flow Points table e Sequence Tab see Section 9 5 4 Defines modifies test point execution aspects including dwell time averaging time number of test cycles and reference resolution e Tare Tab see Section 9 5 5 Determine the tare pressure upstream or downstream and whether tare occurs automatically or waits for operator confirmation e Control Tab see Section 9 5 6 Specifies how flow will be controlled when the test is run e Leak Test Tab see Section 9 5 7 Determines whether a leak test will be included in the test procedure and defines the leak test parameters e Purge Tab see Section 9 5 8 Determines whether purging is included in the test procedure 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 82 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Data Tab see Section 9 5 9 Defines what data is collected during tests 9 5 1 TOOLBAR All fields above the display tab on the Test Definition Editor are considered part of the toolbar The toolbar not only identifies which test is active but also provides tools to create delete save restore identify and select tests Table 24 identifies the toolbar fe
176. e DUT and or in its calibration report Enter the pressure value and select the pressure unit of measure Note that the pressure value is an absolute pressure not a gauge pressure Gas density is a function of absolute pressure If the DUT normal operating pressure is specified as a gauge pressure add standard atmospheric pressure of 101 325 kPa 14 696 psi to determine absolute pressure Refer to Section 19 5 for calculation details concerning this parameter If the DUT normal operating pressure is not specified at all consider using standard atmospheric pressure or the absolute operating pressure at which the DUT is typically used if you know it The normal operating temperature of the DUT This value is provided by the DUT manufacturer It may be marked on the DUT and or in its calibration report Enter the temperature and select the corresponding units of measure Refer to Section 19 5 for calculation details concerning this parameter If the DUT normal operating temperature is not specified at all consider using 20 C or the operating temperature at which the DUT is typically used if you know it Page 70 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H FEATURE DESCRIPTION Process Gas and The currently selected lt Process Gas gt is the process gas specified in the lt Header gt tab Gas Constant see Section 8 5 2 and cannot be changed here The gas constant in this panel must correspond to the process gas The drop
177. e DUT for DUTs that specify a Gas Density Correction Type in the DUT Definition Correction tab see Section 8 5 3 or when a Test definition has the DUT pressure option checked on the Data tab see Section 9 5 9 The drop down list choices are created using the Pressure tab in the Hardware Definition see Section 10 3 4 If a molbox is selected as the Flow Reference molbloc upstream pressure and molbloc downstream pressure are choices on this list There are no circumstances in which a selection is required If a selection is present COMPASS will attempt to use the specified device to measure the absolute pressure of the gas at the DUT when applicable If no automated pressure measurement device is available select lt Manual gt Ay molbox upstream or downstream pressure can only approximate the pressure of the gas at the DUT since due to the flow in the system the pressure at the molbloc and at the DUT cannot be identical Keep this in mind when estimating the uncertainty on the DUT pressure Page 101 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE DESCRIPTION Temperature This is the device used to automatically read the temperature of the gas at the DUT for DUTs Measurement that specify a Gas Density Correction Type in the DUT Definition Correction tab see Section 8 5 3 or when a Test definition has the DUT temperature option checked on the Data tab see Sec
178. e DUT set point span to determine the required set point This calculation is used regardless of the state of the DUT s Density Correction gt selection see Section 8 5 3 The density correction is applied to the reference flow see Section 19 5 The procedure for converting from the DUT flow unit to the DUT output unit is identical to the conversion to the set point unit In fact all conversions between the DUT flow output and set point follow the same procedure The only requirement is that the appropriate span and minimum value be substituted into the equation D on Q min Q span Spur Q X ndi 35 us VARIABLE DESCRIPTION Proportion of the DUT flow span based on the measured DUT flow Current DUT flow Qu DUT flow range span as determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum flow output values in the DUT Definition Omi DUT minimum flow output defined in the DUT Definition DUT minimum set point defined in the DUT Definition minimum set DUT minimum set point defined in the DUT Definition defined in the DUT Definition Um DUT set point span as determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum set points in the DUT Definition Calculated DUT set point 19 4 DUT ERRORS The DUT error expresses the difference between the DUT reading and the reference flow at a flow point in a test Errors are calculated in four different ways 9eReading DUTFS Reading Set Point and DUTFS
179. e Section 8 4 The notation is Current DUT Total label number of DUTs Editing DUT Identifies the sort identification of a DUT that is being edited This field does not display unless a DUT is being edited As the sort order changes this field also changes see label Section 8 4 Saves changes to an edited DUT Definition This button is not active when no edits have been made Any DUT conflicts result in error messages when saving These conflicts must be resolved before saving can be completed toolbar button Creates a new DUT Definition with default information see Section 8 2 Copies the contents of the current DUT Definition to a new DUT Definition The lt Record Label gt of the copied DUT includes the text Copy This is the only difference between the original DUT Definition and the copy Make sure the new DUT is properly edited before saving toolbar button Restore Restores a DUT Definition that is being edited to the last saved state Use this feature to abandon edits made to a DUT before saving If a new DUT was created using the lt New gt option the restore button is nonfunctional toolbar button 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 66 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H FEATURE DESCRIPTION Deletes the current DUT Definition A message prompt for confirmation displays prior to removing the DUT Definition record toolbar button Open Select Di
180. e Section 8 5 2 drop down list box Process Gases Affects process gasses added manually when a manually entered manufacturer is selected see Section 8 5 2 Process gases not manually added can be removed drop down list box and edited using the Process Gas Editor see Section 15 Output Units Affects output units added manually in the lt DUT Definition Editor gt see Section 8 5 4 drop down list box Set Units Affects set units added manually in the lt DUT Definition Editor see Sections 8 5 4 8 5 9 drop down list box Test Users Affects user IDs added manually in response to the Enter User ID pop up or Run Test mode see Section 7 2 1 6 drop down list box Edit Flow Units Activates the Flow Unit Editor see Section 14 action button 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 126 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 11 5 INITIALIZE TEST TAB The Tools Options Initialize Test tab is used to set user preferences affecting the initialization portion of test execution see Section 7 2 1 5 The test initialization steps can be turned ON or OFF to avoid repeating undesired or unnecessary steps each time a test is run The panel lists the different steps of test initialization in order of execution Clicking on the check box corresponding to a step turns it ON or OFF ON if box checked OFF is box is blank The purpose of the Initialize Test tab fields and settings as well a
181. e Section 8 5 9 e Frequency see Section 10 3 4 Defines and stores frequency counters These are the devices that are available in the System Configuration Frequency Measurement drop down list and be used by COMPASS to read Frequency output type DUTs see Section 8 5 8 e Pressure see Section 10 3 4 Defines and stores absolute pressure measuring devices These are the devices that are available in the System Configuration Pressure Measurement drop down list and can be used by COMPASS to read the gas pressure at the DUT see Section 8 5 3 e Temperature see Section 10 3 4 Defines and stores temperature measuring devices These are the devices that are available in the System Configuration Temperature Measurement drop down list and can be used by COMPASS to read the gas temperature at the DUT e Flow Controller see Section 10 3 6 Defines and stores flow controllers used to control the test flow The controllers can be selected in the Test definition see Section 9 5 6 or during the initialization process of Run DUT see Section 7 4 e Interface see Section 10 3 8 Selects the IEEE 488 and DeviceNet card addresses for the card installed in the computer running COMPASS The default values should function in the majority of cases 10 3 1 TOOLBAR A toolbar is present on all Hardware Definition tabs with the exception of the IEEE 488 tab The functions on the toolbar are applied to the Hardware Def
182. e and operation vary depending on whether the DUT Definition being run is an Individual DUT or a DUT Profile and on the DUT s read and set type see Sections 8 5 2 8 5 8 8 5 9 Page 55 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 2 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual If the DUT Definition is a DUT Profile the screen sets up with blank information in the serial number and identification fields At least one of these fields must be completed prior to closing the window This window displays regardless of the state of the setup DUT option in Tools Options Initialize Test Select DUT gt see Section 11 5 If the DUT read or set type is HS 232 or IEEE 488 the default communications settings for the selected interface type display in the interface field see Sections 8 5 8 8 5 9 If the interface is IEEE 488 enter the numerical IEEE 488 address If the interface is RS 232 click the field to select the RS 232 settings When both set and read share the same interface type a change to the read interface automatically makes the same change to the set interface Changes to the set interface do not automatically update the read interface It is therefore possible for the set and read interfaces to be different This is an atypical use of this feature but it is supported If the DUT read or set type is neither RS 232 nor IEEE 488 the interface description contains the text representing the type of interface to use This can be lt Voltage Cu
183. e by COMPASS see Section 10 3 This includes setting up the molbox remote interface as well as any other peripheral devices needed to run the DUT This option should be used to set up a DMM power supply pressure device temperature device and any flow controllers that may be used to control the flow of non flow controlling DUT s Once these entries are made there is no need to access the Hardware Definition unless a change in one of these devices occurs O Select Setup System to set up the System Configuration of specific instruments that will be used by COMPASS to measure reference flow pressure temperature analog output and provide analog power Section 10 2 Not all selections are mandatory Only hardware specifically needed to run the test must be selected at any one time Select Run Run Test 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 8 4 4 1 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual QUICK TIPS HOW DO 1 Set up and run a test Create a Test Definition to define the test procedure see Section 9 Create a DUT Definition to define a device under test see Section 8 Configure the test hardware to be used to run the test see Section 10 Run test see Section 7 2 Display the flow unit want on the molbox1 or molbox RFM front panel display during COMPASS operation The various COMPASS run screens rather than the molbox display should be used to obtain molbox output information COMPASS
184. e gt screen see Section 7 2 3 All COMPASS Data Files dat will automatically generate a report in the report editor using the current report template All other files automatically open for editing in the rep Report Editor 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 176 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 16 4 2 COMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS COMPASS uses command line arguments and DDE Dynamic Data Exchange to generate reports in the Report Editor after the completion of a test Running the Report Editor with a command line of Data File names separated by the pipe character generates a separate report for each Data File using the current report template The command line is accessed using the shortcut target property of an icon in Windows Familiarity with creating and editing Windows icons is required to use this feature Refer to the Windows documentation and Help for details 16 4 3 DDE DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE The COMPASS Report Editor has an object that acts as a DDE source that can be changed to generate a report or open documents To simplify the DDE exchange the Report Editor acts as a source instead of a destination to avoid the requirement for a user setup in the Report Editor The three basic requirements to establish a DDE link are the application name link topic and link item These values respectively correspond to COMPASS Report Editor mdiReprt and IDIDDE Use these values with the DDE destination appli
185. e of the Tare tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 28 Page 89 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Points Sequence i Control Leak Test Purge Data Wait for lt Enter gt to tare Iv Pressure Downstream Figure 51 Test Definition Editor Tare Tab Table 28 Test Definition Editor Tare Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Wait for If checked COMPASS waits for a user response before proceeding with the tare Enter to tare procedure If not checked COMPASS automatically executes the tare heck b sequence and activates the new tare value without operator intervention In both check box cases the lt Tare gt panel is displayed with a real time update of molbox tare information see Section 6 6 2 Do not check this option if you wish to run a completely automated test without operator intervention Tare Pressure Select whether the Upstream or lt Downstream gt molbloc pressure should be used for taring COMPASS automatically adjusts the molbox valves to connect to the selected tare pressure The tare pressure should be the pressure that remains the most stable during the test Generally this is the upstream pressure if the molbloc is upstream of the DUT and the downstream pressure if the molbloc is downstream of the DUT drop down list selection 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc
186. e specified in the DUT Definition see Section 8 5 5 s Reference flow did not meet the flow stability criterion within the stability timeout specified in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 4 S At least one unstable reading was recorded during the averaging time see Section 9 5 4 t A tare occurred view results in the lt Tare gt columns see Sections 9 5 2 9 5 5 M The reference molbloc was changed The new molbloc information is in the lt molbloc gt column see Section 9 5 2 L Leak test failure after a molbloc change see Section 9 5 2 9 5 7 P Purge failure after a molbloc change see Section 9 5 2 9 5 8 E An interface error occurred during the averaging cycle Generally this indicates a reading could not be made on the reference flow device Stab Time Time elapsed to reach valid flow stability within the stability criterion specified in the Test Definition Sequence tab see Section 9 5 4 If a stability time out occurred the value displays as N A Avg Time The amount of time over which the data was averaged see Section 9 5 4 For tests that specify a fixed averaging time variances in this value are a result of systematic delays in the current System Configuration see Section 10 2 Ideally the averaging times are always the same however it is possible for the averaging time to end just as a new command is issued to a supported instrument The average will not complete until this value is returned
187. ecute a test defined by a Test Definition see Sections 8 9 Test execution is divided into three sequential parts Test Initialization see Section 7 2 1 Sets up the molbox interface selects the DUT and Test Definition to run and enters user ID Many of the sequential steps of test initialization can be turned ON or OFF using the Tools Options Initialize Test tab see Section 11 5 Run Test see Section 7 2 2 Runs purge if included and leak test if included followed by the test flow points taking data at each point based on the test data selections The details of how a test runs are defined in the Test Definition see Section 9 Certain aspects of how a test runs can be customized using the Tools Options Run Test and End Test tabs see Sections 11 6 11 7 End Test see Section 7 2 3 Presents the Test Notes screen to record test specific notes and the Test Complete screen with various test conclusion options Certain aspects of the test conclusion can be customized using the Tools Options End Test tab see Section 11 7 7 2 1 TEST INITIALIZATION Test initialization is the first part of test execution With the exception of Step 6 below all the sequential steps of test initialization can be turned ON or OFF using the Tools Options Initialize Test tab see Section 11 5 Test initialization proceeds as follows Initialize molbloc molbox see Section 7 2 1 1 If the reference s
188. ecuting cycle 7 the results of cycle 7 will not appear in the plot unless cycle 7 is selected using the Plot Properties panel Z E SOFTWARE Comp_box Special Data Testi xi eReading Error vs Reference Flow Cycle 3 0 5 00 5 5 a 8 15 G 20 2 5 3 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 25 3 0 Reference Flow slm 0 00C Figure 26 lt Data Plot gt Run Screen 6 7 SPY WINDOWS A spy window exists for each instrument interfaced with COMPASS Use the lt Spy Window gt toolbar icon to determine which window s are displayed see Section 6 7 7 The spy window is the only run screen that is not sizeable The window is actually a background display As a result if the window is visible and the COMPASS main screen is selected the spy window will return to the background 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 48 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Spy windows are provided by COMPASS to troubleshoot or analyze remote communications The caption of the spy window contains the instrument name and interface being spied on Use the information in the lt Command gt Raw Response and COMPASS Uses fields to determine if COMPASS is properly configured for the remote device The command response information is updated real time as long as the interface is open See Section 13 1 for details on the remote interface concepts used by COMPASS See Temperature Measurement RS232 1 2400 E 7 1
189. ed Test Definition and the DUT When conflicts are detected error and warning messages are displayed The test selection screen contains the core information about the Test Definitions available which may be helpful in selecting the test to run Double click a Test Definition selection or press OK to accept the currently selected Test Definition Press View Test to display the Test Definition Editor loaded with the information of the currently selected Test Definition Close the window using the control box to abort the test completely Select Test x Test Label Ponts Control 2 Cycles w Regulation Default Output Unit TEst P amp T NO DAQ Quick Test w bloc change Reg Test SCCM Funit Test Figure 31 lt Select Test gt Tool Page 54 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H When lt View Test gt is pressed the Test Definition Editor displays loaded with the currently selected Definition The test cannot be modified using this pop up but all the characteristics can be viewed by clicking on the appropriate tabs Use the Test Definition selection tools in the Test Definition Editor to view other tests Press lt OK gt to accept the displayed Test Definition and continue the test initialization process Close the Test Definition Editor using the control box X to abort the test initialization Test Selector Test record label ogTest Viewing Test 3 13 ET e Paints zDU
190. eene nenne 149 RS232 Settings Panel deed e de dde lae e e dae 150 Remote Communications 151 Flow Unit Editor 154 Unit COnVerterzus uote i red eae ea 156 Process Gas Editor Tool sessi 160 Create Gas Blend 162 Page ix 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Figure 93 COMPASS Report 164 Figure 94 Finds Panel 169 Figure 95 Field Insertion Tool 171 Figure 96 Multi Cycle Data File Options Panel sss 172 Figure 97 Page Setup 5 173 Figure 98 Report Editor Main 173 Figure 99 COMPASS Report Editor Font Format 174 Figure 100 COMPASS Report Editor 175 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page x COMPASS for molbox User s Manual USER REGISTRATION COMPASS Flow Calibration Software Please fill out this registration sheet and return it to DH Instruments Registering as a user will allow us to contact you with important information about COMPASS including product upgrades possible recalls and product announcements USER CONTACT Na
191. eens the grid display is scalable However the individual grid columns do not automatically scale as the borders of the grid display are scaled Instead click and hold the separator border between columns or rows and adjust the scale as desired Spacing between columns is stored by COMPASS for display consistency between runs As a test progresses the current point is automatically highlighted and selected in the grid Use the options on the Tools Options Grid tab to prevent the automatic selection of the current test point see Section 11 3 When automatic selection is on if the grid is scrolled to the top to view points taken earlier in the test completion of a new point will force the grid back to the last point The type of data and the ordering of data in the grid can be customized by using the Tools Options Grid tab see Section 11 3 Any or all of the different data items logged during a test can be displayed at run time in the lt Data Grid gt run screen The order of points logged in the Data File is not affected by the grid display By default COMPASS displays six frequently used columns lt Reference Q DUT Cond gt lt DUT Out gt lt DUT Q gt lt Rdg Error 96FS Error and Status The Data View Data File option always displays all data columns in the embedded grid see Section 12 2 View this display to get an idea of how the grid would display if all test data were included in the grid during
192. em menu option to display the System Config form see Section 10 2 First select the molbox as the Reference This automatically adds a Reference molbox gt option to the Set Point Power Supply Set Point DMM gt and DUT Output DMM lists Select Reference molbox gt in all lists If it were desired to set with the molbox but measure with a DMM the DMM should be selected in the lt DUT Output DMM list 5 1 2 3 RUN THE TEST Use Run Run Test to start a test sequence Select the DUT just created and the desired Test Definition when prompted There is no interface selection required when setting up the DUT interface during the test initialization 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 18 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 5 1 3 EXAMPLE 3 How do I use my HP34401A DMM to measure the DUT output The HP34401A is a popular high accuracy Hewlett Packard multimeter that has an IEEE 488 and RS 232 interface To read a voltage from this DMM the command MEAS VOLT DC must be issued This example demonstrates the basic requirements of setting up a DMM for DUT data acquisition in the Hardware Definition 5 1 3 1 DUT DEFINITION SETUP The only requirement for DUT to be tested using an external DMM is that the output type of the DUT be lt Voltage Current gt in the Read tab of the DUT Definition see Section 8 5 8 5 1 3 2 DMM CONFIGURATION SETUP Use Setup Hardware then select the DMM t
193. en the output type is also RS 232 see Section 8 5 8 See Section 13 3 concerning RS 232 communications IEEE 488 The DUT flow setpoint command is an ASCII string it receives over its IEEE 488 interface If lt IEEE 488 gt is the Set Point Type selection the lt IEEE 488 address gt of the DUT must be specified correctly When tests are run a valid IEEE 488 card must be specified in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 The Set tab lt Initialization Commands will be issued during run mode initialization then the Set Commands will be issued as needed to set the flow Responses to set commands are not used or handled by COMPASS By default the lt IEEE 488 Address and the lt Initialization Commands are the same as those set up in the DUT Definition Read tab Output Type when the output type is also IEEE 488 see Section 8 5 8 See Section 13 4 concerning IEEE 488 communications See Section 13 for information on COMPASS remote communications Initialization These are the commands needed to initialize a DUT whose Set Point Type is RS 232 or Commands 488 conditional drop Click the lt Edit gt button to display the lt Remote Command Editor gt form see Section 13 2 down list action Enter the desired commands then close the form These commands will be issued during the button initialization process of Run DUT and Run Test run modes when the DUT lt Set Point Type gt is RS 232 or IEE
194. er the points have been filled in Making a selection has no affect until Auto Fill is pressed Clicking Auto Fill causes the test point table to clear and fills in the table with the points calculated from the Auto Fill instructions Starting Point Ending Point Step Value Ascending Descending Points If the values are such that the distance from starting point to ending point is not an even multiple of the step value the last step value is adjusted to end exactly on the ending point Points set up by Auto Fill can be edited directly in the Points table and new points tares and or molbloc changes can be inserted at any point using the Points table Insert button see Section 9 5 2 Clicking Clear at any time causes all entries in the test point table to clear Page 87 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 9 5 4 SEQUENCE TAB The Test Definition Sequence tab is used to specify details of how the test points of a test will execute see Section 7 1 This includes defining dwell and data reading parameters as well as the number of times to run the test number of cycles Note that the order of the fields of the sequence tab follows the order of execution of the different steps of each flow point when a test is actually run The purpose of the Sequence tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 27 P
195. er to Section 13 for information related to remote interface setup When tests are run the manufacturer model serial number identification and calibration date of each Hardware Definition used are logged in the Data File and are available for reports see Section 18 4 It is critical to specify the proper unit of measure when a unit is requested for a device Failure to identify the unit correctly will result in erroneous data Power Supplies and DMMs can have independent setups for both volt V and current A unite at the same time COMPASS will automatically use the correct setup when running 10 3 3 REFERENCE TAB The Setup Hardware Reference tab is used to manage the flow reference Hardware Definitions that are included in the System Configuration Flow Reference drop down list see Section 10 2 The Reference tab provides a list of the flow reference Definitions available displays complete information on the selected Definition and allows the selected Definition to be edited or a new Definition to be created To select a reference Definition to view single click on the reference name and serial number in the List display panel upper left hand corner To edit an existing reference Definition double click on the reference device listing or click on the Edit toolbar function with the desired reference Definition highlighted Double clicking the reference listing clicking on the Edit toolbar functi
196. erface selection is IEEE 488 the IEEE 488 Address Address entry field is shown When creating a new Definition the IEEE 488 address is ditional set to the default address 10 The address can be edited directly in the entry conditiona field entry field Communications Clicking on the Communications Test button causes COMPASS to attempt to Test communicate with the device using the current device interface settings If communication with the device is successful a message confirming that the device was detected is displayed if communications cannot be established an error message is displayed action button 10 3 4 DMM FREQUENCY PRESSURE TEMPERATURE TABS The Setup Hardware tabs for DMM Frequency Pressure and Temperature are identical except for the drop down list of output units The DMM Frequency Pressure and Temperature tabs are used to manage the Hardware Definitions of specific devices that are included in the System Configuration lt DUT Output DMM gt lt Set point DMM gt lt Frequency Measurement gt lt Pressure Measurement gt and Temperature Measurement gt drop down lists see Section 10 2 Each of the tabs provides a list of the existing Hardware Definitions for that type of device displays complete information on the Definition allows the selected Definition to be edited or a new Definition to be created To select a Definition to view single click on it
197. erface connects two devices in a full duplex fashion so that both devices can talk simultaneously The connection requires that the RS 232 receive line of one device is connected to the transmit line of the second device and visa versa In addition to this connection some devices require the connection of handshaking lines to signal the beginning and the interface conversation To set up an RS 232 instrument an RS 232 cable must be connected between the instrument and the computer The port on the computer must be specified along with the settings of the remote instrument The computer RS 232 port must be specified and the settings of the port must be adjusted to the settings of the remote instrument COMPASS provides setup features to facilitate this step Refer to the instrument s manual to determine how to retrieve the RS 232 settings 13 3 1 RS 232 SETUP If the remote interface selection is RS 232 the RS232 Settings screen must be used to specify the specific setting information The RS232 Settings screen is called up in COMPASS by clicking any of the RS 232 settings displayed Select the correct settings for the device from the drop down lists and click OK when ready All settings with the exception of the COM are defined by the device that will use the interface Refer to the instruction manual of that device to determine these settings and make any necessary selections for the interface to function in RS 232 The CO
198. erruption see Section 11 7 Create a custom plot of data logged in the data file There are two ways of going about this First COMPASS provides the ability to create custom plots within the Plot Properties toolbar option see Section 12 4 2 A label for the plot as well as the X and Y data can be set up The second method requires the use of a third party spreadsheet application MS Excel for example Import the delimited COMPASS data file and use plot functions within the tool to create a plot Avoid having to go through undesired initialization steps each time a test is started Use the Tools Options Initialize Test tab to set preferences to include or exclude the various test initialization steps see Section 11 7 Abort a test that is running Press the Abort key on the Run Test Toolbar see Section 6 5 1 or use the Run Abort Run Mode menu option while the test is running Change the default RS 232 port for reading DUTs so that don t have to re select the port manually every time in the Setup DUT gt screen of test initialization Use Setup System Default DUT RS232 Port gt to edit the default DUT RS 232 port see Section 10 2 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 10 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Add or remove a test point while editing a test definition In the Test Definition lt Points gt Table double clicking any test point automatically removes it from the test point l
199. ertion Tool Panel 16 3 3 FORMAT SELECT TEMPLATE Select Template displays a standard Windows file selection tool set to the template directory specified by Options Path Templates Path see Section 16 3 4 4 The selected template name appears on the bottom status bar as the Current Template All reports generated will use this as the report template until the selection changes The most recent Current Template is saved by the COMPASS Report Editor So this field does not require regular updating unless the template to use changes Page 171 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 16 3 3 4 FORMAT MULTIPLE CYCLES Multiple Cycles is used to determine how the report editor should handle Data Files that contain test data from multiple cycles see Section 9 5 4 The options provide the ability to override the report template fields that identify data from a specific test cycle These fields are limited to lt Test Output gt lt Test Statistics gt and lt Plot gt categories If any of these major categories are selected the field insertion tool displays a drop down list box allowing a specific data cycle to be associated with the field key The options provided by this menu option override the specific cycle selection Table 59 describes the Multiple Cycles options Multi Cycle Data File Options x Auto generate mulitple reports of individual cycle data with he
200. esponse to the Command value issued This field should always be blank if the command has the No Response box checked COMPASS Uses The Leading characters to strip gt command setup information is used to format the Raw Response The result is displayed in this field and logged as COMPASS data Responses not specifically used by COMPASS do not have a value in this field When troubleshooting make sure the value displayed is the desired information Page 49 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 50 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 7 RUN MODES 7 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS has four basic run modes Idle Run Test Run molbox and Run DUT Other than lt Idle gt which indicates that COMPASS is in a state in which configuration changes can be made each of these run modes is found in the Run menu on the main program Before activating any of the run modes make sure that COMPASS has been configured to read the instruments required by the run mode see Section 10 1 With the exception of the tests in which all entries are manual every run mode involves continuous instrument polling to update data on the run screens Adjust these screens as need to customize the COMPASS display see Section 6 7 Sections 7 2 through 7 4 detail the COMPASS run modes 7 2 RUN RUN TEST This menu selection is used to select a DUT Definition ex
201. essure values If an actual flow unit is selected enter the pressure in Pascal into this field If necessary use the pressure unit converter to determine the actual pressure in Pascal Ignore this field if you are not converting a volume or actual flow unit Volume or actual flow unit conversions require instantaneous temperature values If an actual flow unit is selected enter the temperature in Kelvin K into this field If necessary use the temperature unit converter to determine the actual temperature in K Enter the numeric value of the flow in the units that will be converted The drop down list of flow units contains the complete list of units defined by the Flow Unit Editor see Section 14 2 Since actual flow units require a density correction pressure and temperature values must also be specified if an actual flow unit is selected The converted flow based on the supporting flow unit information If the selected flow unit is an actual flow unit pressure and temperature data must be included Page 157 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual NOTES 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 158 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 15 Toors PROCESS GAS EDITOR 15 1 OVERVIEW The Process Gas Editor is a separate application included with COMPASS that is used to create and maintain information on the DUT manufacturer process gases available in the DUT Definition Header tab see Se
202. est number of commands possible to obtain the desired instrument response Although up to ten commands can be issued as part of the read process one command must be specified as the actual read command This command when formatted using the Leading characters to strip should yield an output value in the measurement unit specified for the instrument Select this command by dragging the arrow gt next to it Each DUT or data acquisition device has it s own unique set of remote interface commands Refer to the DUT manual for details on remote commands 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 146 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual See Section 13 2 4 for information on Command Editor features DUT Read Commands Lx Log Fiesponte Remote Command No Response D ORK Lz 2 3 5 gt a 8 3 10 Interface Properties Insert Special Character Command Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt OK Maximum Response time out s 8 Cancel Figure 84 lt Read Commands Editor gt Panel 13 2 3 SET COMMANDS Set commands are used to stimulate an output in the instrument being set up For DUT s and flow controllers the set commands should generate a flow in the Set Units gt For power supplies the set commands should generate a voltage or current Set commands typically have a command portion and a target por
203. ew blank report template will be opened for edit The report template defines the information from COMPASS Data Files dat that will be included in the report It also defines the fixed information and the report format A typical report template includes a customized header and footer data labels and embedded Data File links The first step is to add constant text that should appear on all reports generated with this template Company specific information is a good example of constant text If the template is being created for a specific model of DUT constant information specific to this model could be entered When all text is entered and formatted as desired use Format Insert Field Key to insert Data File links using the Field Insertion Tool see Section 16 3 3 2 Although field keys can be entered at any time it is recommended that they be entered after constant text to prevent the chance of corrupting the field key Regardless of the approach the final step is to save the template with a descriptive name that will make it easy to distinguish from other template files To choose the template for report generation select Format Select Template Creating and or editing a template does not make it the Current template selection of the COMPASS Report Editor 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 166 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual File Create Template is provided to create a template from scratch This
204. ew controller to be created To select a flow controller Hardware Definition to view single click on the controller name and serial number in the List display panel upper left hand corner To edit an existing flow controller double click on the controller listing or click on the Edit toolbar function with the desired controller highlighted Double clicking the controller listing clicking on the Edit toolbar function or clicking on the News toolbar function causes the Edit Flow Controller gt or Add Flow Controller pop up to appear These pop ups are identical but differentiated by name to make it clear which task is currently being performed The Edit Flow Controller or Add Flow Controller pop ups allow a controller to be set up from scratch or edited from an existing one The basic setup of the flow controller is very similar to setting up a DUT that is a flow controller The flow controller setup requires selections on three different tabs Range Gas and Interface The purpose of the flow controller Definition fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 39 When creating a new Definition all the fields come up blank When editing an existing Definition the fields come up populated with the information on that device When editing is complete click OK to save changes Reference DMM Power Supply Frequency Pressure Temperature 1 Li
205. f configuration conflicts or remote communication errors exist Common examples are an RS 232 time out which can occur if the molbox is not connected to the PC by an RS 232 cable If the System Configuration specifies the Reference molbox gt as the Set Point Power Supply and the molbox does not have an analog option an error will also occur The molbox front panel display flow unit of measure is set up during this initialization step The unit can be changed using the Tools Options molbox tab see Section 11 2 If for any reason the unit is changed after this initialization step COMPASS will not be able to properly determine the reference flow Erroneous data will be logged if the reference molbox flow pressure or temperature unite are modified after the initialize molbloc molbox test initialization step COMPASS expects the unite of measure to remain constant once the system is initialized 7 2 12 SELECT STARTING molbloc CHANNEL molbox1 models with two molbloc channels have an option to select the starting molbloc channel during the test initialization When this feature is turned ON see Section 11 2 and there are two molblocs connected to the molbox the molbloc channel selector displays Select the starting molbloc channel by clicking the A B or A B buttons Close the channel selector panel to abort the test 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 52 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Select molbloc
206. f rate is greater than stability limit See also Rate Surrogate Gas A gas whose behavior from the standpoint of a device under test DUT is similar to the process gas for which the device is to be characterized and used A surrogate gas is often used in calibration and testing when the process gas cannot be used for safety or cost reasons A DUT gas conversion factor K factor is used to convert from the surrogate gas to the process gas System A listing of the specific hardware items that COMPASS uses by default to perform Configuration various data acquisition and control functions The System Configuration is made up of individual Hardware Definitions Zeroing of the molbox pressure transducers at the upstream or downstream pressure to eliminate the zero error in the measurement of the differential pressure across a molbloc molbox1 and molbox RFM have automated taring routines and COMPASS can cause these to execute during a test See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Tare Section Test Definition A database record which defines all the aspects of a test procedure that COMPASS can run on a DUT Test Definitions are associated with DUTs and control the test procedure when a test is run Test Gas The gas flowing through the molbloc that is being used to run the test or calibration The test gas from the standpoint of the device under test could be a surrogate gas or the process gas Tolerance Same as DUT tole
207. f two formats determined by the Tools Options Data File tab preference see Section 8 5 2 Realize that this is a default file name and that all complete Data Files can be renamed using the Re Name option on the Test Complete dialog see Section 7 2 3 Long Data File naming is used by default This name is formatted as YYYY ddd rrr where e YYYY Is the four digit year e ddd sthe three digit day of the year Julian date e g 001 for January 1 and 365 for December 31 e rrr Represents the test run number on the DUT being tested for the current day This indicator increments from 000 to 999 Short Data File naming displays as YYdddrrr where YY Is the two digit year e ddd 15 the three digit day of the year Julian date e g 001 for January 1 and 365 for December 31 e rrr Represents the test run number on the DUT being tested for the current day This indicator increments from 000 to 999 COMPASS s automatic naming convention for Data Files makes it possible for two dat files to have the same name However the two files will always be stored in different directories since they would have to be for DUTs with different identifications To avoid conflicts or accidental overwrites when moving Data Files to new locatione the user should keep in mind that different Data Files may have the eame name Page 181 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 55 for molbox User s Manual 18 4 DATA FILE
208. gas density is likely to cause erroneous data by causing incorrect calculation of lt Ref Q DUT Conditions gt If a density correction is selected and the lt Process Gas gt is also a COMPASS supported lt Calibration Gas gt all gas specific entries on the lt Process Gas gt panel are disabled and COMPASS will automatically calculate the gas density based on the normal operating pressure and temperature data entered Any change in the pressure and temperature fields triggers the re calculation of the normal operating gas density Page 69 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Header Correction Range Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set Gas Density Correction Type Square Root Normal Operating Conditions Absolute Pressure 101 325 kPa Temperature 20 c Process Gas NITROGEN Molecular Mass g mol 28 02 Compressibility fi FEATURE Gas Density Correction Type required drop down list selection Absolute Pressure required numeric entry if a gas density correction is used Temperature required numeric entry if a density correction is used 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Figure 40 DUT Definition Editor Correction Tab Table 17 DUT Definition Editor Correction Tab Fields DESCRIPTION Determines which type of density correction will be used when the DUT is run The density correction selected is applied
209. ge Current gt the set point unit must be V conditional drop mV A or mA down list text entry field There is no set range if the DUT is NOT a controller Set Range Enter the lowest set point set point corresponding to the Min Flow of the DUT in the set point unit If the set point unit is the flow range unit the Min Flow value is copied Min Set here and cannot be changed conditional There is no set range if the DUT is NOT a controller numeric entry field Set Range Enter the highest set point set point corresponding to the Max Flow of the DUT in the set point unit specified above If the set point unit is the flow range unit the Max Flow Max Set value is copied here and cannot be changed conditional There is no set range if the DUT is NOT a controller numeric entry field 8 5 5 TOLERANCE TAB The DUT Definition Tolerance tab is used to provide a specification for the DUT The DUT specification is used in calculating DUT errors and in determining the status of a test point when tests are run see Section 7 2 the state of the Tolerance Indicator on the DUT Ref Comparisons run screen see Section 6 7 1 and is applied to test data plots to determine the tolerance bars on plots see Section 6 7 6 There are several tolerance formatting options Choose the selection appropriate for the DUT Table 19 provides details on each of the Tolerance tab fields
210. ged in the Data File and can be used in reports see Section 16 Up to ten individual auxiliary data items can be logged per test point Realize that an Auxiliary Data device can be a device already used by COMPASS The valve voltage output of the molbox can be logged using this feature even when the molbox is the flow reference device The only requirement is that the interface settings are the same An example of this setup is included with the default Auxiliary device installed with the program In addition a single Auxiliary Data device can be used multiple times for the same run mode A single 465 252 or IEEE 488 enabled instrument can be used for more than one device in COMPASS The only requirement is that the interface settings be the same in each setup Refer to the instrument documentation for the specifics of remote communications with the instrument To select an Auxiliary device to view single click on its name and serial number in the lt List gt display panel upper left hand corner To edit an existing Auxiliary device double click it or click on the lt Edit gt toolbar function with the desired Definition highlighted Double clicking the device listing clicking on the lt Edit gt toolbar function or clicking on the lt New gt new toolbar function causes the lt Edit Auxiliary Device gt or lt Add New Auxiliary Device gt pop up to appear These pop ups are identical but differentiated by name to make it clear which task
211. he DUT Definition Range and Set tabs see Sections 8 5 4 8 5 9 If the DUT being tested is not specified as a Controller an error will occur during test initialization Other Controller Flow will be set automatically by COMPASS using a flow controller which COMPASS can control remotely but which is NOT the DUT The flow controller to use is specified by selecting it from the Controller drop down list on the Control tab COMPASS automatically performs the necessary unit conversions when the flow controller is used Controller Specifies the flow controller to use when Other Controller has been selected as the Flow Control method The drop down list is made up of flow controllers set up in the Hardware Definition Flow Controller tab see Section These must be supported by a Set point power supply in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 conditional drop down list 10 3 6 Jog flow before If this is checked test execution will pause just before the dwell phase of the test dwell point to allow the flow rate to be adjusted before the reference and DUT readings are taken If flow control is automated adjustments are made using check box the lt Flow Control gt panel see Section 6 6 8 This feature is most often used to adjust the flow to the DUT s cardinal point when testing a visual output flow meter lt Jog flow before dwell gt has no affect when flow control is manual and is mutually exclusi
212. he last point During all other test points pressing the Step Back run toolbar option see Section 6 5 1 allows points to be repeated by stepping back through the point sequence Since a new cycle begins or the test ends immediately following the last point this special option is used to allow the user to repeat a point When run test is complete test conclusion begins see Section 7 2 3 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 58 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 7 2 2 1 MANUAL ENTRY DATA ACQUISITION When the reference or any portion of the required DUT data requires manual entry the lt Manual Entry gt window displays to allow the necessary data entry A unit of measure appears next to each entry field It is critical that all entries be made in the specified unit of measure Failure to due so will result in erroneous data This feature is functionally equivalent to clicking the lt Enter Flow Data gt icon on the lt Control Toolbar gt see Section 6 6 9 Manual entry of pressure and temperature data for density correction DUTs see Section 8 5 3 can be streamlined by using the appropriate Tools Options Run Test tab selection see Section 11 6 DUT Output Counts 77 DUT Pressure kPa ias DUT Temperature 2000 Figure 34 lt Manual DUT Data Entry gt Panel 7 2 3 TEST CONCLUSION After run test is complete see Section 7 2 2 test conclusion begins Other than the repeat point o
213. he sum of the squares of the distances from the calculated line or curve to the actual line or curve A set of general equations is described below Based on the order of the polynomial fit a system of equations is described Solving these equations for each of the polynomial coefficients determines the resultant polynomial equation n n n n 2 m b n b gt x b Bo x 2235 b yx b ye duse s j l j l hey b Ya b xo en por pue 1 j l j 1 j l j l VARIABLE DESCRIPTION Number of X and Y points taken m The order of the polynomial to fit First order m 1 second order m 2 and so on EN Polynomial fit coefficients X axis data This may be either the DUT or reference flow It depends on the purpose of the best fit Typically it is the DUT flow y Y axis data The data may be either the DUT or reference flow It depends 1 on the purpose of the best fit Typically it is the reference flow 19 8 LINEARITY COMPASS determines the terminal based linearity of the DUT errors relative to the reference readings The linearity value is included in the lt Calculations gt section of the Data File see Section 18 4 There are two possible linearity calculations depending upon the test point sequence If the test point sequence is made up of corresponding ascending and descending or vice versa points linearity is calculated by taking the average between corres
214. ialization commands are needed enter them in the remote command Editor All commands entered will appear in appropriate list box Read Commands These are the commands needed to read a DUT whose Output Type is RS 232 or IEEE 488 conditional drop Click the lt Edit gt button to display the lt Remote Command Editor gt form see Section 13 2 down list action Enter the desired read commands then close the form These commands are continuously sent button to the DUT in all run modes that use the DUT Up to 10 commands can be issued as part of the reading process however only one command can be specified as the actual read command The actual read command is the command that causes the DUT to return its output value The actual read command is specified by the arrow next to the command gt All commands entered will appear in the appropriate list box Communications This feature is used to test communication with a DUT whose lt Output Type gt is RS 232 or IEEE 488 Test Press this button to send the lt Initialization Commands and Read Commands to the DUT A Spy Windows will display with the command response information used see Section 6 7 7 This feature is designed to provide on the spot troubleshooting of the remote commands setup If a command is not properly entered or the response format is not correct the problem should be visible inthe spy window Use the Remote Communications option for further trouble
215. ight of the gas used _ Ideal gas constant 8314 411 Temperature of the gas or the reference temperature of the flow unit converted to degrees Kelvin Pressure of the gas or the reference pressure of the flow unit converted to Pascal Gas compressibility as a function of pressure and temperature COMPASS has all of the necessary information to determine compressibility for the supported calibration gases When the conversion is done for non supported gases 1 is assumed P P T Gas density as a function of pressure and temperature Flow in kg of gas per second Flow in sccm or ccm at a given pressure and temperature The only difference is if the flow unit was setup as an actual flow unit or volumetrically based mass flow unit Actual flow units require real time pressure and temperature information Volumetrically based mass flow units reference a constant pressure and temperature Flow in moles of gas per second Table 66 Flow Unit Conversion Scaling Factors CONVERSION MULTIPLY BY kg s to mg s 1000000 ccm pccm and sccm to lm plm and slm 0 001 respectively ccm pccm and sccm to plh and slh respectively ccm pccm and sccm to cfm pfm and scfm 0 0000353147 respectively ccm pccm and sccm to cfh pfh and scfh 0 00211888 respectively ccm pccm and sccm to m m pm m and sm m 0 000001 respectively ccm pccm and sccm to pm h and sm h 0 00006 respectively Page 197 1998 2003 DH Inst
216. in words and expressions have specific meaning as they pertain to COMPASS for molbox The Glossary see Section 21 is useful as a quick reference for specific terms and expressions as they are used in this manual and the program For those of you who don t read manuals go directly to Section 2 5 to install COMPASS and then Section 3 for a summary of operating principles Later when you have questions or start to wonder about all the great features you might be missing get into the manual Cross references are used extensively to direct you towards additional information on a topic Cross references are generally in parentheses and give the reference s section number For example see Section 11 indicates COMPASS menu or tab selections for example Data Menu or tab selection paths are always described hierarchically from highest to lowest level For example Tools Options Maintain Lists lt gt indicates COMPASS text displays such as screen names field names prompts warnings and instructions For example lt Enter user ID gt File names are designated in quotation marks when they do NOT include a file extension For example dat file or dat CAUTION is used in the manual to identify user warnings and cautions of NOTE is used in the manual to identify operating and applications advice and additional explanations 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page xii COMPASS for molbox
217. information In most cases if a DUT outputs directly in RS 232 or IEEE 488 it will output in flow units However this is not the case in this example Note that lt Flow Units gt are sccm 0 00C and lt Output Units gt are see Section 8 5 4 DUT Editor E DUT record label Digital MFC x5 x Viewing DUT 3 xl Header Correction Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set Flow Range Output Range Unit sccm 0 00C hs Minimum 0000 Unt t Maximum 50 00 Minimum o 000 Maximum 100 0 d Is the DUT a flow controller Resolution 0001 Unit j Minimum 0 000 Maximum fon Figure 1 Example 1 DUT Range Setup Select RS 232 as the DUT Output Type on the Read tab and enter the RS 232 settings for this DUT 9600 E 7 1 see Section 8 5 8 Then click the Edit button next to the Read Commands list to display the remote command setup form To create the control code 02H press the Insert Special Character button Select Hex then scroll to character 02 and press the insert button The cursor will turn into a pencil Go to the first Remote Command entry field and click the mouse in the left most position in the text display A square or rectangle will display where the mouse was clicked Now enter the DUT flow command 01RFX next to the control code The DUT in this example outputs N 24 55 as 24 55 So enter 1 in the Leading char
218. ing SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION The test report logs N A as Identical ascending and descending Define a test that has identical the hysteresis value points were not used in the Test ascending and descending test Definition points 19 9 9 5 2 A test runs but all DUT flow and or output values are 0 00 or another unexpected value The DUT Read Command or Leading characters to strip entry is incorrect when the DUT data acquisition is RS 232 or IEEE 488 DMM Read Command or Leading characters to strip Use Tools Remote Communications to send discrete commands to verify the command being used by the DUT or DMM then make the appropriate edits to the DUT or DMM setup Refer to the documentation of the data A COMPASS time out occurs when reading a device during test initialization This can occur when using supported device When using a molbox reference to run a test the reference Ready indicator is always red though the flow appears very stable entry is incorrect when the DUT data acquisition in lt Voltage Current gt The device interface is not properly set up The RS 232 or IEEE 488 interface cable is not secure A device command is used that does not respond The device power is not ON The DUTspan Test Definition stability limit is in the test results in a stability limit that is too small for the current setup Page 203 acquisition instrument for co
219. inition that is currently displayed Use the toolbar to create edit copy and delete Hardware Definitions Table 35 identifies the toolbar features and their functions Page 103 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 35 Hardware Configuration lt Toolbar gt Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Creates a new Hardware Definition Activates the Hardware Definition Editor with default information for the type of device selected see Section 10 3 2 Copy Copies the contents of the current Hardware Definition to a new device then activates the Hardware Definition Editor see Section 10 3 2 Edit Displays the Hardware Definition Editor see Section 10 3 2 loaded with the information for the current device This function is provided for editing an existing Hardware Definition Delete Deletes the Hardware Definition currently selected in the display A confirmation prompt displays prior to removing the Hardware Definition 10 3 2 HARDWARE DEFINITION EDITOR Editing of all Hardware Definitions including altering existing configurations and creating new ones occurs in the Hardware Definition Editor The name that appears in the Editor title bar and certain aspects of the Editor s specific content are dependent on the type of Hardware Definition that generated the Editor Each device type requires a few unique selections Make sure that these unique features are addressed when editing Ref
220. interface card itself and not any specific instrument Refer to the card manufacturer documentation on how to change the address in the card when necessary The default selections within COMPASS are designed to work with the default Windows set up of the supported IEEE 488 and DeviceNet cards Unless the host PC has multiple interface cards or is specially configured a properly installed IEEE 488 or DeviceNet card with a default setup will work with COMPASS Simply select the card in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 This section is provided to display and edit the card s address only Do not confuse the card address with that of an individual instrument Page 119 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Reference DMM Power Supply Frequency Pressure Temperature Flow Auxiliary Supported IEEE 488 Manufacturers IN ational Instrumente Card Address 0 Supported DeviceNet Manufacturers National Instruments 5 Card Address NETO Figure 68 Hardware Definition Interface Tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 120 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 11 Toots OPTIONS 111 OVERVIEW Tools Options is used to adjust a variety of COMPASS operational preferences Tools Options is organized into six tab selected panels including molbox Tab see Section 11 2 Enable or disable molbox specific features and specify default
221. ints molbloc changes and tares can be added to the sequence by using the Insert button The purpose of the Points table s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 25 sf Delete test pointe from the point sequence by double clicking the point Click on any molbloc or tare image to remove the feature from the test sequence Points ZDUTFS mmm 1 fo 2 20 11 20 12 0 3 40 13 4 Jeo 14 5 80 15 5 100 18 7 100 17 8 80 18 3 Jeo 13 10 40 20 Figure 48 Test Definition Editor lt Test Points gt Tab Table 25 Test Definition Editor lt Points gt Table FEATURE DESCRIPTION 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 84 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Point Type Indicates how the flow point values in the Points table will be interpreted when the test Indication is run The choices are lt DUTFS gt Flow Units Output Units or Set Units If the indication is lt DUTFS gt when the test is run the flow points will be calculated from label the DUT input span defined in DUT Definition Range tab see Section 9 5 4 Specifying points in lt DUTFSs gt is useful in setting up a common test procedure that runs the same point distribution for DUTs with different ranges All other unit types are run directly as values in the unit specified in the corresponding DUT Definition tab T
222. is currently being performed The lt Edit Auxiliary Device gt or lt Add New Auxiliary Device gt pop ups allow a device to be set up from scratch or edited from an existing one The setup of an Auxiliary Data device is the same as a Pressure Device see Section 10 3 4 Enter the header information then select the interface and interface settings Enter any required lt Initialization Commands then enter the necessary Read Commands gt Finally select the lt Auto poll output gt and lt Log output as text gt options depending on how data should be gathered See Figure 67 for an example of this setup yz Edit Auxiliary Data Device 2 x Header Manufacturer DH Instruments 8 Model PPCK Serial Number Identification For Pressure ONIy Calibration Date Interface Response Label 5232 ka Prs kPa RS232Pot Initialization Commands AEBS sone 73 Bead Commands Auto poll output Iv Log output as text Save Exit Figure 67 Hardware Definition lt Auxiliary Data Device gt 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 118 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 41 Auxiliary Definition lt Edit Controller gt Screen Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Manufacturer See Section 10 3 4 for details on the other options on this dialog required text entry field Response Enter a label in this field that describes the output provided by the auxiliary Label devic
223. is NOT set up as a controller in the DUT Definition Range tab see Section 8 5 4 this field is disabled and the flow control method will be determined by the Test Definition or a Run DUT initialization selection see Sections 9 5 6 11 6 For DUTs that do control own flow the available selections are conditional drop down list selection e Voltage Current The DUT flow setpoint command is an analog electrical value supplied by an analog power supply To run tests the analog power supply that COMPASS is to use must be specified as the lt Set Point Power Supply gt in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 The analog option of a reference molbox1 is an option in this list The set point unit must be V mV A or mA when this selection is used COMPASS automatically makes the necessary conversions from the original target flow units to the set point units to the power supply units RS 232 The DUT flow setpoint command is an ASCII string it receives over its RS 232 interface If lt RS323 gt is the Set Point Type selection lt RS232 Settings must be specified correctly The Set tab lt Initialization Commands will be issued during run mode initialization then the Set Commands will be issued as needed to set the flow Responses to set commands are not used or handled by COMPASS By default the RS 232 settings and the initialization commands are the same as those set up in the DUT Definition Read tab Output Type wh
224. is automatically added to the user ID list Names can be removed from the list using Tools Options Maintain Lists see Section 11 4 7 2 2 TEST After test initialization is complete see Section 7 2 1 run test begins The test procedure is defined by the Test Definition see Section 9 associated with the selected DUT Definition see Section amp Prior to running a test various aspects of run test behavior may be customized see Section 11 6 During run test the main menu bar is disabled but the lt Run Toolbar gt is active Use the lt Run Toolbar gt keys to view detailed DUT or Test Definition information while the test is running to step test points back or forward or to display test run windows see Section 6 5 A test that is running can be aborted at any time by pressing the lt Abort Test gt button on the lt Run Toolbar gt Before aborting the test COMPASS requires confirmation and queries whether the partial Data File containing the data collected for the test so far should be saved The Data File can be automatically deleted by setting Data File Options are set see Section 11 8 The run test sequence is as follows Run purge If purge is specified in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 8 COMPASS will set the purge flow rate activate the necessary molbox valves to purge the molbox and then start the purge count down When the purge time expires the valves are automatically adjusted back to
225. is can have a significant effect on small float rotameters but COMPASS does make a viscosity correction Gravity has an effect on rotameters but COMPASS has no gravity correction Generally corrections other than density are not significant relative to the tolerances of these types of devices but since they will not be Page 189 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 55 for molbox User s Manual made and their uncertainties may be poorly quantified testing of density sensitive devices should always be made under conditions as close as possible to the DUT s normal operating conditions Although the density correction is specified by the DUT the actual correction is applied to the reference flow to determine the reference flow in the DUT s normal operating conditions i e what the flow through the DUT would be if it were operating under its normal operating conditions not the current operating conditions The square root density correction multiplies the reference mass flow by the square root of the ratio of the normal operating conditions gas density to the current measured gas density The proportional density correction multiplies the reference mass flow by the simple ratio of the normal operating conditions gas density to the current measured gas density The corrected reference mass flow is then converted to the DUT s flow unit of measure in the normal manner see Section 19 2 Keep in mind that the correction determines
226. is same process The only difference is that the flow value is multiplied by the user defined unit multiplier prior to beginning the conversion see Section 14 Page 195 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 55 for molbox User s Manual Table 64 Flow Unit Conversion Formulas Determine gas density for any gas Determine kg s flow from sccm or ccm at a given pressure and temperature If sccm is used P and T are defined by the flow unit sccm kg would use standard atmosphere 101 325 kPa for 70F for T 5 6 10 see Section 14 1 If the unit is ccm the instantaneous pressure and temperature must be used for P and T Determine sccm or ccm flow from kg s at a given pressure and temperature Conversion from pccm to mol s mol pcem 1 34483x10 5 Conversion from pccm to mol s mol 5 1 34483x10 Determine kg s from mol s Determine mol s from kg s mol 1000 kg 5 s w The p in pccm indicates perfect in which a gas compressibility factor of 1 is assumed for all gases In early 1996 SEMI a semiconductor industry group adopted standard E12 96 which specified that this definition be used for volumetrically base mass flow units 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 196 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 65 Definition Of Terms In Flow Unit Conversion Formulas VARIABLE DESCRIPTION O Molecular we
227. ist All subsequent test points are shifted up To add a test point press the lt Insert gt button and drag the pencil icon to the point location to insert All test points will shift down leaving an opening to enter a new test point see Section 9 5 2 Change the resolution with which the reference and or DUT readings are displayed while running and recorded in the Data File DUT resolution is determined in the DUT Definition see Section 9 5 8 To change the DUT resolution edit the DUT lt Range gt tab Select both the lt Flow gt and lt Output gt resolution that are appropriate for the DUT By default reference resolution is one digit greater than the specified DUT resolution Run an automated test if my computer has only one COM port and the molbox reference and DUT or DMM are both RS 232 Connect the computer COM port to COM1 of the molbox Connect the DUT or DMM to COM2 of the molbox and set the DUT or DMM to be read on Ref COM2 see Section 10 3 4 and or 13 3 1 This solution is only possible with DHI molbox references that have a COM2 Troubleshoot communications with remote devices references DMMs DUTs etc Use Tools Remote Communications see Section 13 6 to interface directly with the device send command strings and display the responses Be sure to refer to the device s User s Manual for assistance specific to the device Changes to interface settings made in Tools Remote Communications are temporary
228. jective when the instrument is used is to measure mass flow Volume flow is converted to mass flow using the density of the flowing gas which requires knowledge of the gas pressure and temperature Some devices include a flow computer and or other accessories to measure the gas pressure and temperature and calculate mass flow from volume flow For example many piston prover systems include hardware and software to report mass flow When this is not the case the device output is proportional to volume flow or it outputs volume flow directly For example a turbine meter s frequency output is proportional to volume flow and most soap film meters output volume flow If you would like to calibrate such a device so that it can be used to measure mass flow COMPASS can do so This requires real time measurement of gas pressure and temperature at the DUT while calibrating it and use of the DUT proportional gas density correction The limitation is that then the mass flow calibration will only be valid when the DUT is used in its defined normal operating conditions i e reference gas pressure and temperature conditions COMPASS DUT gas density corrections only account for the effects of changing density on DUT readings and not for other typically smaller effects on the DUT that may occur when operating conditions change Users should attempt to calibrate at conditions that are close to the DUT normal operating conditions to minimize the effect
229. l does not automatically close after the tare function has been executed This allows the tare to be repeated as many times as desired Use the close control box or the Continue button to complete the tare process and activate the new tare values See Table 4 for information on each of the tare molbox panel fields Tare molbox Continue Figure 14 lt Tare molbox gt Panel 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 34 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 4 lt Tare molbox gt Panel Fields Red Green This indicator is green only when the pressure rate of change is within the Circular Ready molbox s internal tare rate criterion In this state the lt Tare gt button is enabled Indicator When the indicator is red the lt Tare gt button is disabled Pressure Rate Current differential pressure rate of change Pa s Differential Non tare corrected differential pressure After taring this pressure value Pressure Pa should be equivalent to the lt Previous Tare gt display Value of the old tare This value is updated each time the tare button is pressed Pa Microrange Current molbox RFM microrange option pressure If the microrange is not Pressure Pa supported by the molbox this field displays as N A After taring this pressure value should be equivalent to the lt Previous Microrange Tare gt display Previous Value of the old microrange tare Microrange Tare Pa Downstre
230. lication for further analysis COMPASS polls the molbox and responds to the toolbar options until the lt Abort gt button is pressed 7 4 RUN DUT Use this feature to access the predefined settings specified in a DUT Definition see Section 8 without running a specific Test Definition In this run mode COMPASS provides all of the features of a test in an easily accessible toolbar The lt molbox Output gt lt DUT Output gt lt DUT Ref Comparison gt and the lt Average gt run screens are all continuously updated with their respective information see Section 6 7 As this update progresses the Control Toolbar is available for parameter changes and auxiliary functions see Section 6 6 Run DUT can be used in place of a Test Definition when the testing requirements of a device cannot be easily automated by a Test Definition or when long term DUT data is desired This function requires the selection of a DUT Definition as part of the initialization process If the DUT is not set up as a controller see Section 8 5 4 a flow control selection is also required Flow control can be manual or a previously set up flow controller can be selected The selected DUT must also have the necessary support instruments configured in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 It is also possible to setup support devices to log data from A dialog display Figure 36 similar to the Data and Auxiliary options of the Test Definition allow
231. low of the DUT in the output range unit of measure If the output unit is the flow range unit the Min Flow value is copied here and cannot be changed Enter the highest output output corresponding to the Max Flow of the DUT in the output range unit of measure If the output unit is the flow range unit the Max Flow value is copied here and cannot be changed Sets the resolution with which DUT output and set data will be logged and displayed Select the desired resolution from the drop down list The resolution is applied to all calculated DUT information This option should be used to adjust the resolution to a level that is appropriate for the performance of the DUT Typically resolution is set to one order of magnitude greater than the DUT tolerance Check this field if the DUT is a flow controller This will cause the DUT to be handled as a flow controller when tests are run DUT s that have a density correction selected in the DUT Definition Correction tab cannot be set up as flow controllers Page 72 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H FEATURE DESCRIPTION Set Range Select the DUT set point unit from the drop down list If the unit is not in the list type the unit into the list box If the set range unit is the flow range unit the min max set point Set Units fields are automatically set to the min max flow range values If the DUT s Set Point Type in the DUT Definition Set tab is lt Volta
232. lt Edit Power Supply gt Screen Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Manufacturer Labels the device manufacturer Write in a manufacturer name required text entry field Model Defines the device model Write in a model name required text entry field Serial Number Defines the device serial number Write in a serial number required text entry field Identification Provides a device identification Write in a device identification if desired The field can be used for internal device tracking or any other information desired The value optional text entered will be included in run test Data Files and can be included in reports entry field a Do not use the following characters a comma or tab character These characters will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 1 5 Calibration The value entered should represent the next required calibration date for Date the device No special formatting is expected or checked in this field however entering the date in a consistent format including the full year month and day is recommended The value entered is logged in the run test Data Files and can be included in reports optional text entry field 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 112 COMPASS for molbox User s Man
233. lt View Selection gt button This causes the DUT Definition Editor to display with the selected DUT loaded The DUT cannot be modified using this pop up but all the characteristics can be viewed by clicking on the appropriate tabs Other DUTs can be viewed using the DUT Definition Editors DUT selection options see Section 8 4 When the desired DUT is selected click the OK button in the Editor to accept the selection Closing the Editor window using the control box X is equivalent to a cancel Page 53 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual DIETE DUT record label Actual Flow D 3 Ss x ViewingDUT 6 8 al Header Conection Range Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set DUT Information Record Type Manufacturer C Model j Bulb 101 Serial Number Identification Process Gas Figure 30 DUT Selector In DUT Definition Editor 7 2 14 SELECT TEST The Test Definition selection tool is presented identifying the Test Definition associated with the current DUT Definition see Sections 8 5 6 8 5 9 If the DUT Definition does not specify a test the last test accessed is selected by default If this step is turned OFF see Section 11 5 the screen is not shown and the Test Definition specified in the DUT Definition is automatically selected COMPASS performs various checks for compatibility between the select
234. lt interface parameters for the DUT Select new settings or accept the default values If the DUT Definition is a DUT profile see Section 8 5 2 the extra step of entering the DUT s serial number and or identification is required If this step is turned OFF and the DUT Definition is not a DUT profile this screen does not display The screen is automatically skipped if neither RS 232 nor IEEE 488 interfaces are set up for DUT set or read modes and the DUT Definition is not a DUT profile User ID Entry see Section 7 2 1 6 The user ID entry screen is presented The last user ID can be accepted a new user ID may be entered or a previously entered user ID may be selected from the user ID drop down list If this step is turned OFF the screen is not shown and the last user ID selected is automatically used Test initialization is complete run test begins see Section 7 2 2 7 2 1 1 INITIALIZE molbloc molbox When any model molbox is specified as the reference in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 test initialization always begins by loading the molbloc into memory and determining which features are available Depending on the molbox model and the type of interface used this step may take several seconds No user interaction is required while this step is in progress COMPASS uses the information loaded to check for conflicts and range issues that may exist with the DUT Definition subsequently selected Error messages are displayed i
235. lved before saving toolbar button Creates a new Test Definition with default information see Section 9 2 toolbar button Copies the contents of the current Test Definition to a new Test Definition The lt Record Label gt of the copied test includes the text Copy This is the only difference between the original Test Definition and the copy Make sure the new Test Definition is properly updated before saving toolbar button Page 83 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE DESCRIPTION Restore Restores the Test Definition to the last saved state Use this feature to abandon edits made to a Test Definition before saving If a new test was created using the New option the restore button is nonfunctional toolbar button Deletes the current Test Definition A message prompt for confirmation displays prior to removing the Test Definition toolbar button Open Select Displays the Test Definition Selector loaded with a sorted list of the tests see Section 9 4 The selected test will display in the Test Definition Editor toolbar button Scroll Select Scrolls to the next Test Definition according to the current sort order see Section 9 4 i scroll bar 9 5 2 POINTS TABLE The Test Definition Points table is used to define and display the flow points molbox tares and molbloc changes that make up the test sequence Flow po
236. ly stabilized The Stability Hold Time can be used to assure that the flow remains stable for a certain amount of time before the stability test is considered to have been met and test execution continues Stability Time The maximum amount of time that the lt Stability Test gt process may consume out If the stability test and Stability Hold Time have not been satisfied within the 5 lt Stability Time Out gt an indicating character is recorded the Data File and on required the Test Grid and test execution continues The stability time out is used to entry assure that a test will not hang indefinitely if the stability test cannot be met at a field flow point 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 88 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE Tare molbox required drop down list selection Dwell required entry field and drop down list selection Averaging Time s required entry field and drop down list selection Readings point required entry field Number of Test Cycles required entry field DESCRIPTION Use the drop down list to select the flow points at which the molbox pressure transducers should be tared see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Tare Section The tare occurs after completion of the stability test After taring stability is rechecked before continuing with the next test step Use the Test Definition Tare tab to determine the tare p
237. me Company Organization Address 1 Address 2 City State Province Postal Code Country Tel Fax Email 1 lam using COMPASS for molbox Ver 2 Iwill run COMPASS on a computer whose operating system is circle one Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 XP Other Please return this form by mail or fax to ATTN COMPASS Registration DH Instruments Inc 4765 East Beautiful Lane Phoenix AZ 85044 5318 USA orvia Fax 602 431 9559 email dhi dhinstruments com NOTE COMPASS for molbox is a licensed software product intended for single computer or molbox use Running COMPASS simultaneously on two computers is a violoation of the license agreement Page xi 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual ABOUT THIS MANUAL Manual Conventions This manual provides the user with the basic information necessary to set up and run COMPASS for molbox It also includes a great deal of additional information provided to help you optimize COMPASS use and take full advantage of its many features and functions Before using the manual take a moment to familiarize yourself with e of Contents structure e Section 1 to help you get started e Section 5 gives examples of setting up COMPASS for typical applications e Section 4 answers frequently asked questions e Section 20 for troubleshooting e Other sections describe each of the six 6 main menu selections in detail Certa
238. mmand details 10 3 4 13 3 13 2 5 1 Always make sure a device is powered ON and has the remote interface securely attached prior to use The remote interface settings of all supported devices can be adjusted in their respective setups Make sure that the lt No Response gt button is checked when any remote command is issued that does not respond 13 1 13 3 Use the Setup Test Sequence tab to change the stability limit in the test 9 5 4 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc When flow regulation is active the reference flow oscillates significantly around the target flow chose a new reference or other device on the Reference tab of the Hardware X Definition COMPASS still tried to use the previous reference when ran a test The flow output of my molbox is changing erratically COMPASS yet my flow is stable A report displays instead of an expected piece of Data File cannot edit a selected DUT or Test Definition during the initialization of a test The test Data File appears in the COMPASS root directory as opposed to a directory based on the DUT serial number or identification 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual The flow regulation time is too small The gas supply is running out causing faulty control The target flow is not within the resolution of the flow controller All tabs in the Hardware Definition are displays of
239. n 10 in COMPASS While running a test data is acquired and stored in a delimited Data File see Section 12 Within COMPASS Data Files may be viewed used to generate plots and to generate reports which can be customized with user editable templates see Section 16 COMPASS operations follow conventional Windows protocol for file management menu and message formatting graphics and editing To run a test first a DUT Definition must be created see Section 8 to define the DUT that will be tested and a Test Definition must be created see Section 9 to provide COMPASS with the exact testing procedure for the DUT The Hardware Definition must be set up with the necessary instruments to support the DUT including the setup of the molbox remote interface If the DUT requires voltage or current measurement a DMM must be set up using the Hardware Definition Tool see Section 10 The devices set up in the Hardware Definition must be selected as the current System Configuration see Section 10 2 Once a DUT and test have been set up and the Hardware Definition has been defined and selected tests can be run see Section 7 2 The results of the test are stored in a Data File see Section 18 that is designed to be used by COMPASS to generate reports or easily exported to other applications by the user for further analysis Over 40 individual data items are logged for each test point COMPASS includes integrated analysis and reporting functions Fully cu
240. n any setting field causes the RS232 Settings Editor to appear see Section 13 3 1 Select the correct settings for the device and click OK when reagy If the remote interface selection is IEEE 488 the IEEE 488 Address entry field is shown When creating a new Definition the IEEE 488 address is set to the default address 10 The address can be edited directly in the entry field Click this button to display the Remote Command Editor form see Section 13 2 1 Enter the desired commands then close the form These commands are issued during the initialization process if required by the selected device The device may or may not require a specific initialization Refer to the device s remote interface manual to determine whether initialization commands are necessary Some devices may require a unit of measure and range selection before being used If this is the case and the device has the necessary commands to complete this task enter the commands in the remote command Editor Click this button to display the Remote Command Editor form see Section 13 2 3 Enter the desired set commands then close the form Set commands typically require the Set Unit Variable to specify where the numerical target flow information should be located in the command string Enter the command string then drag and drop or type the Set Unit Variable gt text into the appropriate location in the command string COMPASS substitutes the current
241. n the System Configuration see Section 10 2 The panel selections specify when manual pressure and temperature entries will be made when running the test When both pressure and temperature measurement are automated the features on this panel are not used Table 47 covers the operation of the Manual DUT P and T Entry Method panel Page 129 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 47 Options Run Test Tab Manual DUT P and T Entry Method Fields Enter at drop down list box Default absolute pressure drop down list box numeric entry Default temperature drop down list box numeric entry Default humidity RH numeric entry Manually enter pressure and temperature in default units Determines when manual gas pressure and or temperature entries will be made in the test sequence There are three possible choices e First Point Pressure and or temperature entry is prompted only at the first flow point of the test No more entries will be requested and the values entered at the first point will be used for all the points Every Point Pressure and or temperature entry is prompted at each flow point in the test The values entered at each point are used for the point Use Default No pressure and or temperature entry will prompted The default pressure and or temperature value s specified in the lower part of this panel will be used Specifies the absolute pressure val
242. n the actual DUT device resolution COMPASS resets the molbox to a known state which removes any user setups of units gas K factor etc The front panel options for the top row display are mg s Default kg s mol s slm 9 0 00C sccm 9 0 00 scfh 0 00C and scfm 9 0 00C Page 205 Familiarize yourself with the Data File naming and storing protocol Also consider that the COMPASS main program and the COMPASS Report Editor may be specifying two different paths 18 3 11 8 16 3 4 4 Use the DUT Definition Editor to change the Output Resolution field of the DUT to get the desired output resolution 8 5 4 Using the AVERAGE or DISPLAY key on the molbox1 molbox RFM front panel you may select the mass or volume actual flow units that you would like displayed on the second bottom line of the molbox display The units of this display will not change when you change units within COMPASS Refer to the molbox molbox Operation Maintenance Manual Display lt 5unit gt Section for details 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual NOTES 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 206 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 21 GLOSSARY Absolute As in absolute pressure Pressure expressed relative to vacuum Actual Flow Units Units of measure of volume flow sometimes called volume flow Do not confuse volume flow units with volumetrically based mass flow u
243. n unlimited number of Hardware Definitions and quickly swapped or adjusted when needed by changing the Hardware Definitions included in the System Configuration The only Hardware Definitions that need to be included in the System Configuration are those that are actually needed to execute the run mode If for example you do not need to make pressure and or temperature measurements no Hardware Definitions need to be created for these items and they do not need to be selected in the System Configuration Only instruments specifically required by the DUT and or flow controller to run need to be set up See Section 10 3 for information on creating Hardware Definitions and Section 10 2 regarding setting up the System Configuration Page 99 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 10 2 SETUP SYSTEM Setup System is a pop up window used to select the Hardware Definitions to include in the System Configuration that COMPASS uses when in a run mode The window is organized by the specific data acquisition and control functions that COMPASS may use in its various run modes A hardware component for each function is selected from a drop down list With the exception of molbox specific features the Hardware Definitions available on the drop down lists are created using Setup Hardware see Section 10 3 molbox features such as the MFC control option and the ability to read pressure and temperature
244. nal for new tests The feature only restores to the last saved state Since new Test Definitions have not been saved there is nothing to restore Familiarity with test execution sequence is necessary for proper creation of Test Definition review Section 7 1 If a Test Definition exists that is similar to the one that will be created use the lt Copy gt toolbar feature to create a new Test Definition with the same characteristics Then make the edits specific to the new test Don t forget to change the lt Record Label gt prior to saving Page 81 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 9 3 EDITING TEST DEFINITIONS Tests can be edited whenever COMPASS is not in an active run mode Use the Setup Test menu option to display the Test Definition Editor if not already open Simply changing information in the Test Definition Editor places the Editor in the edit mode No specific option must be selected to begin editing a Test Definition Other Test Definitions can be viewed while editing a Test Definition A flashing indicator displays the ID number of the test currently being edited Use the Save toolbar button to store the edits or press the Restore button to return the test to its original state 9 4 TEST DEFINITION SELECTOR The Test Definition Selector is most frequently used to select a Test Definition This tool can be used when initializing the Run Test mode to select a tes
245. nasinci iiaii entente nennen nnns siters 59 Run Mode Data Selector gt 61 DUT Selection 4 22 mae i EH dede Hd dae Hee E do 65 DUT Definition Editor lt gt 66 DUT Definition Editor Header 67 DUT Definition Editor Correction 70 DUT Definition Editor Range nnne 71 DUT Definition Editor Tolerance 73 DUT Definition Editor Test nnne 74 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page viii COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 DUT Definition Editor Conditions 75 DUT Definition Editor Read Tab enne 76 DUT Definition Editor Set e tinto cct sae tac cea need cea e eurn nac 78
246. nd follows the same procedure as the Save option when an untitled file is saved see Section 16 3 1 5 16 3 17 FILE SAVE ALL Unlike the other save options Save All acts on all documents open in the Report Editor It is the equivalent to selecting each file and choosing File Save see Section 16 3 1 5 Untitled files will still require the input of a new file name This is a shortcut save option that can be used when multiple files have been modified and you wish to save the changes to all of them 16 3 18 FILE CLOSE Close has the same function as pressing the close X in the Windows control box of any open document It closes the current file unloading the contents from memory If changes have been made to the document since the previous save a prompt to save the file occurs Choosing Yes saves the file applying the rules of the File Save option see Section 16 3 1 5 Selecting No closes the file ignoring any changes that may have occurred 163 19 FILE CLOSE ALL Close All is a short cut to selecting every file currently open in the Report Editor then choosing File Close see Section 16 3 1 8 This is a convenient way to close several open files If changes have occurred there is still a prompt Page 167 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual to save the file before closing When several files are being closed an extra option is provided to autom
247. ne statistics related to all data acquired during the test and not a single cycle User notes entered at the end of the test see Section 7 2 3 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 182 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H SECTION DESCRIPTION Includes information on the pressure measuring device used to log gas pressure at the DUT during test execution see Sections 10 2 10 3 4 If pressure was not measured during the test these fields are set to N A Temperature Includes information on the temperature measuring device used to log gas temperature at the DUT during test execution see Sections 10 2 10 3 4 If temperature was not measured during the test these fields are set to N A Flow Controller Includes information on the flow controller used to control flow during the test see Section 9 5 6 10 3 6 If the flow control was by the DUT or was manual these fields are set to N A Test Includes information from the Test Definition that defines the test procedure used to run the test see Section 9 Pre Test Includes the results of the leak test if included and specifies whether or not a system purge was used at the beginning of the test see Sections 7 2 7 2 1 Test Data Includes all point by point data logged during the test see Section 7 2 2 Includes values calculated from the test data measurement uncertainty linearity hysteresis repeatability and the best fit straight line transfer functions
248. ning required quality assurance records Running more than one licensed copy of COMPASS at a time for purposes other than generating COMPASS reports or archiving as described in the previous paragraph requires a separate licensed copy of COMPASS for each computer Page 211 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual NOTES 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 212
249. nits See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Section for an extensive discussion of flow units of measure Averaging Time The time over which reference and DUT readings are taken at a flow point in a COMPASS run mode COMPASS makes as many readings as possible during the averaging time and then averages the readings to arrive at the reference and DUT reading for the flow point Calibration Gas The gas with which a DUT is normally calibrated The calibration gas may be a surrogate gas for the process gas see also surrogate gas and process gas Cycle Test Cycles A complete set of flow points in a COMPASS test run Tests may include multiple cycles Number of cycles is set in the Test Definition Sequence tab The short form of Data Acquisition This refers to the method used to gather data from a DUT Data File dat Files automatically created by COMPASS to store the data from a test Digital multimeter Used by COMPASS to read the electrical outputs of DUTs Downstream Location of point A relative to point B in a flow system in which point A is at a different location in the direction of the flow For example the downstream molbloc pressure port is downstream relative to the upstream pressure port because it is at a different location from the upstream port in the direction of the flow DUT Device Under Test Test Instrument TI Unit Under Test UUT The device that is being tested using COMPASS DUTs are defined
250. nits gt If the indication is lt DUTFSs gt when the test is run the flow points will be calculated from the DUT output span defined in DUT Definition Range tab see Section 9 5 4 Specifying points in lt DUTFS gt is useful in setting up a common test procedure that runs the same point distribution for DUTs with different ranges All other unit types are run directly as values in the unit specified in the corresponding DUT Definition tab The current point type selection is indicated at the top of the Points table see Section 9 5 2 Defines the first point of an Auto Fill test point sequence Entering a value in this field has no affect until Auto Fill is pressed Defines the last point of an Auto Fill test point sequence Entering a value in this field has no affect until Auto Fill is pressed Defines the increment used by Auto Fill to determine test points between the starting point and ending point Entering a value in this field has no affect until Auto Fill gt is pressed Selects whether the Auto Fill point sequence will run from starting point to ending point only or from starting point to ending point and back to starting point If Yes is selected the test point sequence is from starting point to ending point and back to starting point The ending point is repeated to provide proper point weighting when calculating best fits from the test data If this repeated point is not desired right click the point aft
251. normal operation Run leak test If a leak test is specified in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 7 and the reference molbox supports leak tests a message displays to notify the user to make the necessary preparations for a leak test After the message is confirmed the leak time count down begins All leak tests last approximately 60s When the leak time expires the status bar displays the Pass or Fail status The results of the leak tests are also recorded in the Data File Unless the lt Abort on failure gt option is checked on the Leak Test tab of the Test Definition test execution continues regardless of the leak test results Change molbloc If a molbloc change is specified for the test point in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 2 COMPASS displays a prompt to change the molbloc When the message is confirmed the new molbloc information is loaded into memory If the molbloc has not changed or an error occurs in loading the new molbloc an error message displays The molbloc range and serial number are logged in the lt molbloc gt column of the data grid If purge after molbloc change is specified the purge function described in Step is repeated If leak test after molbloc change is specified in the Test Definition the leak test described in Step is repeated The result of each leak test is logged in the Status column of the data grid as well as in the Data File see Section 18 4 Page 57 1998 2003 DH Instruments
252. nt sequence If the test fails the failure is identified in the lt Data Grid gt lt Status gt change and in the test s Data File see Section 18 4 Use the lt Abort test on failure gt to determine whether the test should continue after a leak test failure check box Abort test on Check this box to cause the test to abort if a leak test is failed If not checked failure the leak check failure is recorded in the test s Data File but the test continues Note that leaks in the flow system may cause the test data to be invalid check box 9 5 8 PURGE TAB The Test Definition Purge tab is used to specify whether a gas purge routine will be run at the beginning of the test see Section 7 1 and or after molbloc changes The purge routine used is the molbox purge function see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Purge Section The purpose of the Purge tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 31 Page 93 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc FEATURE Automatic system purge check box Purge after molbloc changes check box Purge target flow conditional numeric entry field Purge time conditional numeric entry field COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Points Sequence Tare Control Leak Test Automatic system purge Purge after molbloc changes Purge target flow ZDUTFS 50 Purge time 60 Figure 54
253. ntains measured set point data if the DUT is a controller the measured value is used as the set point Otherwise the nominal set point is used This plot is used to evaluate how close to the target flow the reference flow was actually set at each flow point DUTFS Set Error The full scale set point error is plotted against the reference flow at each vs Reference Flow flow point When the Data File contains measured set point data if the DUT is a controller the measured value is used Otherwise the nominal set point is used Reading Set Error The percent of reading set point error is plotted against the reference flow at vs Reference Flow each flow point When the Data File contains measured set point data if the DUT is a controller the measured value is used Otherwise the nominal set point is used Custom Plots All custom plots created using the lt Custom Plots gt option see Section 12 4 2 4 are listed at the bottom of the list of plots Selecting any of these plots is the same as selecting a built in plot The only difference is the data plotted 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 140 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 12 4 23 PLOT PROPERTIES The plot toolbar plot properties icon activates the plot properties window There are three tabs on the display window that can be used to customize the current plot The elections made are saved and applied to all subsequent plots until a new
254. ntered in the DUT flow range unit from the DUT Definition Range tab Output Units DUT tolerance is specified as the value of the fixed output value entered in the DUT output range unit from the DUT Definition lt Range gt tab Set Units DUT tolerance is specified as the value of the fixed set point value entered in the DUT set range unit from the DUT Definition Range tab e None There is no DUT tolerance specification See Section 19 4 for details on error calculations Tolerance Value Specifies the numeric value used to calculate the DUT tolerance Combination tolerance selections provide two entry fields required numeric entry field 8 5 6 TEST TAB The DUT Definition Test tab specifies information specific to testing the DUT These include the default Test Definition to use to test the DUT as well as the lt Calibration Gas gt and lt K factors if applicable The current Process Gas selection displays at the top of the folder for reference purposes Table 20 provides information on each of the Test tab fields Header Correction Range Tolerance conditions Read Set Test Information ProcessGas N2Nmogen S Calibration Gas N2 NITROGEN 5 K Factor fi Default Test Select Figure 43 DUT Definition Editor Test Tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 74 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 20 DUT Definition Editor Test Tab Fields FEAT
255. nu choice The Tools Options molbox tab provides an option to display this form during test initialization when the reference is a moblocS and the flowing gas is Air see Section 11 2 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 200 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual d W 62188 GRUT amb Catala water C romena BNET NN e ws Page 201 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc DH COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 202 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 20 TROUBLESHOOTING 20 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS for molbox is a sophisticated software package with many advanced features with the potential to be misused and or misunderstood Check the HOW DO I section for an explanation on how to properly use COMPASS for several common applications as well as quick tips on how to use many features Before assuming that unexpected behavior is caused by a software or hardware defect the operator should use this manual in conjunction with the documentation on other instruments used with COMPASS to troubleshoot and identify normal behavior The following section contains suggestions and solutions to resolve many commonly encountered issues Identify the unexpected behavior from the symptoms list in Table 71 A Probable Cause and Solution are proposed including cross references to sections in this manual that may be of assistance Table 71 Troubleshoot
256. o 10 commands can be issued as part of the reading process however only one of the commands can be specified as the actual read command The actual read command is identified by the arrow gt to the left of the command All commands entered appear the appropriate list box Each device has it s own unique set of remote interface commands Refer to the device manual for details on how to interface with it See Section 13 2 for information related to remote interfaces in COMPASS action button In a DMM Definition there are separate read commands for voltage V and current A so that COMPASS can use the DMM to read either when required Unlike other device setups both voltage and current commands two different measurement units can be stored in one DMM profile Communications Press this button to send the lt Initialization Commands and Read Commands gt Test to the device A Spy Windows will display with the command response information used see Section 6 7 7 This feature is designed to provide on the spot troubleshooting of the remote commands setup If a command is not properly entered or the response format is not correct the problem should be visible in the spy window Use the Remote Communications option for further troubleshooting see Section 13 action button 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 110 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 10 3 5 POWER SUPPLY TA
257. o change the point type use the Test Definition Points tab see Section 9 5 3 Insert Clicking Insert causes a pop up window to display with three separate insert options action button Point changes the cursor into a tare icon that can be dropped onto the desired point to for a tare of the reference molbox to occur at that point The tare icon will remain next to the point unless removed by clicking it Use the Test Definition Tare tab to specify tare execution details see Section 9 5 4 If the Test Definition Sequence tab see Section 9 5 4 specifies a fixed taring sequence this selection is disabled Change molbloc changes the cursor into a molbloc icon that can be dropped onto the point at which a molbloc change should occur Realize the molbloc change occurs BEFORE the point is executed This feature may be used when a molbloc change during the test is needed to maintain desired reference measurement uncertainty Click the molbloc icon to remove the molbloc change from the list Insert Point changes the cursor into a pencil icon that can be dropped on any point to insert a blank point at that location The selected point and all subsequent points then shift down leaving a blank point available for entry Double click any test point to remove it from the list Valve Driver Change displays the Toggle molbox Drivers form to allow the state of the external molbox valve drivers to be changed A depressed bu
258. of a number This is the same test used to determine which type of linearity calculation will be used see Section 19 9 Hysteresis is the maximum difference between corresponding ascending and descending DUT flows in a test point sequence The hysteresis value is expressed in DUTFS 19 10 REPEATABILITY A calculated repeatability value is included in the Calculations section of the Data File whenever a multi cycle test is executed The value is determined by comparing data from each test cycle and finding the maximum error deviation between any two cycles at the same point The value is expressed in DUTFS Single cycle tests never include a DUT repeatability value 19 11 MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY The DUT measurement uncertainty resulting from the test is calculated as the root sum square of the various components that determine the overall system uncertainty This includes linearity hysteresis repeatability resolution and reference uncertainty DUT resolution is obtained from the DUT Definition Range tab see Section 8 5 DUT linearity hysteresis and repeatability are calculated from the test data see Sections 19 8 19 9 19 10 Reference uncertainty is obtained from the Reference Hardware Definition see Section 10 3 3 Each of the values is converted to a single standard deviation by dividing by the appropriate value The final measurement uncertainty value is then multiplied by 2 to obtain a coverage factor of 2 The uncertainty
259. of possible non density influences 5 1 8 1 DUT DEFINITION SETUP Set up the DUT record in a similar way to the DUT in Example 5 Section 5 1 5 with the following changes Select Setup DUT Range tab and select the DUT flow unit The unit will be a mass flow unit e g sccm mg s mol s Select Setup DUT Correction tab and select the Proportional Gas Density Correction Type You must also enter the DUT s normal operating conditions 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 26 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H these are the temperature and absolute pressure of the gas that will flow through the DUT when it is used in the field this is NOT measured the gas temperature and pressure during the calibration If you know the normal operating conditions that were used for the DUT s previous calibration these conditions should be entered for this calibration to be compared to the previous calibration If you don t know or if you want to change the DUT s normal operating conditions enter the desired normal operating conditions for the DUT and the new calibration will be valid for the DUT when used under those conditions 5 1 8 2 TEST DEFINITION SETUP Generally when running this type of DUT the DUT output is adjusted to the DUT cardinal point at each flow increment When using an lt Other Controller gt as the flow control method use the lt Jog Before Dwell gt feature on the Test Definition Control t
260. ogate and related K factor information will display in the appropriate spaces Edit the information as desired and press Record to save the changes Add new gases by first entering the new gas text in the Symbol field Then update the remaining gas information and again press Record When all changes are complete press the Save File button to permanently store all changes Gas conversion factors often called K factors are used when a DUT cannot be tested with the gas with which it is normally operated K factor definition and uncertainty are the responsibility of the DUT manufacturer see Section 15 1 and the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual K Section Page 159 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 15 2 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Process Gas Editor x Manufacturers GENERIC E Add Del Rename Gas information for current manufacturer C2F6 Hexafluoroethane Freon 116 24 2 6 1 Process Gas Create Gas Blend Symbol rore Bas Name Hexafluoroethane Freon 116 Factor Setup K Factor to N2 K Factor to surrogate 1 Surrogate name CFE Record Delete Changes since last save 0 Save File Figure 91 lt Process Gas Editor gt Tool FEATURES A description of the functional aspects of the Process Gas Editor is included in Table 57 Table 57 lt Process Gas Editor gt Tool Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Manufacturer drop down list box Ad
261. oints Stability 4DUTFS 05 for fi 0 panos Stability Time out s feo Tare molbox at selected points 1 Tare Control Leak Test Purge Data 7 Averaging Time 5 n Timed Readings Pt fs Test Cycles Figure 50 Test Definition Editor Sequence Tab Table 27 Test Definition Editor Sequence Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Stability Defines the stability limit to be used to determine a ready condition in the molbox after a target flow is set Generally this value is set about 10 times smaller than Test and Hold the DUT tolerance second see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Time Ready Not Ready Section The associated time entry field is the Stability Hold time required For COMPASS to consider that the stability test has been met and test numeric entry execution can continue the ready condition flow inside stability limit must be fields present and uninterrupted for the Stability Hold time If during the Stability Hold Time the molbox outputs a not ready signal the hold time will start over after the next ready output is received This process continues until either the stability test is passed or the lt Stability Time Out gt occurs Depending on the configuration of the test system and the performance of the device controlling the flow the flow may stabilize within the stability test and a ready condition may occur momentarily before the flow has tru
262. ol code that has a hexidecimal value of 2 see Section 8 5 8 These codes are sometimes required by DUTs when using an RS 232 converter The DUT set command is 02H 01STD where represents the numerical target flow value as a percentage of full scale The objective of this example is to demonstrate the basic requirements of a direct flow output DUT using a remote command and how to use Setup System to configure the system hardware The DUT in this example uses an RS 232 interface however changing the DUT lt Output Type gt on the DUT Definition Read tab to IEEE 488 is all that is required to use IEEE 488 Page 13 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 5 1 1 1 SET UP AN RS 232 DUT Use Setup DUT to create a new DUT Definition see Section 8 If a DUT with similar characteristics already exists it is easier to copy and edit the existing DUT than to start from scratch Before attempting to set up the RS 232 DUT refer to the DUT documentation to determine the commands used to measure and control flow as well as the RS 232 interface settings The first step is to enter all of the DUT header information and decide whether to make this an lt Individual DUT gt or a lt DUT Profile gt If the DUT is unique use the lt Individual DUT gt option to avoid the need to enter the DUT serial number and identification before starting a test see Section 8 5 2 Next enter the flow range
263. ol tes AR NE e 23 54 54 DN THE TEST edo D OLD e E 24 846 EXAMPLEXO 24 5 1 6 1 DUT DEFINITION SETUP iscsi kee ee ski ws e kan ace ed e er ERROR 24 5 1 6 2 TEST DEFINITION 0 24 E83 PRONE TESE Que E e st coh valde di tata ete 25 5 1 6 4 0 25 57 EXAMPLE DU A ee ee lank EE 25 25 Page i 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc DH COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 5 1 7 2 TEST DEFINITION SETUP me ie rei ederet dria en tan Dr d eran 25 5 1 7 3 RUN THE 2 26 5 1 8 EXAMPLE 8 26 5 1 81 DEFINITION 2 26 5 1 82 TEST DEFINITION 2227 5 1 83 TEST HARDWARE 0 2227 5 1 8 4 SET DATAGRID rtt netter 44207 5 1 8 5 artic e reete i reset Dh a rtr erre 28 SCREEN EM 29 6 1 e i 29 6 2 MAIN MENU BAR 29 6 3 STATUS 29 6 4 RUN enlm 30 6 5 RUN TOOLBAR 31 6 5 1 RUN 1 2 DISPLAY TOOLS 32 66 CONTROL 33 6 6 1 CHANGE
264. olbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Section for additional information and the Section 5 of this manual for examples For COMPASS to perform gas density corrections the normal operating pressure and temperature of the DUT along with the molecular mass and the compressibility factor of the DUT s process gas must be specified in the DUT Definition The information entered is used to determine the density of the flowing gas under the normal operating conditions of the DUT The density is then applied to the reference flow based on the density correction method selected the resultant value is the reference flow under the DUT s normal operating conditions This information is displayed on the lt DUT Ref Comparison gt window and logged in the lt Data Grid gt see Sections 19 5 18 4 1 The purpose of the Correction tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 17 Selecting a lt Gas Density Correction Type gt other than lt None gt will cause the reference flow to be corrected as a function of gas density This correction is only valid if a the DUT is known to be gas density sensitive b the DUT s gas density sensitivity corresponds to one of the Gas Density Correction Types c the DUT s normal operating pressure and temperature can be correctly specified d the pressure and temperature of the gas flowing when the DUT is tested can be determined In any other case specifying a
265. olerance plot and an error plot type is selected If the error exceeds the heck b tolerance by 50 the actual DUT error plot will not be visible check box When this function is not active all plots are auto scaled This option is often use for plots included in reports so that all plots are scaled in the same manner regardless of actual error magnitude Page 141 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURES DESCRIPTION Include grid Activates and deactivates a grid overlay on the plot check box 12422 SUBSETS Data files created from multi cycle tests allow discrete selection of the test cycles to plot Any combination of cycles can be plotted at any given time Check the cycle numbers that you wish to include in the current plot and uncheck those that you wish to remove from the plot All formatting and other plot options are enforced on all plotted cycles Plot Properties Lx General Subsets Best Fit Plot Test Cycles Figure 80 Plot Properties Subsets Tab 12 4 2 3 BESTFIT The Best Fit tab is used to apply a polynomial fit to the data plotted Table 53 provides information on operation of the Best Fit tab See Section 19 7 for information on best fit calculations Best fit and tolerance options do not apply to custom plots Plot Properties Lx General Subsets Best Fit Include best fit data in single cycle plots v OK Plot be
266. ompatibility esses nennen nene 4 Tools Available On The Run 7 nnns 31 Tools Available On The Display Toolbar nennen 32 Tare molbox gt Panel Fields 35 Flow Conditions Panel nnns 37 Unitss PaneliFleldsut cto eee oae tea t tat 37 Flow Control Panel nn annene 39 Control Toolbar Data Acquisition 2 020 0 00 40 DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen Fields sse 43 molbox Output Run Screen Fields 0000009 44 DUT Output Run Screen Fields ssssssssssssssssseseseeeen nennen enne 45 Average Flow Data Run Screen Fields sse 47 Spy Windows Information 2 1 000000 entente tenni nnn sn nnne rene 49 eene entrent nnns nnne 60 DUT Definition Editor Toolbar 66 DUT Definition Editor Header Tab Fields 68 DUT Definition Editor Correction Tab 70 DUT Definition Editor Range Tab 72 DUT Definition Editor Tolerance Tab Fields 74 DUT Definition Editor Test Tab 5 75 DUT Definition Editor Conditions Tab
267. omplished by these toolbar shortcuts he amp amp Figure 98 Report Editor Main Toolbar 16 3 42 OPTIONS FONT FORMAT BAR The Font Format Bar provides access to standard font and paragraph formatting options The purpose and use of each option on this toolbar are summarized in Table 60 Each selection on the Font Format Bar can be used to affect a range of text by highlighting the desired text then making a selection When a text range is not selected any Font Format Bar selection will affect all text entered at the current insertion point only This toolbar also displays the formatting in place at the current insertion point when a selection is not made Using the arrow keys to Page 173 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual move within the text of an open document refreshes this toolbar with the current text formatting at the cursor insertion point farial 5 5 7 Figure 99 COMPASS Report Editor Font Format Bar Table 60 COMPASS Report Editor Font Format Toolbar FEATURE Times New Roman Font Selection nm Font Size Font Bold Font Italic Lu Font Underscore Font Strikeout Left Justify Center Right Justify 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc DESCRIPTION Displays and changes the current font A complete list of all fonts supported by the PC displays in the font selection bo
268. on or clicking on the New new toolbar function causes the Edit Reference Device or Add New Reference Device pop up to appear These pop ups are identical but differentiated by name to make it clear which task is currently being performed 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 104 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual The lt Edit Reference Device gt or lt Add New Reference Device gt pop ups allow a flow reference Definition to be set up from scratch or edited from an existing one Unlike other devices the flow reference only requires a remote interface setup If the reference is a molbox all remote interactions are already supported by COMPASS In the event the reference is not a DHI molbloc molbox flow system no remote interface is supported The purpose of the flow reference Definition fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 37 When creating a new Definition all the fields come up blank When editing an existing Definition the fields come up populated with the information on that device When editing is complete click lt OK gt to save changes Reference DMM Power Supply Frequency Pressure Temperature Flow Controller IEEE 488 List Information molbox REM 412 Demo UNIT D Manufacturer DH Instruments Inc molboxl 111 Demo molbox COMS z Model RFM Serial Number n2 E Identification Demo UNIT x Calibration Date r Interface
269. only tolerances should be avoided if test points at or near will be taken The tolerance becomes infinitely small as the reference flow approaches zero Instead use a combination tolerance such as lt DUTFS OR Reading Greater of Header Correction Range est Conditions Read Set Tolerance Type DUTFS OR Reading Greater of 7 fo 5 ZReading OR DUTFS DUT Tolerance Figure 42 DUT Definition Editor Tolerance Tab Page 73 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 19 DUT Definition Editor Tolerance Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Tolerance Type Selects the DUT tolerance formula used to calculate DUT error at test points Choices are required drop down list gt 99DUTFS DUT tolerance is calculated as the flow span of the DUT times the selection tolerance value Span and full scale errors are always the same when the DUT Min Flow value is zero Reading DUT tolerance is calculated as the current reading of the DUT times the tolerance value DUTFS or DUTreading greater of DUT tolerance is calculated at each point as both DUTFS and reading The tolerance used is the greater of the two DUTFS Rreading DUT tolerance is calculated at each point as both DUTFS and Reading Tolerance used is the sum of the two Flow Units DUT tolerance is specified as the value of the fixed flow value e
270. open documents in the COMPASS Report Editor Any document selected in the list becomes the current top document in the Editor As an alternative to using this menu feature clicking any open document in the display can make it the current top document 16 3 6 HELP The Help menu accesses the COMPASS Report Editor on line help Show Help opens the Help function to the Contents screen from which help functions can be accessed Search Help opens the Help function to a standard keyword search tool REPORT EDITOR AUTOMATION The COMPASS Report Editor supports several Windows automation features which allow the report editor to be used with other applications The intent of these features is to allow another applications to cause the Report Editor to generate a report using COMPASS Data Files dat 2 The automation features of the COMPASS Report Editor are advanced topics requiring information beyond the scope of this manual This information is provided for advanced users There is no intent for the COMPASS Report Editor to act as a generic reporting tool for other applications Only Data Files generated by COMPASS will successfully produce reports All other files are opened as documents in the Editor 16 4 1 DRAG AND DROP The COMPASS Report Editor supports standard Windows file drag and drop features A set of file names can be dragged to the title bar of the COMPASS Report Editor from Windows Explorer or the lt Test Complet
271. optional external molbox valve drivers can be adjusted by using this toolbar function molbox valve drivers are commonly used to activate valves that isolate or exposes devices to the system flow The lt Toggle molbox drivers gt form displays to allow valves to be individually turned on or off When a button is down the driver is active otherwise the driver is inactive Toggle molbox drivers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 15 lt Toggle molbox drivers gt Form 6 6 6 FLOW CONDITIONS The flow conditions function is represented by the toolbar icon The flow conditions function displays a flow conditions pop up panel that is used to change the desired conditions Change the desired value by drop down selection or numerical entry then press lt Enter gt Depending on the current run mode not all values can be adjusted In Run molbox mode all conditions are adjustable However in Run DUT mode the calibration gas and K factor are controlled by the active DUT Definition See Table 5 for information on each of the flow conditions selection panel fields Press lt Enter gt to activate the change after making a flow conditions selection Flow Conditions Figure 16 lt Flow Conditions gt Panel 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 36 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 5 lt Flow Conditions gt Panel Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Calibration Gas Select the calibration gas from the list of molb
272. or using the Setup Test menu option When selected the last accessed Test Definition displays on the Test Definition Editor While in the Editor use the toolbar options to create edit view and delete tests see Section 9 5 1 The Test Definition Editor is designed with the same editing concepts as the DUT Definition Editor see Section 8 5 Only one Test Definition can be edited at a time however other Definitions can be viewed prior to completing the changes The test scroll bar and the Test Selector are available to make new test selections A flashing indicator displays the ID number of the Test Definition currently being edited This ID will change as the test sort order changes see Section 9 4 The edited test always displays in blue text in the Test Definition Selector see Section 9 4 Use these editing signals to locate the test that is being edited if necessary Test Definitions only be edited when COMPASS is not in an active run mode If run mode is active all Test Definition fields and selection functions are disabled 9 2 CREATING TEST DEFINITIONS Open the Test Definition Editor using the Setup Test menu option Use the News test toolbar icon to create a new Test Definition Set up the test as desired then press the Save icon to store the test information Any conflicts that exist will cause an error message to display Resolve the conflicts before re saving The lt Restore gt icon is nonfunctio
273. ow Range Output Range Unit sccm 70 00F v Minimum 0 00 Unit fmm Maximum 1240 Minimum 0 00 Set Range the DUT a flow controller ee e DOT controller Resolution om Unit 71 Minimum Maximum N A Figure 8 Example 4 DUT Setup 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 20 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Select the Setup DUT Test tab and select the Calibration Gas that you will be using to calibrate the rotameter see Section 8 5 6 Select the Setup DUT Read tab and select Manual for the DUT Output Type see Section 8 5 8 5 14 2 TEST DEFINITION SETUP There is nothing out of the ordinary about setting up a Test Definition for a rotameter see Section 9 except that Jog Before Dwell gt should be checked on the Control if you are using the Other Controller method of flow controls and you want to adjust flow to the rotameter ball or cardinal points before taking data see Section 9 5 6 5 1 4 3 TEST HARDWARE SETUP The installation of the rotameter into the test plumbing should be made following the manufacturer s recommendations In general if the flow controlling device is upstream of the rotameter the gas pressure and temperature measurements should be taken on the outlet side of the rotameter If the flow control valve is on the outlet of the rotameter the pressure and temperature measurements should be taken at the inlet of the rotameter P
274. ox supported gases drop down list Stability Setting numeric entry field K Factor numeric entry field molbox stability criterion The value entered is in the current molbox flow display units when in Run molbox mode and the DUT flow units when in Run DUT mode The molbox stability criterion is the Ready Not Ready criterion for molbox flow see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Ready Not Ready Section Gas correction factor by which the molbox flow is multiplied when the gas flowing is not the normal DUT operating gas process gas The K factor is specific to the DUT see the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual K Factor Section 6 6 7 UNITS SELECTION The units selection function is represented by the toolbar icon Flow pressure and temperature units of measure can be changed with this function In Run DUT mode the flow units are controlled by the DUT Definition The pressure and temperature units may also be controlled by the DUT Definition if it specifies a density correction see Section 8 5 3 Table 6 provides information on the units selection panel fields Press lt Enter gt to activate the change after making a units selection FEATURE Flow Units drop down list Pressure Units drop down list Temperature Units drop down list Flow Units 71 ure Units Temperature Units 71 Figure 17 lt Units gt Panel Table 6 lt Units gt Panel Fields DESCRIPTION
275. p between the current test point and the number of points in a test The left side of the progress bar represents 0 progress and the right side represents 100 96 Each step and reading of a test point increments the progress indicator When Skip Back and Skip Forward buttons are used the progress indicator also reflects the current position Counting down dwell time 7s Figure 13 Status Bar 6 4 RUN MODES Run mode describes the automatic execution function that COMPASS is in Typically instruments are polled over their remote interface while in a run mode The top of the main screen always displays the current run mode All run modes support the ability to log data to a data file COMPASS has four run modes 1 Idle No run mode is active Menu items such is Setup can only be accessed in this mode They are not available in active run modes 2 Run molbox Activated by the Run Run molbox menu option This run mode is to work with the molbox without a DUT and without a Test Definition see Section 7 3 3 Run DUT Activated by the Run Run DUT menu option This run mode is to work with the molbox and a DUT Definition but without a Test Definition see Section 7 4 4 Run Test Activated by the Run Run Test menu option This run mode is to run a Test Definition on a DUT see Section 7 2 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 30 COMPASS for mol
276. p down list box next to the flow entry field If these units are changed the target flow value is converted to the new unit using the DUT Definition information when available conditional numeric entry field Vertical Scroll Bar Adjust the flow value by moving the scroll position indicator to the new target flow Click and drag the indicator to the desired position or use the up and down arrows to achieve the desired flow Each scroll position change is reflected in the target flow field The top and bottom of the scroll bar respectively represent the maximum and minimum flow value including the configured overshoot tolerance see Section 11 6 scroll bar Flow Regulation Turns ON one of the flow regulation modes see Section 9 5 6 When activated the flow control is actively adjusted by COMPASS to set the flow to the target flow point as indicated by either the molbox or the DUT Regulating to the DUT flow is not possible if the DUT output is not read remotely by COMPASS When regulation mode is active an asterisk appears next to the lt Set Point gt field on the lt DUT gt run screen The time parameter to the right of the display determines the time between flow adjustments Note that making the time between adjustments too short can cause unstable flow control slider control Jog Up Down Changes the last set target flow by the amount specified next to the jog buttons The set point resulting from each jog step displays on
277. pecified in the System Configuration is a molbox COMPASS loads the molbloc information into memory and determines which features are supported by the molbox Depending on the current setup this may take several seconds This is the only Test Initialization step that cannot be disabled O Select starting molbloc channel see Section 7 2 1 2 When a two channel molbox reference is used the initial molbloc channel can be selected if both channels have a valid molbloc If this step is turned OFF the current molbloc channel is automatically used Select DUT see Section 7 2 1 3 The DUT selection tool is presented allowing selection of the DUT Definition to run If this step is turned OFF the screen is not shown and the last DUT used is automatically selected Page 51 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual O Select Test see Section 7 2 1 4 The test selection tool is presented identifying the Test Definition associated with the DUT selected in Step A different Test Definition can be selected or viewed at this point If this step is turned OFF the screen is not shown and the Test Definition associated with the DUT is automatically selected If the DUT Definition does not specify a valid Test Definition this step must be completed regardless of the initialize options Re select DUT interface settings see Section 7 2 1 5 When applicable the DUT ID Interface screen is presented with the defau
278. perating pressure unit box Default Determines the molbox temperature unit of measure to use in Run DUT and Run temperature unit Test modes when the DUT does not require a density correction see Section 8 5 3 If the DUT does use a density correction the molbox temperature unit is set drop down list to the DUT s normal operating temperature unit box Page 123 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc FEATURE Display mass flow unit drop down list box 11 3 GRID The Tools Options COMPASS for molbox User s Manual DESCRIPTION COMPASS always calculates and displays the final molbox flow in the selected DUT Definition flow unit of measure in COMPASS run screens However the front panel of the molbox always displays in the fixed mass flow unit selected by this option This flow unit will display in the molbox Output run screen during Run DUT and Run Test run modes see Section 6 7 The molbox display flow units are limited because the COMPASS always reads and uses true mass flow units TAB Grid tab is used to customize the Data Grid run screen that is available while running tests see Section 6 7 5 The grid can be customized to display only desired columns of data suppressing other columns and to put the columns in a desired order Any test data item logged in the Data File can be included in any column of the Data Grid run screen by using the correct combination of features
279. perature 11 7 END TEST TAB The Tools Options End Test tab is used to set user preferences affecting operations that occur to conclude a test sequence see Section 7 2 3 The purpose of the End Test tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 48 When selections are complete click lt OK gt to save Selecting fixed repeat point delay deactivating the test notes and enabling the auto report generation can allow an automated test to run and generate a complete report without any user intervention 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 130 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual OPTIONS E3 molbox Grid Maintain Lists Initialize Test Run Test End Test Data File Repeating final point of each cycle Enable repeat for fixed time delay Prompt to repeat final point C No final point verification Prompt for test notes at the end of the test Auto generate report after complete tests Figure 74 Options End Test Tab Table 48 Options End Test Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Repeating final point of each cycle radio button Prompt for test notes at the end of the test check box Auto generate report after complete tests check box Auto print generated report check box COMPASS provides the capability to repeat test points using the Back Run Toolbar button
280. perature see Section 10 2 The Tools Options Run Test tab controls manual entry see Section 11 6 Test one specific DUT without having to enter its serial number and ID during test initialization Set the DUT up as an individual DUT see Section 8 5 2 Individual DUTs define unique DUTs and include the DUT s serial and ID number When a DUT definition is run it is assumed there is only one DUT with the specified serial number and ID Repeat a point in a test Use the Skip Back and Skip Forward keys from the Run Test Toolbar see Section 6 5 1 Check what DUT or Test Definition is being run and check DUT and Test Definition details while a test is running Click on the View DUT or View Test Run Test Toolbar keys to cause the DUT or Test Definition screen for the current DUT or test to appear without affecting test execution Close or move the display to view the previous run screens see Section 6 5 1 Repeat the same test several times without having to pause or restart the test Specify multiple test cycles in the Test Definition In the Sequence tab of the Test Definition see Section 9 5 4 specify a number 1 under Number of Test Cycles The complete flow point sequence will run for the number of times specified without initializing between runs If all test operation aspects are automated and Tools Options End Test Prompt to repeat last test point is NOT checked the cycles will run without int
281. ple files The directory option displays a directory browser that should be used to locate the target directory to copy from All files with the proper file extension are included in the lt Files to upgrade list The files selected for upgrade display in the Files to upgrade list for final confirmation O COMPASS converts all listed files into the proper database The number of files accessed and the number of files copied is provided for troubleshooting purposes in the event a DUT or Test File is not converted and an error message is displayed The upgrade process is complete Back can be used to select new files or to change from DUT Files to Test Files Selecting DUT and Test Files more than one time will create duplicate entries in the respective DUT and Test databases 2 4 RUNNING THE PROGRAM When the software installation is complete a new Windows group is created to hold the COMPASS program To run the program select it by pressing the Windows Start button selecting the Programs sub menu followed by the COMPASS for molbox group Click the lt COMPASS for molbox gt icon to start the program 2 5 UNINSTALLING To uninstall COMPASS use the Remove COMPASS for molbox icon in the program group created during installation As an alternative use the Add Remove Programs feature in the Windows Control Panel and select COMPASS for molbox In both cases a series of prompts must be followed in the application remov
282. plots see Section 12 4 1 Use the New toolbar option to create a new plot Enter the plot title and select the data to plot on the X axis followed by the data to plot on the Y axis All numeric data logged for each point in the data file can be selected as X or Y plot data The tolerance and best fit selections are not applied to custom plots Export the COMPASS data file into a spread sheet application for more extensive plotting ability Figure 82 shows the lt Custom Plot gt tab loaded with a custom plot Table 54 explains the features available on the tab Editing custom plots follows the same basic editing rules as all other editors within COMPASS Typing in any field begins the edit of the selected plot You must press the New toolbar option to create a new plot Plot Properties General Subsets Best Fit Custom Plot cree TO k Viewing Custom Plot 1 2 Plot Description Temperature vs Points X Axis Data Test Point 2 Y Axis Data molbloc Temperature 54 x Figure 82 Plot Properties Custom Plot Tab Page 143 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc DHI COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 54 Plot Properties Custom Plot Tab Fields FEATURES DESCRIPTION Plot Description Enter text that describes the data that will be plotted The text entered will appear at the bottom of the list of selectable plots text entry and at the top of plots gener
283. ponding DUT flows drawing a straight line between the minimum and maximum DUT flows and determining the maximum deviation of any average DUT flow from this line In this case hysteresis is also calculated see Section 19 9 If the test point sequence is not made up of corresponding ascending and descending or vice versa points linearity is calculated by drawing a straight line between the minimum and maximum DUT flows and determining the maximum deviation of any DUT flow from this line In this case hysteresis is not calculated see Section 19 9 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 192 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H If the minimum and maximum reference flows in the test sequence are equal linearity cannot be calculated and COMPASS displays lt N A gt in place of a number 19 9 HYSTERESIS COMPASS determines the hysteresis of DUT output relative to the reference readings The hysteresis value is included in the lt Calculations gt section of the Data File see Section 18 4 COMPASS first analyzes the test data to determine if a meaningful hysteresis calculation can be made For hysteresis to be calculated the test flow sequence must correspond to a normal ascending and descending or vice versa calibration sequence This means that the first and last nominal flow points must be the same as well as the second and second to last etc If the sequence does not meet this criterion COMPASS displays N A in place
284. pressibility factor of the lt Process Gas gt at the DUT s normal operating Compressibility Conditions listed in the lt Normal Operating Conditions gt panel of this tab The gas compressibility does not change significantly over a very wide range of pressure and required entry temperature For this reason 1 00 is used as the default value This entry is used to determine if a density the density of the Process Gas in the DUT s normal operating conditions Refer to correction Section 19 5 for calculation details concerning this parameter When the gas constant is entered as is used a density value this field is disabled 8 5 4 RANGE TAB The DUT Definition Range tab is provided to define the relationship between the DUT flow output and set point if applicable ranges and units It is assumed that all of these values are linearly proportional in the sense there is a constant ratio between output flow and set point Select the units that correspond to each parameter using the drop down list provided Table 18 provides details on each of the Range tab fields Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set Output A Unit sccm 0 00C RETE Minimum 0 0000 Unit 1 Y Mam 50 Minimum 0 00 Resolution 00000 Maximum 100 Is the DUT a flow controller X 0500 Unit Minimum 0 00 Maximum fioo Header Correction low Range Figure 41 DUT Definition Editor Range
285. ption there are two main steps to the test conclusion e Test Notes The Test Notes pop up appears to allow the user to enter notes concerning the test run that has just completed The notes are included in the Data File and can be used in reports In multi cycle tests only one display for the test notes occurs The test notes step can be skipped by selection in the Tools Options End Test tab see Section 11 7 e Test Complete Screen If the auto generate report option is selected on the Tools Options End Test tab see Section 11 7 the current report template is used to generate a report with the test Data File Regardless of this selection the Test Complete screen displays with the name and path of the test Data File and offers various post test options Operation always returns to the Test Complete screen until Exit Test has been selected Table 14 lists the Test Complete options Test Complete x Data File molcmps data S ample data Rename View Test Data Generate Report Re Run Test Plot Test Data Delete File Exit Test Figure 35 Test Complete Panel Page 59 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 14 Test Complete Panel Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Rename Used to override the default name and directory for the Data File resulting from the test Brings up a standard Windows Save As file box showing the
286. ption determines how the Data File directories will be named The choices are DUT serial number identification model manufacturer or record label In addition lt None gt can be selected The directory name will include the full text of the DUT Definition field selected unless the lt long file name gt option is disabled or DUT information contains one of the following invalid characters as part of the field V lt gt or If so the directory name will contain all text up to the first occurrence of the character Page 133 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 11 9 DISPLAY TAB AND DISPLAY MENU The Tools Options Display tab is used to set user preferences affecting the default COMPASS display for each run mode see Section 6 7 Regardless of the default selections chosen all available run screens can be repositioned and scaled as desired during any run mode This tab also provides the option to remove unwanted displays The purpose and operation of Display tab functions are described in Table 50 The list of available displays is created using Display Save Custom Display As during Run DUT Run molbox and Run Test run modes see Section 7 While running use the Run Toolbar to open the desired run screens Position and size the run screens to any preferred configuration see Section 6 5 Then select the Display Save Custom Display As menu option
287. r DUTs that specify a density correction If no density correction is set up the temperature field is N A see Section 8 5 3 When specified the Temperature Device in the System Configuration is the source of this temperature value see Section 10 2 Otherwise the temperature displayed is a default value or the last temperature manually entered see Section 11 6 Page 45 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual LABEL DESCRIPTION Nominal DUT set point When an asterisk appears next to the value automatic flow regulation is active see Section 8 5 6 Measured Set Point Measured DUT set point for DUTs that control flow with a voltage V or current mA based set point unit The Set Point DMM in the System Configuration is the source of this data see Section 10 2 6 7 4 AVERAGE DATA RUN SCREEN Both Run molbox and Run DUT run modes provide continuous averaging of flow information Each time the averaging time counts down to zero the lt Average Data gt run screen is updated with the new average results In Run Test mode all averaged data displays in the lt Data Grid gt run screen so there is no reason to have an independent averaging run screen To change the averaging time click the averaging time box enter the new time value and press lt Enter gt This triggers the beginning of a new averaging cycle Changing the current gas or K factor also triggers a new averaging cycle When
288. rance Location of point A relative to point B in a flow system in which point A is at a different location in the reverse direction of the flow For example the upstream molbloc pressure port is upstream relative to the downstream pressure port because it is at a different location from the downstream port in the opposite direction of the flow Volume Flow Units Units of measure of volume flow sometimes called actual flow Do not confuse volume flow units with volumetrically based mass flow units See the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Section for an extensive discussion of flow units of measure Page 209 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual NOTES 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 210 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 22 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT COMPASS for molbox COMPASS is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws COMPASS is licensed not sold You may install or use one copy of COMPASS on a single computer The primary user of the computer on which COMPASS is installed may make a second copy for his or her use on a second computer used only for producing reports using the COMPASS Report Editor function You may also store or install a copy of COMPASS on a storage device for the sole purpose of backing up or archiving in case of accidental loss or for validating the program functions or maintai
289. re 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Example 1 DUT Range Set nnn einen nnns nannten tenens 14 Example 1 DUT Read Command 15 Example 1 molbox1 Reference Setup ssssssssssssse eene entente nennen 16 Example 1 System 16 Example 1 DUT Interface Setup ssssssssssssesesssesene enne ennt nennen nns 17 Example 1 RS 232 Setup with Ref 2 17 Example 2 DMM Set p er Ee ete tia Eee eta ed ae a Ete ode anke a adero eee 19 Examples DUT Setup ioo tn et x e og Fe M dd Hai ARR eR Gees 20 Example 4 System Configuration 21 Example 5 DUT DeflnitiOni ois cir raa a tear rere tane e 23 Example 5 System 24 Examlle 7 Test Setup md ee i e p t dee
290. re ASCII control codes as part of the command set Control codes are specified in the instrument documentation as non printable hexidecimal characters e g 04H or 04 COMPASS is designed to handle all of these cases The Leading characters to strip Set Unit Variable and Insert Special Character features can be used to support any interfacing protocol However Read Commands responses from instruments that do not directly include the numerical value of the devices output in the output units are not supported This applies only to commands which require an output The output of all other commands is ignored It is critical to check the lt No Response gt option for commands that do not respond This will prevent COMPASS from timing out while waiting for a response All remote commands must be entered contiguously The first blank command entry is assumed to be the end of the command list even if commands are specified beyond the blank entry Up to 10 commands can be issued as part of the initialize read or set command setup Page 145 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 13 2 REMOTE COMMAND EDITOR The remote command editor is used to define commands issued using an RS 232 or IEEE 488 interface The editor changes display options based on the type of command being set up Some commands require a response while others do not Remote command editors are connected to the
291. re and temperature entries Actual flow units such as alm and accm require data acquisition of pressure and temperature The Pressure Measurement and Temperature Measurement selections in Setup System determine whether or not these are read automatically or entered manually in COMPASS run modes see Section 10 2 The reference temperature for a volumetrically based mass flow unit do not confuse the flow unit of measure reference temperature with the DUT s normal operating temperature see Section 8 5 3 This field is enabled only when a volumetrically based mass flow units such as sIm or sccm is selected When an actual flow unit such as alm or acem is selected data acquisition of the actual DUT gas temperature is required in COMPASS run modes The reference pressure for a volumetrically based mass flow unit do not confuse the flow unit of measure reference temperature with the DUT s normal operating pressure see Section 8 5 3 This field is enabled only when a volumetrically based mass flow unit such as slm and sccm is selected When an actual flow unit such as alm or accm is selected Data acquisition of the actual DUT gas pressure is required in COMPASS run modes Defines the value by which to multiply the base flow unit to obtain the user defined flow unit Most conversions consist of time and or volume translations e g seconds or hours and or cubic centimeters to cubic meters However
292. recise calculation of the flow to take into account that the rotameter is affected by gas density cannot be made without knowledge of actual gas temperature and absolute pressure at the rotameter during the test This information must be entered manually when a test is run if it can t be obtained automatically The setup of manual entry of pressure and temperature is a two part process The Setup System Pressure Measurement and Temperature Measurement selections should both read Manual when not using automated reading devices see Section 10 2 Then use the Tools COMPASS Options Run Test Tab to specify either first point each point or use default value for the manual entry method of the gas pressure and temperature see Section 11 6 The setup of automatic pressure and temperature measurement is a two step process First the Hardware Definitions for the devices used to measure pressure and temperature must be created using the Setup Hardware Temperature and or Pressure tab see Section 10 3 4 Next the devices must be selected in the System Configuration using Setup System Temperature and Pressure pull down menus see Section 10 2 System Config Reference olbozi 123 DUT Output DMM Reference mobos Set point power supply Reference mobos S amp point DMM Reference mobox 7 Frequency Neasurement Pressure Neasurement RPM3 Example Temperature Neasurement T C
293. red for every data point logged This minimizes the automation provided by this function Averages all device outputs and logs the results at fixed time intervals When the icon is pressed the lt Auto Point Average Setup gt see Figure 20 displays to allow entry of the averaging time and the intervals between averages Then COMPASS will automatically begin averaging data When the average is complete the results are logged and the countdown to the next average begins When the time specified as the lt Restart average every s gt has been reached another averaging cycle will begin This process is repeated until the lt Abort Data Acquisition gt button is pressed or the run mode is closed Taking data in this way can be convenient when trying to mimic a test that includes multiple readings per point Realize that taking data at short time intervals can result in very large data file press the Abort Data Acquisition option to abort fixed interval data acquisition Auto Point Average Setup ix Average flow for s fio Restart average every Cancel Figure 20 lt Auto Point Average Setup gt Press this icon to abort data acquisition at fixed intervals or a point currently being averaged PAN Never use other Control Toolbar features when this icon is visible Changing the state of the eystem while a point is in progress leade to faulty data logged in the data file Page 41 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc
294. rence this field represents the micro range RPT measurement molbloc Re molbloc flow Reynolds number as calculated by the molbox molbloc T molbloc temperature as measured by the molbox from the molbloc PRTs Tare The molbox RPT tare in effect when the point was taken Micro Tare The molbox RFM micro range RPT tare in effect when the point was taken available only when using a molbox RFM with microrange as the reference Serial number and range of the molbloc in use when the data point was taken When changing molblocs during tests this field can be useful to make sure that the correct molbloc was used when the point was taken Auxiliary Auxiliary Data fields are used to hold any auxiliary data entered manually or Data 0 9 automatically logged by COMPASS see Section 10 3 7 Page 185 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc DH COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 186 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 19 CALCULATIONS 19 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS operation includes many internal calculations Most of these calculations are related to analyzing the data taken during a test run The internal calculations performed by COMPASS are documented in the sections that follow The calculations have been verified both by comparison of the program code content to the defined formulas and by parallel manual calculation 19 2 DUT FLOW The DUT flow is the DUT output converted to the DUT
295. ressure and how the tare will be activated see Section 9 5 5 There are 3 choices Selected points Uses the tare points manually inserted into the sequence using the lt Points gt table lt Insert gt option see Section 9 5 2 First point Automatically adds a tare at the first test point The lt Points gt table lt Insert gt option is not active when this choice is selected All points Automatically inserts a tare at every test point in the test point table When new points are added they automatically receive a tare when this choice is selected The lt Points gt table lt Insert gt option is not active when this choice is selected Dwell is a pause that occurs following stability testing prior to taking averaged test data at each flow point When lt Dwell gt is set to lt Timed gt COMPASS dwells at each test point for the specified lt Dwell Time 0 999s When lt Dwell gt is set to lt Manual gt COMPASS dwells at each test point until lt OK gt is clicked on the lt Continue Test gt pop up This feature can be used to synchronize readings or to pause operation during flow setting for example to make adjustments to the DUT Determines a fixed or user selectable time over which reference and DUT readings are averaged when taking data at each flow point When lt Timed gt is specified COMPASS averages for the fixed lt Averaging Time gt entered 0 999s Manual averaging allows either a fixed time or user sele
296. rmation see Section 6 7 6 2 MAIN MENU BAR The main menu bar is divided into six separate selections Each menu item is summarized below and covered in detail in various sections of this manual e Run Use this choice to start one of the three COMPASS test running data acquisition modes Run Test initializes and runs Test Definitions while Run DUT and Run molbox both provide monitoring and control features without a pre defined test script see Section 7 e Setup All of the necessary program setup features are contained in this menu choice The ability to create DUT and Test Definitions and to configure and select support hardware are the available choices see Section 10 e Tools Access tools to customize COMPASS convert pressure temperature and flow units create flow units upgrade files from older COMPASS versions directly communicate with any of the supported instruments or run the Process Gas Editor see Section 11 e Data View plot or print the raw data contained in the Data Files that result from test execution see Section 18 A link to the COMPASS Report Editor is also available in this menu choice see Section 12 e Display Choose which child windows to display when a run mode has been selected The windows can be tiled or cascaded if desired New custom run displays can be created and previously saved custom displays can be selected see Section 11 9 e Help Access on line help see Section 17
297. roubleshoot problems After proper card installation no special setup is required to use the card in COMPASS drop down list selection Di Select the manufacturer of the DeviceNet card used by the computer running COMPASS to read DeviceNet DUTs A selection in this category is required only to run tests that include communications with a DeviceNet Otherwise lt None gt may be selected COMPASS supports only SST and National Instruments DeviceNet cards The selected card must be properly configured for use by the computer running COMPASS Refer to the card instructions for information on how to set up the card and troubleshoot problems After proper card installation no special setup is required to use the card in COMPASS Use the Setup Hardware menu choice to modify the selected card s see Section drop down list selection Default DUT This is the default RS 232 port to use to communicate with DUTs whose Output Types is RS 232 Port RS232 in the DUT Definition Read tab and or whose Setpoint Type is lt RS232 gt in the DUT Definition Set tab see Section 8 5 9 This is only the default selection COMPASS will still prompt for entry of the actual port during test initialization The default value can be used automatically by turning OFF the appropriate test initialization option see Section 11 5 drop down list selection 10 3 SETUP HARDWARE Setup Hardware is a pop up window u
298. rrent gt lt Frequency gt or lt Manual gt If the DUT is connected to the molbox e 5 252 2 port use the Ref COM2 gt selection at the bottom of the Com Port drop down list COMPASS automatically handles the necessary command formatting to pass commands through the 2 port 2 When using the Setup DUT ID Interface screen keep in mind that DUT read and set types refer to the manner in which data will be gathered from the DUT DUTs with electrical outputs are read with a DMM and the read type is Voltage Current it is not the interface on the DMM such as RS 232 or IEEE 488 Only DUTs read or set directly by RS 232 IEEE 488 interfaces are considered to use RS 232 or IEEE interface see Sections 8 5 8 8 5 9 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Setup DUT Identification ix Serial Number aE 445 Identification 4407DownStream Read Interface 1 2400 E 7 1 5232 Set Interface 1 2400 71 R5232 Figure 33 lt Setup DUT ID Interface gt Panel Page 56 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 7 2 1 6 USER ID The user ID entry screen is presented The last user ID can be accepted a new user ID may be entered or a previously entered user ID may be selected from the user ID drop down list If this step is turned OFF in Tools Options Initialize Test see Section 11 5 the screen is not shown and the last user ID selected is automatically used Any time a new user ID is entered it
299. rrent gt in the DUT Definition Set tab see Sections 8 5 4 8 5 9 The drop down list choices are created using the Hardware Definition Power Supply tab see Section 10 3 5 If a molbox is selected as the Flow Reference Reference molbox gt is a choice in this list A selection in this category is required only to run DUT s that are flow controllers and whose set point type is lt Voltage Current gt This is the device used to measure the analog set point value to DUTs that are checked as flow controllers in the DUT Definition Range tab and whose Setpoint Type is lt Voltage Current gt in the DUT Definition Set tab see Sections 8 5 4 8 5 9 The drop down list choices are created using the Hardware Definition DMM tab see Section 10 3 4 This is the same list as the DUT Output in this screen A selection in this category is required only when the DUT being run is a flow controller its set point type is Voltage Current and the test being run specifies Set Point data acquisition see Section 9 5 9 This is the device used to read the output of DUTs whose Output Type is Frequency in the DUT Definition Range tab see Section 8 5 4 The drop down list choices are created using the Hardware Definition Frequency tab see Section 10 3 4 selection in this category is required only to run lt Voltage Current gt output type DUTS This is the device used to automatically read the gas pressure at th
300. ruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 67 Supported Gas Molecular Weights WEIGHT 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 198 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 68 Conversions From kg s To mole s For Various Gases Table 69 Conversion From mole s To pccm TO CONVERT mole sec TO pccm MULTIPLY BY ANY GAS 1 34483 E 06 Page 199 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 55 for molbox User s Manual 19 13 PRESSURE UNIT CONVERSIONS COMPASS performs all internal pressure conversion to and from Pascal Pa the SI unit for pressure Table 70 provides the conversion coefficients used by COMPASS and other DHI products to convert numerical values expressed in Pascal Pa units to corresponding values expressed in other units Table 70 Pressure Unit Conversion Chart inWa 60 F inch of water 19 14 WATER RATIO The water ratio is used to correct the flow of a molblocS for the difference between moist and dry Air flow The water ratio is never used for laminar molblocs or with gases other than Air When dry Air is used the water ratio should be 0 water ratio is determined based on the current ambient pressure temperature and humidity following Dalton s Rule and thermodynamic principals using water saturation properties The water ratio is calculed on the Water Ratio Calculator This form is accessed in the Tools Water Ratio Calculator me
301. s Lower performance PC s will experience significant delays in generating reports and plots of such data files Therefore it is not recommended to use the plotting and reporting functions with very large data files Instead export the data file to a spread sheet application for further analysis 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 62 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 8 Setup DUT 8 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS is organized around the support and testing of Devices Under Test DUTs DUTs are defined in DUT Definitions The information contained in the DUT Definition determines which System Configuration devices are required see Section 10 2 for the COMPASS run modes DUT Definitions not only specify the relationship between set point output and flow they determine how this data will be acquired Some DUTs can output directly using an RS 232 or IEEE 488 interface while others require a DMM or a manual entry to log their output Some DUTs are sensitive to the density of the flowing gas so that gas density corrections must be made to properly evaluate them There are DUT s that control flow and others that measure only The DUT Definition supports all the necessary features to properly set up a very wide variety of DUTs There are two types of DUT Definitions specified in the DUT Header tab see Section 8 5 2 e Individual DUT Definitions are intended to define a specific individual DUT They include a unique DUT serial number an
302. s created with the Process Gas Editor the Process Gas Editor must be used to add the gas see Section 15 Use the link to the Editor found in the Tools menu If the selected Manufacturer was manually entered use the Add Gas option at the top of the list to add the gas Realize that no K factor information will be provided by COMPASS for this gas The K factor must be manually entered in the Test tab see Section 8 5 6 Page 68 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 8 5 3 CORRECTION TAB The Correction DUT Definition tab is provided to accommodate DUTs that are sensitive to gas density COMPASS can perform a square root or proportional gas density correction based on the characteristics of the flowing gas the DUT s normal operating pressure and temperature and the current gas pressure and temperature This feature allows a density sensitive DUT that is intended to be operated at a given pressure and temperature to be tested under current pressure and temperature conditions In general gas density corrections do not apply to thermal mass flow controllers and meters MFCs and MFMs A density correction is commonly used on rotameters turbine meters and other devices whose operating principle is the measurement of volume flow and a conversion to mass flow If the DUT outputs in mass flow units e g sccm mol s mg s density corrections if needed are almost certainly performed by the DUT itself See the m
303. s instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 45 When selections are complete click lt OK gt to save changes OPTIONS x molbox Grid Maintain Lists Initialize Test Run Test End Test Data File Test Initialization xl Select verify starting molbloc channel Select DUT 1 xl Select Test 1 Re select DUT interface settings 4 Select enter user name Figure 72 Options Initialize Test Tab Table 45 Options Initialize Test Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Select verify starting When checked a molbloc selection form appears when the flow reference is a molbloc Channel molbox1 with two valid molblocs see Section 7 2 1 2 If unchecked the test hecki will run using the current molbloc channel This selection is ignored when the check box reference does not contain two valid molblocs Select DUT When checked the DUT Selector is offered see Section 7 2 1 3 If unchecked check box the select DUT step is skipped and the last DUT that has been accessed edited viewed created or run is automatically used as the selected DUT Select Test If checked the Test Selector is offered see Section 7 2 1 4 If unchecked check box the test specified in the DUT Definition Test Tab is automatically selected see Section 8 5 6 If COMPASS cannot access the Test Definition then the Test Selector appears anyway Re select DUT If checked the lt Setup DUT ID Interface
304. s name and serial number in the List display panel upper left hand corner To edit an existing Definition double click it or click on the Edit toolbar function with the desired Definition highlighted Double clicking the Definition listing clicking on the Edit toolbar function or clicking on the New new toolbar function causes the Edit Device or Add New Device pop up to appear These pop ups are identical but differentiated by name to make it clear which task is currently being performed The Edit Device or Add New Device pop ups allow a Definition to be set up from scratch or edited from an existing one The purpose of the DMM Frequency Pressure and Temperature Definition Tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 37 When creating a new Definition all the fields come up blank When editing an existing Definition the fields come up populated with the information on that device When editing is complete click OK to save changes It is critical to specify the proper unit of measure when a unit is requested for a device Failure to identify the unit correctly will result in erroneous data Power Supplies and DMMs can have independent setups for both volt V and current A unite at the same time COMPASS will automatically use the correct setup when running The molbox MFC control option acts as a DMM and as a Power Supply however it
305. s selection of what data to log see Sections 9 5 9 and 9 5 10 The DUT output measured set point pressure and temperature can be activated or Page 61 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual deactivated at this time DUT s that are setup to use a density correction or DUTs with actual flow units must use pressure and temperature data acquisition The Run DUT option is similar to running a test without a fixed sequence All operations available in the test are available on the lt Control Toolbar gt Use the toolbar to change molbox settings purge leak check and tare as desired Use the data acquisition lt Control Toolbar gt options to create a test data file and log test data see Section 6 6 10 Based on the DUT Definition not all lt Control Toolbar gt functions will be available For example if manual flow control is selected the lt Flow Control gt option will not be available Use the available features of the Control Toolbar to purge leak test or tare the molbox change the flow rate and stability criterion and to log data to a data file COMPASS polls the System Configuration instruments and responds to the toolbar options until the Abort button is pressed 0 Using any of the lt Control Toolbar gt automatic data logging options can result in very large data files These are files with significantly greater than 1000 data points COMPASS was not intended to manipulate such file
306. se after the tare is complete The user must press Continue or close the window to continue test execution Pressing Continue without taring does not cause an error If Wait for Enter to tare is not checked in the Test Definition COMPASS waits for pressure stability then automatically executes the tare function COMPASS will repeat the automated tare procedure up to three times if errors are encountered during taring If a tare value is set the new tare information is stored in the Tare DP and lt Tare gt Grid and Data File columns see Section 18 4 The Status field also includes a t to flag that a tare occurred Jog before dwell If jog mode is selected in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 6 the Flow Control window displays with only the Target Flow and Jog buttons active see Section 6 6 8 Use these control functions in the necessary combination to set the desired flow Typically Jog is used to adjust the flow to put the indication of a flow meter on its cardinal point if desired This feature is often used when testing a rotameter or other visual flow indicator with a graduated scale Dwell If timed dwell is specified in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 4 the dwell time counts down and execution continues If the Test Definition specifies manual dwell COMPASS waits for the operator to press OK on the Dwell Complete dialog box before test execution continues Take da
307. sed to create the Hardware Definitions that are available for selection in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 The window is made up of tabs corresponding to different hardware types In each tab functions are available to display edit copy create and delete Hardware Definitions All editing occurs on the lt Device Editor gt form corresponding to the device being edited The tabs of this display include e Reference see Section 10 3 3 Defines and stores flow references These are the devices that are available in the System Configuration lt Flow Reference gt drop down list and used by COMPASS as the source of reference flow values when running tests Only molbloc molbox flow references support automated data acquisition within COMPASS 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 102 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual e DMM see Section 10 3 4 Defines and stores digital multimeters DMMs These are the devices that are available in the System Configuration lt DUT Output DMM gt and lt Setpoint DMM gt drop down lists and can be used by COMPASS to read lt Voltage Current gt output and set point type DUTs see Sections 8 5 8 8 5 9 e Power Supply see Section 10 3 5 Defines and stores analog power supplies These are the devices that are available in the System Configuration Set point power supply drop down list and can be used by COMPASS to set the flow for lt Voltage Current gt setpoint type DUTs se
308. see Section 18 4 1 Instructions on the operation of the Grid tab are provided in Table 43 When the grid is set up as desired click OK to save changes All data is logged to the Data File in the same format regardless of the columns of data selected for display using the Grid tab The grid setup is provided for customization of the lt Data Grid gt run screen only see Section 6 7 5 Use the View Data File option to view all columns of test data see Section 12 2 Multiple grid display items can be selected in two ways a hold down the SHIFT key and use the UP and or DOWN arrow keys to make multiple contiguous selections b hold down the CTRL key and us the mouse to make appropriate shift multiple non contiguous selections Add or remove the selections by using the button Sort the lt Columns in grid gt display by selecting an item then using the UP or DOWN arrow keys while holding the CTRL button 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc OPTIONS E3 molbox Grid Maintain Lists Initialize Test Run Test End Test Data File Available columns Columns in arid Rdg Set Err Avg Time Date gt gt gt gt gt Use CTRL Up or Down arrow to change the position of the selection in the grid Scroll to display current data point Figure 70 Options Grid Tab Page 124 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 43
309. selection ismade Many combinations of plot properties are possible to offer a high level of customization These properties are also available on report template plot selections see Section 16 Check an option to turn it ON and uncheck it to turn it OFF 124 2 1 GENERAL The features on the General tab of the plot properties window are described in Table 52 Best fit and tolerance options do not apply to custom plots Plot Properties General Subsets Best Fit Point Type Points and Line DK Include tolerance bars 7 Lif 21 5 the tolerance Include grid Figure 79 Plot Properties General Tab Table 52 Plot Properties General Tab Fields FEATURES DESCRIPTION Point Type Determines the type of point plotting method to apply to the plot data drop down list gt Points and Line Applies a symbol to all data points and box connects a straight line between them e Line A straight line is used to connect all data points but no specific indication is used to mark each data point e Points A symbol is used to mark each data point in the plot and no line is used to connect them Include Causes tolerance bars to be displayed on the graph The tolerance tolerance bars bars are calculated using the tolerance from the DUT Definition check box Tolerance tab see Section 8 5 Limit Y axis to This option is active only when tolerance bars are included in the 1 5X t
310. sets the molbox to fundamental mass flow units and then performs conversions to the other units and other operating conditions when required Do not refer to the molbox display when you are running COMPASS A list of standard mass flow units available for display on the molbox can be selected using the Tools Options molbox lt Display mass flow units gt units feature see Section 11 2 As an alternative press AVERAGE DISPLAY on the molbox keypad Select the unit of measure that you would like displayed on the second bottom line of the front panel display Refer to the molbox Operation and Maintenance Manual DISPLAY Section for details Keep in mind that COMPASS does not transmit pressure and temperature values for volume or actual flow units to the molbox even if COMPASS is making real time measurements Therefore the volume flow units displayed by the molbox and by COMPASS will not agree Run a test in which the flow at each point is adjusted to a nominal flow value for example to the nominal point when calibrating a rotameter Specify jog before dwell in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 6 This causes test execution to pause at each point to allow flow adjustment jog prior to taking data at the point Use COMPASS to run tests with a reference other than a DHI molbloc molbox Though COMPASS only supports automated operation with DHI molbloc molbox mass flow references COMPASS can be used to run manual entr
311. shooting see Section 13 6 action button Page 77 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 8 5 9 SET TAB The DUT Definition Set tab defines how COMPASS is to set flow when running test on DUTs that are set up as flow controllers in the DUT Definition Range tab see Section 8 5 4 If the DUT is NOT set up as a flow controller the Set tab is not active If the DUT is NOT a flow controller flow may be set manually or by a flow controlling device specified in the Test Definition CONTROL table see Section 9 5 6 Choose the manner in which set point commands are given from the Set Point Type list The set point to flow output relationship defined in the DUT Definition Range tab see Section 8 5 4 is used to convert set point values to the necessary set point units Table 23 provides information on the individual fields of the Set tab Header Correction Range Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set SetPoint Set Point Type Voltage Curent 7 Settings Initialization Commands Set Commands 2 50 Figure 46 DUT Definition Editor Set Tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 78 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 23 DUT Definition Editor Set Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Set Point Type Specifies the manner in which set point commands are given for DUTs that can control flow If the DUT
312. skip over previously executed points when the step back key has been used to go back several points The tool is enabled only in Run Test mode Suspends remote communications with all instruments being used by COMPASS Use this feature to allow front panel access to an instrument while COMPASS is in a run mode This feature is also useful during test execution as it also pauses any test timers currently in operation Click lt Pause gt again to resume operation Abort lt Abort gt causes the lt Abort Test gt confirmation pop up to appear to abort the test that is running When COMPASS is in Run molbox or Run DUT mode there is no confirmation after the button is pressed View DUT Causes the DUT Definition Editor to display in the main screen with the information corresponding to the active DUT Definition see Section 8 5 No editing zi or new DUT selections can be made at this time This feature is not available when Run molbox is selected View Test Causes the Test Definition Editor to display in the main screen with the information corresponding to the active Test Definition see Section 9 5 This allows complete information on the current test procedure to be reviewed without interrupting the test This feature is available only in Run Test mode Page 31 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 6 5 2 DISPLAY TOOLS Table 3 describes toolbar features that relate to COMP
313. splays the DUT Selector loaded with a sorted list of the DUTs see Section 8 4 The selected DUT will display in the DUT Definition Editor toolbar button Scroll Select Scrolls to the next DUT Definition following the current sort order see Section 8 4 4 im scroll bar 8 5 2 HEADER TAB This DUT Definition Editor folder contains common DUT header information The purpose of the Header fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 16 Do not use the following characters any of the Header fields V 2 lt gt la comma or tab character These characters will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 11 8 Header Correction Range Tolerance Test Conditions Read Set DUT Information Record Type Individual Manufacturer BULBCO Inc bd Model BFdut X Serial Number 2393 Identification E T1851 Process Gas 2 Nitrogen x Figure 39 DUT Definition Editor Header Tab Page 67 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc FEATURE Record Type required drop down list selection Manufacturer required drop down list selection Model required drop down list selection Serial Number optional text entry field Individual DUT Definitions only Identification
314. st r Information Manufacturer Generic 00000 Model MFC20m4 Serial Number Identification Example CaibaionDae x Dy d 7 Interface Flow Range p 5 slm 0 00 Uses configured set point Set Range f 20 mA power supply Gas Conversion to 2 n4697H2 HYDROGEN v No command setup Figure 65 Hardware Definition Controller Tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 114 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Edit Flow Controller Header Flack CO PS Method 4407 Set Range Figure 66 Hardware Definition lt Edit Controller gt Panel Page 115 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 39 Hardware Definition Edit Controller Screen Fields Mec Fearon Enum Labas anite reat Erun Dees devoe mosar Identification Optional Text Entry Provides a device identification Write in a device identification if desired The field can be used for internal device tracking or any other information desired The value entered will be included in run test Data Files and can be included in reports Do not use the following characters 2 gt comma or tab character These characters will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options D
315. st fit data only Iv Best Fit Type Fourth Order Include best fit equation Figure 81 Plot Properties Best Fit Tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 142 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Include best fit data in single cycle plots check box Plot best fit data only check box Best Fit Type drop down list Table 53 Plot Properties Best Fit Tab Fields FEATURES DESCRIPTION Causes the best fit straight line of the plotted data to be calculated and plotted in addition to the actual error plot Applies only to error type plots and does not apply when more than one test cycle is plotted Causes the best fit straight line of the data to be calculated and plotted The actual error plot is not included Applies only to error type plots and does not apply when more than one test cycle is plotted When a best fit is applied to the plot this feature determines the order of the best fit polynomial used See the calculations section for details on how the best fit data is determined see box Section 19 7 Include best fit equation check box This feature displays the best fit polynomial on the plot when a best fit is included in the plot The equation of the first data cycle plotted is used when multiple cycles are plotted 124 24 CUSTOM PLOT This tab allows custom plots to be created and removed All custom plots are available at the bottom of the list selectable
316. stomizable reports and plots can be created using Data Files see Section 16 Other than running tests COMPASS supports direct molbox and DUT run options to allow remote control of the molbox and or a DUT with all COMPASS features active see Sections 0 7 4 This feature provides a remote interface to all measurement and control instruments required by the DUT and setup in the current System Configuration see Section 10 2 The output information displays on various program run screens Use this feature to perform tests or operations that do not require creation of a Data File or execution of a specific test script Many operational preferences relating to how tests are initialized and run and how data is gathered and stored are configurable with user options see Section 11 The use of these configurable preferences results in a customized test environment to meet a very wide variety of testing requirements By selecting the proper options a user can start an automated test and return to a custom formatted report Detailed information and assistance on COMPASS application and functions are available in this manual see Sections 4 5 and 20 and with on line help accessed by pressing F1 or selecting Help 3 111 BASICS SUMMARY In summary the following steps and sections should be referred to when setting up and Page 7 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual running a test for the first time Su
317. t button to embed the link into the document at the current cursor location and close the Data Field Insertion Tool The embedded link appears as a character string e g DUT_MNF The character strings consistent and intuitive structure to help identify them in use category field name except data in columns such as output data has two Do not edit the link character strings or they will no longer operate They can be cut and pasted to new locations so long as care is taken not to alter them The formatting present in the document at the current insertion point is applied to the field link and to the data imported from the test Data File when the template is merged It is a good idea to use tabs to fix field key locations when column alignment ie desired in a report Using spaces does not always give the desired results Text can vary in size based on the selected font This moves the relative location of an inserted field preventing the desired column alignment Click the lt Ruler gt to create a tab or adjust an existing tab to get the desired effect COMPASS Field Insertion Tool x Field Categories Field Name Best Fit Flow Slope Best Fit Output Offset Best Fit Dutput Slope Best Fit Set Offset Best Fit Set Slope Flow Transfer Function Test Single Entries Linearity Dutput Transfer Function Insert Repeatability m Close Use data from Key ID RSL HYS Figure 95 Field Ins
318. t DUTs This tool is used when initializing Run DUT and Run Test run modes see Sections 7 4 7 2 Click any of the Selector column headers to sort the DUT Definitions low to high by the data in that column For example clicking the lt Model gt column header automatically re sorts the DUTs based on model If a DUT is being edited the lt Editing gt ID number will most likely change with each new sort The resulting order of DUT Definitions in the DUT Selector determines the order used when scrolling through DUT Definitions in the DUT Definition Editor Use the search tools on the DUT Definition Selector to locate a DUT when many exist Use the lt Search by gt list box to determine which column heading will be used for the search Then enter the lt Search for gt text and press the Search button If the DUT is located it is selected on the display otherwise a message displays noting the DUT was not located Click hold and move the separator bar between column headers to expand or contract the column widths This may be necessary if a DUT field extends beyond the width of the default column display The difference between individual DUTs and DUT Profiles is evident in the Selector The former displays serial number and identification information while the latter does not Since most frequently the Record Label is used to select DUTs the label text of any selected DUT always displays in the lt Record Label gt field at the bottom left
319. t Point DMM Includes information from the DMM used to measure the DUT set point see Sections 10 2 10 3 4 If the DUT set point was not measured during the test these fields are set to N A Includes information on the pressure measuring device used to log gas pressure at the DUT during test execution see Sections 10 2 10 3 4 If pressure was not measured during the test these fields are set to N A Temperature Includes information on the temperature measuring device used to log gas temperature at the DUT during test execution see Sections 10 2 10 3 4 If temperature was not measured during the test these fields are set to N A Flow Controller Includes information on the flow controller used to control flow during the test see Section 9 5 6 10 3 6 If the flow control was by the DUT or was manual these fields are set to N A Test Includes information from the Test Definition that defines the test procedure used to run the test see Section 9 Pre Test Includes the results of the leak test if included and specifies whether or not a system purge was used at the beginning of the test see Sections 7 2 7 2 1 Test Data Includes all point by point data logged during the test see Section 7 2 2 Includes values calculated from the test data measurement uncertainty linearity hysteresis repeatability and the best fit straight line transfer functions When multiple test cycles are used the final statistics values determi
320. t is most commonly used to run this DUT When a DUT to run is selected in Run Test the Test Definition specified here is automatically offered as the Test Definition to use though a different test can be selected If test selection in test initialization is turned OFF see Section 11 5 the lt Default Test gt will be used automatically The association of a test with a DUT makes it possible to assure that a DUT is always tested with the correct test procedure Click the field or press the lt Select gt button to display the lt Test Definition Selector gt see Section 9 4 Highlight the desired Test Definition and press lt OK gt to select it Right click this field to remove the Test Definition entry optional entry field 8 5 7 CONDITIONS TAB The DUT Definition Conditions tab is used to record information about the conditions under which the DUT is normally tested The information is included in the Data File when tests are run No calculations are performed using this Conditions tab information and it has no affect on COMPASS operation Table 21 provides information on the various Conditions tab selections Header Correction Range Tolerance Test Read Set Attitude 1 6 Flow Direction Horizontal EI Mount BaseDown Description Standard E Exhaust Normal Exhaust Condition Atmosphere X Exhaust Pressure v Figure 44 DUT Definition Editor Conditions Tab
321. t most position of the ruler corresponds to the left margin setting of the document Changes in the margin settings will not reflect on the ruler The COMPASS Report Editor uses the ruler mainly to support tab positioning and paragraph indentation Table 61 gives a functional description of the options present on the Ruler toolbar Tabs and indent values are adjusted by using the mouse to click and drag the tool to the desired location Where the mouse button is released determines the new location of the indent or tab Figure 100 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler Table 61 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION a Sets or displays the left indentation point of the first line of aparagraph The ruler location of this indent always Left Indent displays as the number of inches from the left margin Sets or displays the left hanging indent of subsequent lines in a paragraph Using the mouse click the left hanging Left Hanging Indent indent image and drag it to the desired location then release the mouse button to drop it This parameter has no effect on the first line of a paragraph and can be greater than or less than the left indent Sets or displays the right indentation point of a paragraph Unlike the left indent properties the right indent affects the Right Indent entire paragraph The ruler location of this indent always displays as the number of inches from the left margin T Sets or displa
322. t other than the test associated with the DUT Definition see Section 7 2 1 4 It can also be accessed by clicking the Select Test toolbar button in the Test Definition Editor The Selector displays a sorted list of tests test record labels the number of flow points in the test and the test control type This basic information should be enough to easily identify a specific test Press lt OK gt to select the current test or press X to return to the Test Definition Editor The Test Definition Editor has a test scroll feature allowing tests to be selected by scrolling see Section 9 5 1 The ordering of the scrolled tests is determined by the alphabetical ordering of the Record Label gt Any edited Test Definition displays in blue text in the Test Selector 9 5 TEST DEFINITION EDITOR All Test Definitions are created or edited using the Test Definition Editor The Editor also acts as a viewer in other COMPASS functions When editing a test verify that each Editor tab contains the proper information This will help to avoid conflicts when using the Test Definition in Run Test mode Refer to Sections 9 5 1 through 9 5 10 for detailed information on the features and entry fields of the Test Definition Editor The Test Definition Editor is made up of multiple sections e Toolbar see Section 9 5 1 Includes tools to identify and select Test Definitions and icons to create save copy and delete Definitions e Points Tabl
323. t text that you wish to display on every report Use the format toolbar and menu features of the Report Editor to make any visual edits desired To insert a Data File link use the Format Insert Field Key menu option or toolbar shortcut see Section 16 3 3 2 After all edits have been made save the template At this point the template has not been selected for report generation unless it is already listed in the lt Current Template gt To use this template for a report first select the template using Format Select Template then select File Generate Report to create the report see Section 16 3 1 2 The font and paragraph format of a field key is maintained during report generation As a result the Data File information that the field key represents will be inserted using the font and alignment characteristics of the field key For example if the Data File key in a template uses a font point size of 20 with bold text The Data File name will display in the completed report with a font point size of 20 and also have bold text Keep this in mind when generating a report template 16 3 1 4 FILE CREATE TEMPLATE This feature is represented by the toolbar icon Create Template is provided to create a template from scratch The flexibility of report templates and the ease with which they can be created and edited allow COMPASS test reports to be personalized to your exact requirements When Create Template is used a n
324. t would be present at the DUT if the DUT were at its normal operating conditions This correction allows the reference flow and DUT indication to be compared even though the DUT is not at its normal operating conditions see Section 8 5 3 DUT Flow Average flow measured by the DUT over the last averaging cycle To change the display unit of measure click the value and select the desired unit from the drop down list DUT Output Average DUT output over the last averaging cycle This averaged output value is used to calculate the average flow The output unit is specified in the DUT Definition see Section 8 5 4 Measured Set Average measured DUT set point for DUTs that control flow with a voltage V or current mA based set point unit The Set Point DMM in the System Configuration is the source of this data see Section 10 2 Min Flow The minimum reference flow measured during the averaging interval The maximum reference flow measured during the averaging interval The standard deviation of the reference flow values measured over the averaging period 6 7 5 DATA GRID RUN SCREEN In Run Test mode while running tests the lt Data Grid gt run screen is available to display the list of points taken and data associated with each point Every point up to the current point in the current test cycle is displayed in this grid The unit of measure for many columns is specified in the corresponding column header As with the other run scr
325. ta Following the settings in the Test Definition Data tab the reference DUT and measured DUT set point are read as many times as possible for the averaging period see Section 9 5 9 If timed averaging is specified in the Test Definition see Section 9 5 4 the averaging time counts down as the flow data is averaged If manual averaging is selected a message displays awaiting confirmation of when to start averaging A fixed averaging time can be entered in this window if desired If the fixed time is entered and the Fixed Average button is pressed the averaging process continues just as though a fixed time were specified in the Test Definition If the manual average is used a new message displays awaiting confirmation of when to end averaging The elapsed time displays on the window until the average is ended Averaging occurs only for references and DUTs that can be read automatically In the event that the current test point is 0 flow and the Force zero option is selected in the Tools Options Run Test tab see Section 11 6 the reference flow value logged is 0 regardless of its actual value Step is repeated for each reading point specified in the test If this is not the last point in a test cycle the sequence repeats starting with the Step Change molbloc If this is the last point in a test cycle the Tools Options End Test tab see Section 11 7 last point selection is used to determine what to do after t
326. tchbox check box Prompt for MFC CB channel check box Always use molbox RFM microrange check box Use active molbox channel by default check box 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Allow selection of gases for which the molbloc is not calibrated Enable MFC switchbox iw Prompt for MFC CB channel Always use molbox RFM microrange Use active molbox channel by default Test molbloc change mode toggle active channel zl Apply water ratio for Air Prompt fornewivalue 0 010 kPa c x sccm 0 00 Sonic nozzle leak rate limit Start Default absolute pressure unit Default temperature unit Display mass flow unit Figure 69 Options molbox Tab Table 42 Options molbox Tab Selections DESCRIPTION Though any molbox supported gas can always be selected on the molbox the molbloc may or may not have been calibrated with that gas The molbox can determine whether the molbloc has been calibrated with a gas or not By default this field is checked to allow a test to proceed with any molbox supported gas regardless of whether the molbloc has been calibrated with that gas When this field is not checked a warning message is generated when a gas with which the molbloc was not specifically calibrated is selected By default this field is checked to provide selections for the MFC switchbox when a molbox1 that supports the switchbox is the flo
327. ter the search text in the Find What field and choose the search options then press Find The search begins at the current cursor location and continues to the end of the document The first occurrence of the search text will be highlighted in the current document To repeatedly search for the same text use the shortcut key CTRL F Table 58 provides information on the Find screen functions Find What Match Case Find Whole Word Only Cancel Figure 94 lt Find gt Panel Page 169 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 58 Find Panel Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Find What The text entered in this field is the search text required entry field Match Case Select this feature when the search should match both case and text check box Find Whole Word Only Causes search to ignore occurrences of the search text that are embedded in other words check box Find Starts the text search according to information provided on he form action button Cancel Closes the search tool action button 16 3 2 6 EDIT FIND NEXT Find Next performs another text search using the most recent search criteria see Section 16 3 2 5 It is most efficient to use the shortcut key combination CTRL F instead of making a menu selection 16 3 27 EDIT SELECT ALL Select All highlights all text in the active document Most frequently selecting
328. tests Page 47 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual See Table 63 in Section 18 4 1 for an exhaustive list and description of all data available for display in the Data Grid run screen iid DUT M Dut DUT Q ZRdg Err ZFS gt slm 0 00 a D oil 0 3330 0 5334 2 737 2 2 001 1 201 0 8303 1 3 001 1 801 0 0918 0 0552 4 000 2 400 02767 0 2207 5 000 3 000 0 5856 0 5822 5 026 3 016 1102 1 096 4 000 2 400 0 2807 0 2239 Figure 25 lt Data Grid gt Run Screen 6 7 6 DATA PLOT RUN SCREEN When running a test the lt Data Plot gt run screen can be used to display a variety of graphs of the data currently logged in the Data Grid The graph can be changed or printed without affecting the run of the test Unlike the Data Plot Data File graphing function no new Data File can be selected However all other functions supported by the graphing tool are available during tests For complete information on the graphing capabilities of COMPASS see Section 12 4 Each point taken during a test causes the graph to update with the current test point information If the lt Force grid selection gt option on the Tools Options Grid tab is not selected the current cycle test data is not automatically displayed on the plot unless that cycle is specifically selected for plotting see Section 11 3 For example if cycle 3 of a 10 cycle test is currently plotted and the test is ex
329. that is used when multiple IEEE 488 cards are installed in the PC However this is a rare case To use IEEE 488 with COMPASS use the Setup System IEEE 488 Card option to select the IEEE 488 card installed in your PC see Section 10 2 When this selection is made no other card related selections are required only the instrument IEEE 488 address must be specified Refer to the instrument documentation for more information on how to determine the instrument IEEE 488 address 13 5 DEVICENET INTERFACE COMPASS supports National Instruments and SST DeviceNet interface cards Select the card to use with the Setup System DeviceNet Card option see Section 10 2 The command protocol as outlined by the ODVA DeviceNet Specification is used by COMPASS to read and set flow For this reason a remote command setup is not necessary Output units and other settings within the device are not changed The DUT Definition must include the correct output range and unit information just like any other DUT The DeviceNet device MaclD and baudrate are the only selections required to setup the DeviceNet interface of a DUT 13 6 TOOLS REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS Tools Remote Communications provides a simple means of sending individual command strings to remote devices and receiving and displaying the response This tool can be used for discreet remote device communication and communications testing Use this tool to familiarize yourself with the device
330. that the target flow value is set in the target flow unit of measure If these units are changed COMPASS converts the current target flow value to the new unit The Tools Options Run Test tab contains the overshoot tolerance that limits the actual minimum and maximum set points based on the range see Section 11 6 To set flows significantly above the DUT s defined range this value must be increased while COMPASS is idle In Run molbox mode there is no DUT information available to define the relationship between analog output and flow As a result flow regulation and jog functions are not available The target flow field allows set points in volts and or mA only based on the reference molbox Table 7 provides information on each of the flow control panel fields Press the lt Activate Change gt button to accept a new target flow value Flow Control Target Flow meoo Flow Regulation LE None E molbox flow DUT flow 5 Activate Change m Continue Figure 18 Flow Control Panel 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 38 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H Table 7 lt Flow Control gt Panel Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Target Flow The set point to activate using the currently configured flow control mechanism This can be the DUT or a flow controller The target flow value entered is assumed to be in the units specified in the dro
331. ther than these will not display regardless of the display mode selected drop down list box Run Test Select the default Run Test run mode display from the list All run screens with the exception of the lt Averaging gt screen are available in this run mode drop down list box Any display selected that contains this window will not arrange as expected Remove Display Selection Use this feature to remove unwanted custom displays Select the display from the list then press the lt gt button drop down list box Page 135 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 136 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 12 DATA 12 1 OVERVIEW When COMPASS runs a test using Run Test it logs exhaustive information about the test in a Data File dat The Data File is automatically generated and stored to a DUT dependent directory The Data menu accesses tools to work directly with COMPASS Data Files dat The data tools allow the Data File to be viewed and printed There is also a plotting tool to produce and print a variety of error plots from the Data File data These tools are provided to allow rapid and direct access to test data without creating complete test reports 12 2 Data View Data File Data View Data File is used to directly view the contents of a test Date File When Data View Data File is selected a standard Win
332. they cannot be read automatically they must be entered manually or set to a default value see Section 11 6 Generally the gas temperature and absolute pressure measurements should be taken at the inlet side of the DUT Some manufacturers supply a test port for the connection of a pressure monitoring device The setup of manual entry of pressure and temperature is a two part process The Setup System lt Pressure Measurement gt and lt Temperature Measurement gt should both be blank when manual entry is to be used see Section 10 2 Use the Tools Options Run Test tab to specify whether temperature and pressure will be entered at the first point each point or by use default value The setup of automatic pressure and temperature measurement is a two step process First the Hardware Definitions of the measuring devices need to be created using the Setup Hardware Temperature and or Pressure tabs see Section 10 3 4 Next they must be selected for use by COMPASS using the Setup System Temperature and or Pressure pull down menus see Section 10 2 Page 23 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual System Config Reference DUT Output DMM Reference molbox Set point power supply Reference molbox m 58 point DMM Reference molbox Frequency Neasurement Pressure Neasurement JRPM3 Example Temperature Neasurement C DMM Example x
333. ting version of COMPASS to automatically upgrade the program When the new version runs for the first time the COMPASS file Upgrade Wizard see Section 2 3 3 will run to facilitate the conversion of Page 3 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual older DUT and Test Files to the new DUT and Test Definitions format If the new version of COMPASS is not installed in the same location as the previous version the automatic update option will not occur Run COMPASS and then select Tools File Upgrade Wizard to convert DUT and Test Files to the new format Most aspects of user setup information and Data Files created with COMPASS versions lower than 4 00 are compatible with release 4 00 and higher To the extent possible COMPASS automatically incorporates older setup information into the required format Table 1 summarizes COMPASS version compatibility Table 1 COMPASS Version Compatibility FEATURE COMPATIBILITY COMMENT Data Files Automatic see Data Files created with COMPASS Ver 4 00 and higher Section 12 contain substantially more data than in previous versions For this reason Data File information such as the molbloc Tare will display as in the Data Viewer and completed reports DUT Files Use the Upgrade DUT Files are no longer maintained as a directory of Wizard see individual files Instead COMPASS uses a single Section 2 3 3 database to store all DUTs The file Upgr
334. tion The command portion designates that a specific set point will occur and the target portion is the numerical set point value The actual command and format are determined by the device so refer to the instrument manual for details Since the target output will change based on test conditions a variable value must be assigned to the target portion of the command This variable is specified by the Set Unit Variable COMPASS substitutes the current numerical set point in the Set Units with the Set Unit Variable to create the final set command Enter the set command string then drag and drop or type the Set Unit Variable text into the appropriate location in the command string See Section 13 2 4 for information on Command Editor features Page 147 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Remote Command No Response Set Unit Variable 1 7 Interface Properties Insert Special Character Command Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt DK Maximum Response time out s 8 Cancel Figure 85 lt Set Commands Editor gt Panel 13 2 4 EDITOR FEATURES All Command Editors have common features and some that are specific to certain types of Command Editors 13 241 LEADING CHARACTERS STRIP lt Leading characters to strip gt applies only to lt Read gt and lt Auxiliary Data gt actual output commands The v
335. tion 9 5 3 The test point table can be cleared using Clear on the Points tab Page 85 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 9 5 3 POINTS TAB The Test Definition Points tab is used to set the Test Point Type and provides a short cut to fill in the Points table automatically if desired see Section 9 5 2 The purpose of the Auto Fill Points tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 26 Points Sequence Tare Control Leak Test Purge Data Test Point Unit Clear LUTE Auto Fill Starting Point 0 Ending Point 100 Step Value 20 ves z Ascending Descending Points Figure 49 Test Definition Editor Points Tab 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 86 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE Test Point Type drop down list Starting Point numeric entry field Ending Point numeric entry field Step Value numeric entry field Ascending Descending Points drop down list selection Auto Fill action button Clear action button Table 26 Test Definition Editor Points Tab Fields DESCRIPTION Determines how the flow point values in the lt Points gt table will be interpreted when the test is run Use the drop down list to select the type The choices are lt DUTFS gt lt Flow Units gt lt Output Units gt or lt Set U
336. tion 9 5 9 The drop down list choices are created using the Temperature tab in the Hardware Definition see Section 10 3 4 If a molbox is selected as the Flow Reference Reference molbloc gt is a choices in this list There are no circumstances in which a selection is required If a selection is present COMPASS will attempt to use the specified device to measure the temperature of the gas at the DUT when applicable If no automated temperature measurement device is available select Manual drop down list selection molbloc temperature can only approximate the temperature of the gas at the DUT Keep this in mind when estimating the uncertainty on the gas temperature at the DUT IEEE 488 Card Select the manufacturer of the IEEE 488 card used by the computer running COMPASS to read IEEE 488 devices included in the System Configuration and or IEEE 488 DUTs whose Output Type is lt IEEE 488 gt in the DUT Definition Read tab A selection in this category is required only to run tests that include communications with an IEEE 488 System Configuration device or an IEEE 488 Output Type DUT Otherwise None may be selected COMPASS supports only CEC and National Instruments IEEE 488 cards To run a test that includes any type of IEEE 488 communications an IEEE 488 card must be included and properly configured for use by the computer running COMPASS Refer to the card instructions for information on how to set up the card and t
337. tle bar of the program from Windows Explorer Depending on the type of file the Report Editor will either generate a report or display the file 16 3 MAIN MENU BAR Page 163 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual The main menu of the Report Editor is divided into several sections each with a separate function Many of these functions can also be accessed by a shortcut included on one of the COMPASS Report Editor toolbars Each menu is summarized immediately below and covered in detail in subsections of this section e File see Section 16 3 1 Print save open and close reports rtf and report templates tpl e Edit see Section 16 3 2 Search cut and paste text These features are also available using the toolbar and standard Windows shortcuts e Format see Section 16 3 3 Insert fields select the current report template e Options see Section 16 3 4 Toggle the display state of toolbar and adjust the default file paths used by the Report Editor e Window see Section 16 3 5 Change the current top Window within the COMPASS Report Editor display This changes the file which will be acted on by the menu options e Help see Section 16 3 6 Access on line help ig COMPASS Report Editor Untitled File Edit Format Options Window Help lej lt E 8 A MS Sans Seri 8 BZU a mNENEN 2 44 COMPASS Report
338. to use the long Data File naming convention as described in Section 18 3 This feature is checked by default Although COMPASS is a check box 32 bit Windows application Data Files may be stored on a network or other location that does not support the long file naming convention To avoid file name truncation uncheck this option to create default file names that are 8 characters or less Write protect all complete data When this option is checked test Data Files are write protected Check this files option to protect data gathered from completed tests Write protected files check box are not easily modified so this option helps to prevent accidental data contamination If this option is unchecked Data Files are NOT write protected Auto delete data files from When this option is checked COMPASS automatically deletes Data Files that incomplete tests do not include at least one complete test cycle This avoids having collecting check box partial Data Files for tests that were not completed If this option is unchecked a prompt for whether to delete the Data File or not appears whenever a test is aborted 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 132 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual FEATURE DESCRIPTION Data file delimiter drop down list box Root Data file directory text entry field Directory Name drop down list box This preference sets the data delimiter for the data in test Dat
339. tton indicates the valve will be activated Activate and deactivate the desired valves and press lt OK gt The cursor will change into the valve driver icon Place it onto any point Realize that the valve driver change occurs before the flow is set for the selected point but after any Change molbloc gt To view the valve driver state of an existing Valve Driver Changes move the cursor over the icon and the existing state will display in a tool tip message Timed Delay displays an input box to allow entry of a delay time After the delay time is entered the cursor will change into a stopwatch that can be dropped onto any test point The entered delay will occur at the beginning of the selected point prior to setting the flow but after any Valve Driver Change Test Point Table The test point table lists the test flow points that will be run in sequential order when the Test Definition is executed The values entered are assumed to be in the unit specified by numeric entry the point Type Indication at the top of the table If the test points exceed the 22 points fields that are normally displayed the scroll bar at the bottom of the table can be used to scroll to additional columns of test points Up to 100 test points can be included The test point table can be filled in by placing the cursor in the test point field and editing the desired test point value It can also be filled in automatically using the Points tab see Sec
340. ual FEATURE Set Units drop down selection list Remote Interface drop down selection list RS 232 Settings conditional display panel IEEE 488 Address conditional entry field Initialization Commands action button Set Commands action button DESCRIPTION Indicates whether the Set Commands are for setting voltage V or current Separate lt Set Commande are set up for reading voltage V and current A in the same profile so that COMPASS can set in either mode as required by the current flow controlling device The Set Commands specified are the commands for setting power in the Set Unite COMPASS always makes the necessary conversion to this unit before sending the set command The choices available are lt RS232 gt and lt IEEE 488 gt To set up the device for remote communications select the interface that is on the device When interface type is selected the rest of the lt Remote Interface gt and lt Command Information gt panels change as appropriate to accommodate definition of the interface characteristics A remote interface selection is required COMPASS generates an error when lt gt is selected If the remote interface selection is RS 232 the lt RS232 Settings information is shown When creating a new device the settings are loaded with COMPASS default settings Port settings are listed baud rate parity data bits stop bits Clicking o
341. ue and unit of measure to be used when the lt Use Default gt choice is specified in the lt Enter At gt selection above The pressure entered is also the default pressure used when creating new DUT Definitions that include a density correction see Section 8 5 3 Enter the pressure value and select the pressure unit of measure Note that the pressure value is an absolute pressure not a gauge pressure Gas density is a function of absolute pressure To convert gauge pressure to absolute pressure add the typical value of atmospheric pressure at your location or standard atmospheric pressure of 101 325 kPa 14 696 psi to the gauge pressure value Specifies the temperature value and unit of measure to be used when the lt Use Default gt choice is selected in the lt Enter At gt selection above The temperature entered is also the default temperature used when creating new DUT Definitions that include a density correction see Section 8 5 3 Enter the default relative humidity for humidity based calculations Enter the value in terms of a percentage concentration of relative humidity Select this option to enter pressure and temperature values in the default units instead of the units specified in the selected DUT COMPASS will convert the entered value into the units setup by the DUT If the DUT does not require a pressure or temperature value the default manual entry unit is always the default units specified in the default pressure and tem
342. ufacturer is DH Instruments the drop down list choices include all of the DHI models which COMPASS supports with remote communications non DHI models must be entered manually Write in the device s serial number Do not use the following charactere V 2 lt gt a comma or tab character These charactere will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 11 8 Write in a device identification if desired The field can be used for internal tracking of devices or any other information desired The value entered will be included in the run test Data Files and can be included in reports Do not use the following charactere V 2 lt gt a comma or tab character These charactere will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 11 8 The value entered should represent the next required calibration date of the device No special formatting is expected or checked in this field however entering the date in a consistent format including the full year month and day is recommended The value entered is logged in the run test Data Files and can be included in reports The uncertainty of the reference expressed in
343. uired Drop Select the flow controller flow unit from the drop down list The flow range Down Selection List information entered should always be entered in the selected unit If the desired flow unit is not in the list use the Edit Units option at the top of the list to display the Flow Unit Editor see Section 14 All new units created automatically appear in the list of flow units Flow Range Required Numeric Enter the lowest flow controller flow Typically this value is 0 In some special Min Flow Entry cases the minimum flow is non zero Regardless the value entered must be the expected flow when the flow controllers Min Set occurs Flow Range Required Numeric Enter the maximum flow controller flow This is the expected flow Max Flow Entry when the flow controller s Max Set occurs Calibration Gas Optional Drop All molbox supported gases are selectable in this list Select a gas Down List then enter a lt K Factor to N2 gt see immediately below for all gases supported by the flow controller The lt K Factor to N2 gt information is stored for every gas entered 1 is used by default for all gases not specifically set up 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 116 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Table 40 Hardware Definition lt Edit Controller gt Screen Fields FEATURE FIELD TYPE DESCRIPTION Optional Numeric This is the flow controllers gas conversion factor from the selected
344. units see Section 8 5 5 COMPASS first determines the tolerance value in DUT flow units and then compares the value to the current DUT flow error to determine if the error is smaller in or larger out than the tolerance When the DUT tolerance selection is DUTspan Reading the tolerance is the sum of the two values If the selection is DUTspan or Reading the tolerance used is the greater of the two values Tolerances that are defined in DUT flow set or output units are also compared directly in flow units The conversion from set and output units is described in Section 19 3 T del T DUTspan DUTspan 9 100 XE T reading m x Re Q 100 VARIABLE DESCRIPTION DUTFS tolerance value defined in the DUT definition Qdurspan DUT flow range span as determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum flow output values in the DUT Definition Maximum allowable DUT reference flow deviation based on DUTFS tolerance Current reference flow Reading tolerance value defined in the DUT definition OT un Maximum allowable DUT reference flow deviation based on a Reading tolerance Page 191 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 19 7 BEST FIT All best fit values in COMPASS are determined using the least squares method This defines a selectable order polynomial equation that defines a line or curve that minimizes t
345. uring test execution this icon is disabled Only the current test can be viewed in the plot tool while a test is active Allows the graph currently selected to be printed using the standard Windows print function G Allows switching between the different plots types using the current Data File ll gt Displays an options window to customize the plot properties see Section 12 4 2 Page 139 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 12 4 1 PLOT TYPES From the Plots button eleven predefined plot types can be selected Each new plot selection automatically generates the selected plot in accordance with the current Plot Properties see Section 12 4 2 Depending on the selected properties the plots may include tolerance bars or the results of a best fit straight line fit may be applied to the test data The selection of plot type is accessed by clicking on the 2 icon while viewing a plot The current plot choice is indicated by a check mark by that menu item The plot types available are described in Table 51 See Section 19 4 for information on calculation of the errors that are plotted Table 51 Data Plot Types PLOT TYPE DESCRIPTION Reference Flow vs The reference flow in the DUT s flow units is plotted against the DUT flow in DUT Flow the same flow unit If there is perfect agreement between the DUT and the reference this plot is a straight line starting at origin with
346. urrent test No new Data Files can be loaded in the plot tool while a test is running see Section 6 7 6 Displays a pop up window allowing the selection of all active remote interface spy windows see Section 6 7 7 These windows are useful when troubleshooting remote communications problems in COMPASS Each window displays the exact text used to send a command the raw response to the command and the formatted response used by COMPASS A separate spy window is displayed for each device even when the interface is shared For example a single device can be setup to read both the DUT pressure and temperature Since COMPASS treats these setups as two separate devices a different spy window will display for each setup The spy options are listed below e molbox Displays a spy window listing all command response interaction with the reference molbox DUT Read All non molbox instruments used to read the DUT output display when selected Up to three individual spy windows can be activated by this function depending on the DUT currently being run If no remote interfaces are used to read DUT output information this selection is not available DUT Set Displays a spy window of the instrument interface used to set the DUT flow This could be the flow controller power supply or the DUT interface If no remote interfaces are used to set the DUT flow this selection is not available Auxiliary Displays the spy windows of all active Auxiliary D
347. used to create a template with the exact same features as the older version see Section 16 Process Gas Automatic All releases of COMPASS use the same process gas file Information During the installation process the setup program displays an overwrite prompt if a progas txt file is already present DUT Models Automatic Any models set up in an existing version of COMPASS are automatically supported by the new installation 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 4 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 2 3 3 TOOLS FILE UPGRADE WIZARD When the COMPASS installation is complete run the program and select Tools File Upgrade Wizard to convert old DUT and Test Files to the new database format DUT and Test Files can be selected individually or by directory All selected files are automatically built into the appropriate COMPASS database The file name of the converted file is set to the lt Record Label gt of the database equivalent record Press the lt Next gt button to proceed with the next step in the process or press lt Back gt to repeat a previous step There are four 4 sequential steps to the upgrade process as described below Select the type of file to upgrade DUT dut or Test Files tsv tsa Determine whether files should be selected individually or globally from a selected directory When the individual option is selected a file dialog box displays allowing the selection of a single or multi
348. ve with the Flow Regulation gt option Regulate Flow This feature is used to specify to what device s reading the flow should be adjusted To when an automated flow control device is included in the test The choices are drop down list e None COMPASS calculates and sends the command for the target flow and entry field point to the controller and makes no further adjustments In this case how close the final flow at a flow point will be to the desired value depends on the calibration of the controlling flowmeter Check lt Jog before dwell gt if you want to adjust flow at the point for example to put the DUT reading on a cardinal point Molbox flow At each flow point in the test COMPASS continuously readjusts the set point command to the flow controller to adjust the flow to the target value as indicated by the molbox This option causes the final flow value at a test point to be very close to the cardinal point as read by the molbox DUT flow At each flow point in the test COMPASS continuously readjusts the set point command to the flow controller to adjust the flow to the target value as indicated by the DUT This option causes the final flow value at a test point to be very close to the cardinal point as read by the DUT For this selection to operate the DUT cannot be a manual entry output type The Regulation Delay entry determines the time in seconds between regulation loop cycles This is how often the set point will
349. vice selected in the System Configuration see Section 10 2 The output units of the DUT must be Hz kHz MHz or s COMPASS automatically makes the necessary conversions from the frequency based output unit typically Hz to the DUT s output units No command information is required as commands are provided in the frequency counter Hardware Definition Manual DUT data must be entered manually in Run Test and Run DUT modes No command or interface information is required RS 232 Settings This is the interfacing information for a DUT whose output type is RS 232 or IEEE 488 IEEE 488 Address An entry in this field is only required if the Output Type in this tab is RS 232 or IEEE 488 conditional entry field Initialization These are the commands needed to initialize a DUT whose Output Type is RS 232 or IEEE 488 Commands Click the lt Edit gt button to display the Remote Command Editor form see Section 13 2 conditional drop Enter the desired commands then close the form These commands will be issued during the down list action initialization process of Run DUT and Run Test run modes when the DUT Output Type is button RS 232 or IEEE 488 If the DUT does not require a specific initialization this field is not used Refer to the DUT s remote interface manual to determine whether initialization commands are necessary Possible initialization commands include setting unit of measure gas or range If init
350. w reference in Run DUT and Run Test run modes If the optional MFC switchbox was not purchased with the molbox or will not be used uncheck this function to avoid the extra prompts that occur during test initialization Check this option when the channel used on an MFC CB may differ from test to test A message displays during test initialization that allows the MFC CB channel to be selected for controlling or measuring an MFC If an MFC CB is not selected for use in the Hardware Configuration this option is not ignored Do not check this option if you wish to use the active MFC CB channel for controlling and measuring MFCs This option is on by default to always activate the molbox RFM microrange when available as part of the test initialization This is typically the desired use of the molbox RFM Uncheck the field to use the current microrange state when using the molbox RFM See the molbox RFM Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on the microrange Check this option to use the currently active molbox1 95 channel when initializing the molbox Checking this option speeds up the initialization time by preventing the need to read both molbox channels For example if the molbox1 95 is setup to use channel B COMPASS assumes channel B will be used for testing This feature has no function when a molbox1 or molbox RFM is used as the flow reference device Page 122 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual
351. when viewing the Data File see Section 18 4 When the box is unchecked default value no interaction with auxiliary data is used during tests Edit List Press this button to edit the list of Auxiliary Data devices used during the test see Section 9 5 10 1 The selected devices display in the list box when the editor closed action button 9 5 10 1 AUXILIARY DATA DEVICE SETUP The lt Auxiliary Data Device Selector gt is used to select the Auxiliary Data devices that will be used for data acquisition Select the desired devices on the left and drag them to the right side to select them for data acquisition Double click the items listed on the right to remove them from the list Up to 10 devices can be used and any one device can be used multiple times There will always be a lt Manual gt option in the list to allow unlabeled data to be manually entered Figure 57 shows the lt Auxiliary Data Device Selector gt See Section 10 3 7 for details on setting up an Auxiliary Data Device 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc Page 96 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual H 4 Available Auxiliary Devices Available Devices Selected Devices 1 molbox RE 2 PPCK For Pressure Prs kPa 3 molbox RE RE 4 Manual PPCK For Pressure ONIy Prs kPa molbox RE Co Manual Good Data Drag up to 10 items from the Available Devices list to the Selected Devices list Use CTRL Up or Down arrow to
352. x Displays and changes the current font size Enter the numerical value of the desired font size and press ENTER Each value entered or present in the document is added to the list of available font sizes and can be selected using J Displays and changes the current font bold setting CTRL B is a shortcut to this toolbar item This font is in bold Displays and changes the current font italic setting CTRL l is a shortcut to this toolbar item This font is in italics Displays and changes the current font underscore setting CTRL U is a shortcut to this toolbar item This font uses an underscore Displays and changes the current font strike out setting This font uses a the fent strike out Displays and changes the paragraph justification to left Left justification forces all text to begin at the current left indentation point Only one style of justification can be used per paragraph Displays and changes the paragraph justification to center When active text is centered between the left and right indentation points Displays and changes the paragraph justification to right When active text is aligned to the right indentation point of the document Most commonly this is the right margin Adds or removes bullets to a paragraph Page 174 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual 16 3 4 3 OPTIONS RULER The Ruler gives a visual indication in inches of the document layout At all times the lef
353. x MFC control option is to make sure the molbox is set up with the proper remote interface in a Reference Hardware Definition and select the molbox in the System Configuration see Section 10 5 1 2 1 SETUP lt VOLTAGE CURRENT gt OUTPUT TYPE Use the Setup DUT menu choice to open the DUT Definition Editor see Section 8 Create a new DUT Definition and set up the basic header information corresponding to the DUT In the Range tab see Section 8 5 4 select the flow range units from the flow units list and enter the flow min and max values 0 and 1 respectively Check the lt Controller gt checkbox on the lt Set Range gt panel Now type or select V as the output and set units Enter 0 and 5 as the min and max output and set point values DUT s that use voltage or current signals to indicate flow should use the lt Voltage Current gt lt Output Type gt This tells COMPASS to use the instrument currently selected as the DUT Output DMM gt in the System Configuration to measure the DUT flow Select lt Voltage Current gt as the DUT Set Mode This tells COMPASS to use the Set Point Power Supply selected in the Hardware Definition to control the DUT flow Use the Save toolbar icon to save the DUT 5 1 22 REFERENCE SETUP Since we have assumed the reference molbox in Example 1 is already properly set up we only need to make the necessary Hardware Definition selections to use the MFC control option Use the Setup Syst
354. x channel of the active molbloc The molbloc channel displays only when a two channel molbox is the active reference 6 7 3 DUT OUTPUT RUN SCREEN The DUT Output run screen provides a real time update of all relevant DUT output information Use this display to view raw output information directly from the DUT Do not confuse this run screen with the DUT Definition display The DUT Definition display merely displays the current DUT Definition in the DUT Definition Editor Table 11 describes all of the fields on the DUT Output run screen 4 DUT OF x Figure 23 DUT Output Run Screen Table 11 DUT Output Run Screen Fields The top of the DUT Output run screen displays the flow measured by the DUT in the current DUT flow units The value is updated each time the necessary output information is returned from the DUT If the DUT is manual entry this field is updated only when the user enters new output information Raw DUT output The displayed value is always in the output unit setup in the DUT record DUT gas pressure for DUTs that specify a density correction If no density correction is set up the pressure field is N A see Section 8 5 3 When specified the Pressure Device in the System Configuration is the source of this pressure value see Section 10 2 Otherwise the pressure displayed is a default value or the last value manually entered see Section 11 6 Temperature DUT gas temperature fo
355. y tests with any flow reference Using the Setup Hardware Reference tab set up a reference selecting lt Other gt as the lt Manufacturer gt see Section 10 3 3 A test can then be run in which reference flow values are entered manually at each point DUT readings can be automated or not as in any other test This feature allows COMPASS to be used to standardize flow calibration procedures and data reporting even with references with which COMPASS cannot interface directly Entry of reference flow values must be in the flow units that are selected for display on the molbox To change these units go to the Tools Options molbox tab and use lt Display mass flow unit gt Page 9 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc H COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Set up COMPASS for my volume or actual flow units From the Setup DUT Range tab select the Unit drop down under the Flow Range section of the window Scroll through this list to find the units you desire If they do not exist they can be added using the Edit Units selection or the Tools Options Flow Unit Editor option see Section 8 5 4 When selecting volume flow units COMPASS requires the actual operating conditions temperature and absolute pressure at the DUT The temperature and pressure can be either acquired automatically or entered manually by the user The Setup System selections determine the data acquisition method for pressure and tem
356. ys the location of all tabs that affect the current Tab insertion point To add a tab click the ruler where you want the tab to be located a appears indicating the new tab location Adjust tab locations by using a mouse drag and drop operation Right click a tab to remove it from the ruler A Windows standard tab of 0 5 inches is always present even when no other tabs display on the ruler A maximum of 15 tabs can be used to affect a single range of text 163 44 OPTIONS PATH Path allows the selection of the default path for storage of Data Files Report Templates and Reports A browse key to the right of each path definition allows selection using a standard Windows file selection tool New directories can be created A check box on the Report Destination frame allows the location of created Reports to automatically be the same as the Data File used to generate the report The Data File path specified by Options Path in the COMPASS Report Page 175 1998 2003 DH Instruments Inc 16 4 COMPASS for molbox User s Manual Editor determines the default storage location for Data Files used by the Report Editor There is also a Data File path selection in COMPASS on the Tools Options Data File tab see Section 11 6 Normally the Report Editor and COMPASS main program default Data File paths are set to the same location 16 3 5 WINDOW The Window menu contains a list of the file names of all

COMPASS® for molbox™ Flow Calibration Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

COMPASS&reg; for molbox&trade; Flow Calibration Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

COMPASS® for molbox™ Flow Calibration Software